2014 CLS PDF

CLS
Operator's Manual
CLS Operator's Manual
É2185843681+ËÍ
2185843681
Order no. 6515 1504 13 Part no. 218 584 36 81 Edition A 2014
Symbols i Practical tips or further information that Publication details
Registered trademarks: could be helpful to you. Internet
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of X This symbol indicates an
Bluetooth SIG Inc. instruction that must be followed. Further information about Mercedes-Benz
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. X Several of these symbols in vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
succession indicate an instruction on the following websites:
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
with several steps. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are (Y page) This symbol tells you where you http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
can find more information about a only)
registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
topic.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
YY This symbol indicates a warning or
Johnson Controls. Editorial office
an instruction that is continued on
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered
the next page.
trademarks of Apple Inc. Display This font indicates a display in the You are welcome to forward any queries or
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of
multifunction display/COMAND suggestions you may have regarding this
Harman International Industries. display. Operator's Manual to the technical
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are
documentation team at the following
Parts of the software in the vehicle are address:
registered trademarks of Microsoft protected by copyright © 2005
Corporation. Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
The FreeType Project 70546 Stuttgart, Germany
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius http://www.freetype.org. All rights ©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
XM Radio Inc. reserved.
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of
or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from Daimler AG.
iBiquity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are
registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,
LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the
following symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes draw your attention to hazards
that endanger your health or life, or the health
or life of others.
H Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with
information on environmentally aware actions
or disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to

dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
As at 20.07.2012
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the
instructions and warning notices in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage
to the vehicle or personal injury to you or
others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry specification
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right

to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep printed copies of the documents in the

vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,
always pass the documents on to the new
owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2185843681 É2185843681+ËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29
Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 39
Opening and closing ........................... 75
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 97
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 115
Climate control ................................. 129
Driving and parking .......................... 145
On-board computer and displays .... 217
Stowage and features ...................... 277
Maintenance and care ...................... 305
Breakdown assistance ..................... 319
Wheels and tires ............................... 333
Technical data ................................... 371

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Air bags

Display message ............................ 244
12 V socket Front air bag (driver, front
see Sockets passenger) ....................................... 44
4ETS Important safety notes .................... 42
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Knee bag .......................................... 45
Traction System) PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel indicator lamp .................................. 47
drive) .................................................. 193 Pelvis air bag ................................... 46
4MATIC off-road system ................... 193 Safety guidelines ............................. 41
Side impact air bag .......................... 45
A Window curtain air bag .................... 47
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Air-conditioning system
Display message ............................ 238 see Climate control
Function/notes ................................ 66 AIR FLOW ........................................... 137
Important safety notes .................... 66 AIRMATIC
Warning lamp ................................. 267 Display message ............................ 252
Activating/deactivating cooling Function/notes ............................. 189
with air dehumidification ................. 136 Air vents
Active Blind Spot Assist Glove box ....................................... 142
Activating/deactivating (on- Important safety notes .................. 142
board computer) ............................ 228 Rear ............................................... 143
Display message ............................ 254 Setting ........................................... 142
Function/information .................... 211 Setting the center air vents ........... 142
Active Driving Assistance package . 211 Setting the side air vents ............... 142
Active Lane Keeping Assist Ambient lighting
Activating/deactivating (on- Setting the brightness (on-board
board computer) ............................ 229 computer) ...................................... 231
Display message ............................ 253 Setting the color (on-board
Function/information .................... 214 computer) ...................................... 231
Active light function ......................... 121 AMG adaptive sport suspension
Active multicontour seat system ................................................ 190
Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 103 Ashtray ............................................... 287
Active Parking Assist Assistance display (on-board
Detecting parking spaces .............. 197 computer) .......................................... 227
Display message ............................ 254 Assistance menu (on-board
Function/notes ............................. 196 computer) .......................................... 227
Important safety notes .................. 196 ASSYST PLUS
Parking .......................................... 198 Displaying a service message ........ 310
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 72 Hiding a service message .............. 310
Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 190 Notes ............................................. 309
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Resetting the service interval
Display message ............................ 248 display ........................................... 310
Function/notes ............................. 121 Service message ............................ 309
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 376 Special service requirements ......... 310
Index 5
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Transmission position display ........ 155

Activating/deactivating ................... 74 Transmission position display
Function ........................................... 74 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 156
Switching off the alarm .................... 74 Transmission positions .................. 158
ATTENTION ASSIST Automatic transmission
Activating/deactivating ................. 228 emergency mode ............................... 164
Display message ............................ 251
Function/notes ............................. 203 B
Audio system
Backup lamp
see separate operating instructions
Changing bulbs .............................. 125
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Bag hook ............................................ 283
see Qualified specialist workshop
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 67
AUTO lights
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
Display message ............................ 247
PLUS) .................................................... 67
see Lights
Battery (SmartKey)
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
Checking .......................................... 79
stop function) .................................... 152
Important safety notes .................... 79
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
Replacing ......................................... 79
start/stop function) .......................... 151
Battery (vehicle)
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 117
Charging ........................................ 324
Automatic transmission
Display message ............................ 250
Automatic drive program ............... 160
Important safety notes .................. 322
Changing gear ............................... 158
Jump starting ................................. 326
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 155
Belt force limiter
Display message ............................ 260
Activation ......................................... 59
Drive program display .................... 156
Function ........................................... 59
Driving tips .................................... 158
Blind Spot Assist
Emergency running mode .............. 164
Activating/deactivating ................. 228
Engaging drive position .................. 158
Display message ............................ 254
Engaging neutral ............................ 157
Notes/function .............................. 207
Engaging park position (AMG
see Active Blind Spot Assist
vehicles) ........................................ 157
Bottle holder ...................................... 285
Engaging reverse gear ................... 157
Brake fluid
Engaging the park position ............ 156
Kickdown ....................................... 159 Display message ............................ 240
Manual drive program .................... 161 Notes ............................................. 376
Manual drive program (AMG Brake lamps
vehicles) ........................................ 162 Display message ............................ 246
Manual drive program (vehicles Brakes
with Sports package AMG) ............ 162 ABS .................................................. 66
Overview ........................................ 155 BAS .................................................. 67
Problem (malfunction) ................... 164 BAS PLUS ........................................ 67
Program selector button ................ 159 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 376
Pulling away ................................... 150 Display message ............................ 238
Selector lever ................................ 155 Driving tips .................................... 172
Shift ranges ................................... 162 High-performance brake system .... 173
Starting the engine ........................ 149 Important safety notes .................. 172
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 160 Maintenance .................................. 173
6 Index
Parking brake ................................ 169 Center console

Warning lamp ................................. 266 Lower section .................................. 35
Breakdown Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 36
see Flat tire Upper section .................................. 34
see Towing away Central locking
Bulbs Automatic locking (on-board
see Changing bulbs computer) ...................................... 232
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 76
C Changing bulbs
California
Overview of bulb types .................. 125
Important notice for retail
Reversing lamps ............................ 125
customers and lessees .................... 23
Child-proof locks
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Rear doors ....................................... 65
Care
Children
Carpets .......................................... 318
In the vehicle ................................... 60
Car wash ........................................ 311
Restraint systems ............................ 60
Display ........................................... 315
Special seat belt retractor ............... 63
Exhaust pipe .................................. 315
Child seat
Exterior lights ................................ 314
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Gear or selector lever .................... 316
anchors ............................................ 63
Interior ........................................... 315
Top Tether ....................................... 64
Matte finish ................................... 313
Cigarette lighter ................................ 288
Night View Assist Plus ................... 316
Cleaning
Notes ............................................. 311
Mirror turn signal ........................... 314
Paint .............................................. 313
Climate control
Plastic trim .................................... 316
Automatic climate control (3-
Power washer ................................ 312
zone) .............................................. 134
Rear view camera .......................... 315
Controlling automatically ............... 137
Roof lining ...................................... 318
Cooling with air dehumidification . . 136
Seat belt ........................................ 317
Defrosting the windows ................. 140
Seat cover ..................................... 317
Defrosting the windshield .............. 139
Sensors ......................................... 315
Dual-zone automatic climate
Steering wheel ............................... 316
control ........................................... 131
Trim pieces .................................... 316
Washing by hand ........................... 312
Indicator lamp ................................ 137
Wheels ........................................... 314
Information about using dual-zone
Windows ........................................ 314
automatic climate control .............. 132
Wiper blades .................................. 314
Information on using 3-zone
Wooden trim .................................. 316
automatic climate control .............. 135
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 282
Maximum cooling .......................... 139
Car wash (care) ................................. 311
Overview of systems ...................... 130
CD player/CD changer (on-board
Problems with cooling with air
computer) .......................................... 225
dehumidification ............................ 137
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 141
Rear control panel ......................... 134
Index 7
Refrigerant ..................................... 378 Cooling

Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 379 see Climate control
Setting the air distribution ............. 138 Copyright ............................................. 27
Setting the airflow ......................... 139 Cornering light function
Setting the air vents ...................... 142 Display message ............................ 245
Setting the climate mode (AIR Function/notes ............................. 121
FLOW) ............................................ 137 Crash-responsive emergency
Setting the temperature ................ 138 lighting ............................................... 124
Setting the temperature with 3- Cruise control
zone automatic climate control ..... 138 Activation conditions ..................... 176
Setting the temperature with dual- Cruise control lever ....................... 176
zone automatic climate control ..... 138 Deactivating ................................... 177
Switching air-recirculation mode Display message ............................ 257
on/off ............................................ 141 Driving system ............................... 175
Switching on/off ........................... 135 Function/notes ............................. 175
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 141 Important safety notes .................. 175
Switching the rear window Setting a speed .............................. 177
defroster on/off ............................ 140 Storing and maintaining current
Switching the ZONE function on/ speed ............................................. 176
off .................................................. 139 Cup holder
Cockpit Center console .............................. 284
Overview .......................................... 30 Center console in the rear
see Instrument cluster compartment ................................. 285
Collapsible spare wheel Important safety notes .................. 284
Inflating ......................................... 368 Rear compartment ......................... 285
see Emergency spare wheel Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 26
COMAND Customer Relations Department ....... 26
see separate operating instructions
COMAND display D
Cleaning ......................................... 315
Combination switch .......................... 119 Data
Compass see Technical data
Calibrating ..................................... 303 Daytime running lamps
Calling up ....................................... 302 Display message ............................ 247
Setting ........................................... 302 Function/notes ............................. 117
Consumption statistics (on-board Switching on/off (on-board
computer) .......................................... 222 computer) ...................................... 230
Convenience closing feature .............. 90 Declarations of conformity ................. 25
Convenience opening feature ............ 89 Delayed switch-off
Coolant (engine) Exterior lighting (on-board
Checking the level ......................... 308 computer) ...................................... 231
Display message ............................ 248 Interior lighting .............................. 232
Filling capacity ............................... 377 Diagnostics connection ...................... 25
Important safety notes .................. 377 Digital speedometer ......................... 223
Temperature (on-board computer) . 234 DIRECT SELECT lever
Temperature gauge ........................ 219 see Automatic transmission
Warning lamp ................................. 273
8 Index
Display messages Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 162

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 309 Manual (vehicles with Sports
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 237 package AMG) ............................... 162
Driving systems ............................. 251 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 234
Engine ............................................ 248 Drive program selector ..................... 159
General notes ................................ 237 Driver's door
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 237 see Doors
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 262 Driving abroad
Lights ............................................. 245 Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 311
Safety systems .............................. 238 Symmetrical low beam .................. 116
SmartKey ....................................... 262 Driving on flooded roads .................. 174
Tires ............................................... 258 Driving safety systems
Vehicle ........................................... 260 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 66
Distance recorder ............................. 222 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 72
see Trip odometer BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 67
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 275 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
DISTRONIC PLUS PLUS) ............................................... 67
Activating ....................................... 180 Electronic brake force distribution ... 71
Activation conditions ..................... 180 ESP® (Electronic Stability
Deactivating ................................... 184 Program) .......................................... 68
Display message ............................ 255 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
Displays in the multifunction System) ........................................... 69
display ........................................... 184 Important safety information ........... 66
Function/notes ............................. 177 Overview .......................................... 66
Important safety notes .................. 177 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 72
Setting the specified minimum Driving systems
distance ......................................... 183 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 211
Warning lamp ................................. 275 Active Driving Assistance
Doors package ......................................... 211
Automatic locking (on-board Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 214
computer) ...................................... 232 Active Parking Assist ..................... 196
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 83 AIRMATIC ...................................... 189
Central locking/unlocking AMG adaptive sport suspension
(SmartKey) ....................................... 76 system ........................................... 190
Control panel ................................... 38 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 203
Display message ............................ 261 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 207
Emergency locking ........................... 84 Cruise control ................................ 175
Emergency unlocking ....................... 84 Display message ............................ 251
Important safety notes .................... 82 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 177
Opening (from inside) ...................... 82 HOLD function ............................... 186
Drinking and driving ......................... 170 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 209
Drinks holder Lane Tracking package .................. 207
see Bottle holder Night View Assist Plus ................... 204
Drive program PARKTRONIC ................................. 193
Automatic ...................................... 160 RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 188
Display ........................................... 155 Rear view camera .......................... 199
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 156
Manual ........................................... 161
Index 9
Driving tips Emergency release

AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 173 Driver's door .................................... 84
Automatic transmission ................. 158 Fuel filler flap ................................. 166
Brakes ........................................... 172 Trunk ............................................... 88
Break-in period .............................. 146 Vehicle ............................................. 84
Downhill gradient ........................... 172 Emergency spare wheel
Drinking and driving ....................... 170 Important safety notes .................. 367
Driving abroad ............................... 116 Points to remember ....................... 367
Driving in winter ............................. 174 Removing ....................................... 368
Driving on flooded roads ................ 174 Storage location ............................ 368
Driving on wet roads ...................... 174 Stowing .......................................... 368
Exhaust check ............................... 170 Technical data ............................... 370
Fuel ................................................ 170 Emergency Tensioning Devices
General .......................................... 169 Function ........................................... 59
Hydroplaning ................................. 174 Safety guidelines ............................. 41
Icy road surfaces ........................... 174 Emissions control
Limited braking efficiency on Service and warranty information .... 23
salted roads ................................... 172 Engine
Snow chains .................................. 337 Check Engine warning lamp ........... 273
Symmetrical low beam .................. 116 Display message ............................ 248
Wet road surface ........................... 172 ECO start/stop function ................ 150
DVD audio Engine number ............................... 373
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 225 Irregular running ............................ 154
DVD video Jump-starting ................................. 326
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 226 Starting problems .......................... 154
Starting the engine with the
E SmartKey ....................................... 149
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 149
EASY-ENTRY feature
Switching off .................................. 168
Activating/deactivating ................. 233
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 331
Function/notes ............................. 108
Engine electronics
EASY-EXIT feature
Problem (malfunction) ................... 154
Crash-responsive ........................... 109
Engine oil
Function/notes ............................. 108
Adding ........................................... 308
Switching on/off ........................... 233
Additives ........................................ 376
EBD (electronic brake force
Checking the oil level ..................... 307
distribution)
Checking the oil level using the
Display message ............................ 240
dipstick .......................................... 307
Function/notes ................................ 71
Display message ............................ 250
ECO display
Filling capacity ............................... 376
Function/notes ............................. 170
Notes about oil grades ................... 375
On-board computer ....................... 223
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 307
ECO start/stop function
Temperature (on-board computer) . 234
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 151
Viscosity ........................................ 376
Deactivating/activating ................. 152
General information ....................... 151
Introduction ................................... 150
10 Index
ESP® (Electronic Stability Displaying the current

Program) consumption .................................. 223
AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 234 Displaying the range ...................... 223
Deactivating/activating (AMG Driving tips .................................... 170
vehicles) .......................................... 70 Fuel gauge ............................... 31, 219
Deactivating/activating (except Grade (gasoline) ............................ 374
AMG vehicles) ................................ 227 Important safety notes .................. 374
Deactivating/activating (notes; Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 374
except AMG vehicles) ...................... 69 Problem (malfunction) ................... 167
Display message ............................ 238 Refueling ........................................ 164
ETS/4ETS ........................................ 69 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 374
Function/notes ................................ 68 Fuel filler flap
Important safety information ........... 68 Emergency release ........................ 166
Warning lamp ................................. 269 Opening/closing ............................ 165
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Fuel level
System) ................................................ 69 Calling up the range (on-board
Exhaust check ................................... 170 computer) ...................................... 223
Exhaust pipe (cleaning Fuel tank
instructions) ...................................... 315 Capacity ........................................ 374
Exterior lighting Problem (malfunction) ................... 167
Setting options .............................. 116 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool
see Lights kit) ...................................................... 320
Exterior mirrors Fuses
Adjusting ....................................... 109 Allocation chart ............................. 331
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 111 Before changing ............................. 331
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 110 Fuse box in the engine
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 110 compartment ................................. 332
Folding in when locking (on-board Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 332
computer) ...................................... 233 Important safety notes .................. 331
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 110
Setting ........................................... 110 G
Storing settings (memory
Garage door opener
function) ........................................ 112
Clearing the memory ..................... 301
Storing the parking position .......... 111
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 279
Opening/closing the garage door .. 301
Programming (button in the rear-
F view mirror) ................................... 299
Filler cap Gear indicator (on-board
see Fuel filler flap computer) .......................................... 234
First-aid kit ......................................... 320 Genuine ................................................ 22
Flat tire Glove box ........................................... 279
MOExtended tires .......................... 321
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 321 H
Floormat ............................................. 303
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 120
Fuel
Head bags
Additives ........................................ 375
Display message ............................ 242
Consumption statistics .................. 222
Index 11
Headlamps Manual control ............................... 124

Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 309 Overview ........................................ 123
Cleaning system (function) ............ 120 Reading lamp ................................. 123
Cleaning system (notes) ................ 378 Setting the brightness of the
Fogging up ..................................... 122 ambient lighting (on-board
see Automatic headlamp mode computer) ...................................... 231
Head restraints Setting the brightness of the
Adjusting ....................................... 100 display/switch (on-board
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 101 computer) ...................................... 230
Adjusting (rear) .............................. 101 Setting the color of the ambient
Installing/removing (rear) .............. 102 lighting (on-board computer) ......... 231
Luxury ............................................ 101
Heating J
see Climate control
Jack
High-beam headlamps
Storage location ............................ 320
Display message ............................ 246
Using ............................................. 359
Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 326
Assist on/off ................................. 122
Switching on/off ........................... 119
Hill start assist .................................. 150 K
HOLD function KEYLESS-GO
Display message ............................ 252 Convenience closing feature ............ 90
Function/notes ............................. 186 Display message ............................ 262
Hood Locking ............................................ 77
Closing ........................................... 307 Start/Stop button .......................... 147
Display message ............................ 261 Starting the engine ........................ 149
Important safety notes .................. 306 Unlocking ......................................... 77
Opening ......................................... 306 Key positions
Hydroplaning ..................................... 174 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 147
SmartKey ....................................... 147
I Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 159
Ignition lock
Manual drive program .................... 163
see Key positions
Knee bag .............................................. 45
Immobilizer .......................................... 73
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
L
Instrument cluster Lamps
Overview .................................. 31, 219 see Warning and indicator lamps
Settings ......................................... 229 Lane Keeping Assist
Warning and indicator Activating/deactivating ................. 229
lamps ....................................... 32, 264 Display message ............................ 253
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 230 Function/information .................... 209
Interior lighting ................................. 123 Lane Tracking package ..................... 207
Automatic control .......................... 123 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 235
Delayed switch-off (on-board LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
computer) ...................................... 232 anchors ................................................ 63
Emergency lighting ........................ 124
12 Index
Light function, active Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 247 Display message ............................ 245
Lights Setting for driving abroad
Activating/deactivating the (symmetrical) ................................. 116
interior lighting delayed switch-off . 232 Switching on/off ........................... 118
Active light function ....................... 121 Lumbar support
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 117 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
Cornering light function ................. 121 support .......................................... 103
Driving abroad ............................... 116 Luxury head restraints ..................... 101
Hazard warning lamps ................... 120
High beam flasher .......................... 120 M
High-beam headlamps ................... 119
M+S tires ............................................ 336
Light switch ................................... 116
Low-beam headlamps .................... 118 Malfunction message
Parking lamps ................................ 118 see Display messages
Setting the brightness of the Massage function (PULSE) ............... 103
ambient lighting (on-board Matte finish (cleaning
computer) ...................................... 231 instructions) ...................................... 313
Setting the brightness of the mbrace
display/switch (on-board Call priority .................................... 294
computer) ...................................... 230 Display message ............................ 241
Setting the color of the ambient Downloading destinations
lighting (on-board computer) ......... 231 (COMAND) ..................................... 294
Standing lamps .............................. 119 Downloading routes ....................... 298
Switching the daytime running Emergency call .............................. 291
lamps on/off (on-board Geo fencing ................................... 298
computer) ...................................... 230 Important safety notes .................. 290
Switching the exterior lighting Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 297
delayed switch-off on/off (on- MB info call button ........................ 293
board computer) ............................ 231 Remote vehicle locking .................. 296
Switching the surround lighting Roadside Assistance button .......... 293
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 231 Search & Send ............................... 295
Turn signals ................................... 119 Self-test ......................................... 291
see Changing bulbs Speed alert .................................... 298
see Interior lighting System .......................................... 291
Light sensor (display message) ....... 247 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 299
Loading guidelines ............................ 278 Vehicle remote malfunction
Locking diagnosis ....................................... 297
see Central locking Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 296
Locking (doors) Mechanical key
Automatic ........................................ 83 Function/notes ................................ 78
Emergency locking ........................... 84 Locking vehicle ................................ 84
From inside (central locking Unlocking the driver's door .............. 84
button) ............................................. 83 Memory card (audio) ......................... 225
Locking centrally Memory function ............................... 112
see Central locking Message memory (on-board
Locking verification signal (on- computer) .......................................... 237
board computer) ............................... 232
Index 13
Messages O
see Display messages
Mirrors Occupant Classification System
see Exterior mirrors (OCS)
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Faults ............................................... 52
Mobile phone Operation ......................................... 47
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 226 System self-test ............................... 50
Modifying the programming Occupant safety
(SmartKey) ........................................... 77 Children in the vehicle ..................... 60
MOExtended tires .............................. 321 Important safety notes .................... 40
Mounting wheels OCS
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 361 Faults ............................................... 52
Mounting a new wheel ................... 360 Operation ......................................... 47
Raising the vehicle ......................... 359 System self-test ............................... 50
Removing a wheel .......................... 360 Odometer ........................................... 222
Securing the vehicle against see Trip odometer
rolling away ................................... 358 Oil
MP3 see Engine oil
Operation ....................................... 225 On-board computer
see separate operating instructions AMG menu ..................................... 234
Multicontour seat Assistance menu ........................... 227
Adjusting (on the seat) .................. 102 Audio menu ................................... 225
Multifunction display Convenience submenu .................. 233
Function/notes ............................. 221 Displaying a service message ........ 310
Permanent display ......................... 230 Display messages .......................... 237
Multifunction steering wheel DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 184
Operating the on-board computer . 220 Factory settings submenu ............. 234
Overview .......................................... 33 Important safety notes .................. 218
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 229
Lighting submenu .......................... 230
N
Menu overview .............................. 222
Navigation Message memory .......................... 237
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 224 Navigation menu ............................ 224
NECK-PRO head restraints Operation ....................................... 220
Operation ......................................... 53 RACETIMER ................................... 235
Resetting after being triggered ........ 54 Service menu ................................. 229
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Settings menu ............................... 229
Operation ......................................... 53 Standard display ............................ 222
Resetting after being triggered ........ 54 Telephone menu ............................ 226
Night View Assist Plus Trip menu ...................................... 222
Activating/deactivating ................. 205 Vehicle submenu ........................... 232
Cleaning ......................................... 316 Video DVD operation ..................... 226
Function/notes ............................. 204 Operating safety
Problem (malfunction) ................... 207 Declaration of conformity ................ 25
Notes on breaking-in a new Important safety notes .................... 24
vehicle ................................................ 146 Operating system
see On-board computer
14 Index
Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant

Vehicle equipment ........................... 22 protection)
Outside temperature display ........... 220 Display message ............................ 241
Overhead control panel ...................... 37 Operation ......................................... 54
Override feature PRE-SAFE® Brake
Rear side windows ........................... 65 Activating/deactivating ................. 228
Display message ............................ 241
P Function/notes ................................ 72
Paint code number ............................ 372 Warning lamp ................................. 275
Product information ............................ 21
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 313
Program selector button .................. 159
Panic alarm .......................................... 40
Protection of the environment
Parking ............................................... 167
General notes .................................. 21
Pulling away (automatic
Parking brake ................................ 169
transmission) ..................................... 150
Position of exterior mirror, front-
passenger side ............................... 111
Rear view camera .......................... 199 Q
see PARKTRONIC Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26
Parking aid
Active Parking Assist ..................... 196 R
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 188
Parking brake RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 235
Display message ............................ 240 Radar sensor system
Notes/function .............................. 169 Activating/deactivating ................. 232
Warning lamp ................................. 272 Display message ............................ 252
Parking lamps Radio
Switching on/off ........................... 118 Selecting a station ......................... 225
PARKTRONIC see separate operating instructions
Deactivating/activating ................. 195 Radio-based vehicle components
Driving system ............................... 193 Declaration of conformity ................ 25
Function/notes ............................. 193 Reading lamp ..................................... 123
Important safety notes .................. 193 Rear compartment
Problem (malfunction) ................... 196 Setting the air vents ...................... 143
Range of the sensors ..................... 194 Rear fog lamp
Warning display ............................. 195 Display message ............................ 246
PASS AIR BAG OFF Rear seat (folding the backrest
see PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF forwards/back) ................................. 281
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Rear seats
Indicator lamp .................................. 47 Display message ............................ 261
Problems (malfunction) .................. 244 Rear view camera
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 316 Cleaning instructions ..................... 315
Power washers .................................. 312 Function/notes ............................. 199
Power windows Switching on/off ........................... 200
see Side windows Rear-view mirror
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 111
Rear window blind ............................ 287
Index 15
Rear window defroster Belt force limiters ............................ 59

Problem (malfunction) ................... 141 Cleaning ......................................... 317
Switching on/off ........................... 140 Correct usage .................................. 56
Refrigerant (air-conditioning Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 59
system) Fastening ......................................... 56
Important safety notes .................. 378 Important safety guidelines ............. 55
Refueling Releasing ......................................... 58
Fuel gauge ............................... 31, 219 Safety guidelines ............................. 41
Important safety notes .................. 164 Switching belt adjustment on/off
Refueling process .......................... 165 (on-board computer) ...................... 233
see Fuel Warning lamp ................................. 265
Remote control Warning lamp (function) ................... 58
Garage door opener ....................... 299 Seats
Programming (garage door Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100
opener) .......................................... 299 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
Reporting safety defects .................... 26 support .......................................... 103
Reserve (fuel tank) Adjusting the active multicontour
see Fuel seat ............................................... 103
Reserve fuel Adjusting the head restraint .......... 100
Display message ............................ 251 Adjusting the multicontour seat ..... 102
Warning lamp ................................. 273 Cleaning the cover ......................... 317
see Fuel Correct driver's seat position ........... 98
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 141 Important safety notes .................... 99
Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 155 Massage function .......................... 103
Reversing feature Overview .......................................... 99
Side windows ................................... 88 Seat backrest display message ..... 261
Sliding sunroof ................................. 93 Seat heating problem .................... 105
Reversing lamps (display Seat ventilation problem ................ 106
message) ............................................ 246 Storing settings (memory
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23 function) ........................................ 112
Roller sunblind Switching seat heating on/off ....... 104
Rear window .................................. 287 Switching seat ventilation on/off . . 105
Roof carrier ........................................ 283 Selector lever
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Cleaning ......................................... 316
guidelines) ......................................... 318 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 315
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 379 Service menu (on-board computer) . 229
Service products
S Brake fluid ..................................... 376
Coolant (engine) ............................ 377
Safety Engine oil ....................................... 375
Children in the vehicle ..................... 60 Fuel ................................................ 374
Child restraint systems .................... 60 Important safety notes .................. 373
Occupant Classification System Refrigerant (air-conditioning
(OCS) ............................................... 47 system) .......................................... 378
Seat belts Washer fluid ................................... 378
Adjusting the driver's and front- Settings
passenger seat belt ......................... 57 Factory (on-board computer) ......... 234
Adjusting the height ......................... 58 On-board computer ....................... 229
16 Index
Setting the air distribution ............... 138 Speedometer

Setting the airflow ............................ 139 Digital ............................................ 223
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 234 In the Instrument cluster ......... 31, 219
Side impact air bag ............................. 45 Segments ...................................... 220
Side marker lamp (display Selecting the unit of
message) ............................................ 247 measurement ................................ 229
Side windows see Instrument cluster
Cleaning ......................................... 314 SPORT handling mode
Convenience closing feature ............ 90 Activating/deactivating (AMG
Convenience opening feature .......... 89 vehicles) .......................................... 70
Important safety information ........... 88 Warning lamp ................................. 270
Opening/closing .............................. 89 SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92 System)
Resetting ......................................... 91 Display message ............................ 242
Sliding sunroof Introduction ..................................... 41
Important safety notes .................... 92 Warning lamp ................................. 272
Opening/closing .............................. 93 Warning lamp (function) ................... 41
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95 Standing lamps
Resetting ......................................... 94 Display message ............................ 246
SmartKey Switching on/off ........................... 119
Changing the battery ....................... 79 Start/stop function
Changing the programming ............. 77 see ECO start/stop function
Checking the battery ....................... 79 Starting (engine) ................................ 149
Convenience closing feature ............ 90 Steering (display message) .............. 262
Convenience opening feature .......... 89 Steering wheel
Display message ............................ 262 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 76 Button overview ............................... 33
Important safety notes .................... 76 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 220
Loss ................................................. 81 Cleaning ......................................... 316
Mechanical key ................................ 78 Important safety notes .................. 106
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 147 Paddle shifters ............................... 160
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81 Steering wheel heating .................. 107
Starting the engine ........................ 149 Storing settings (memory
Snow chains ...................................... 337 function) ........................................ 112
Sockets Steering wheel heating
Center console .............................. 289 Problem (malfunction) ................... 108
General notes ................................ 289 Switching on/off ........................... 107
Rear compartment ......................... 290 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 160
Trunk ............................................. 290 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 235
Under the armrest ......................... 289 Stowage areas ................................... 278
Spare wheel Stowage compartments
Stowing .......................................... 368 Armrest (under) ............................. 280
Specialist workshop ............................ 26 Center console .............................. 279
Special seat belt retractor .................. 63 Cup holders ................................... 284
Speed, controlling Eyeglasses compartment ............... 279
see Cruise control Glove box ....................................... 279
Important safety information ......... 278
Rear ............................................... 281
Index 17
Stowage net ................................... 281 Speed alert .................................... 298

Under driver's seat/front- System .......................................... 291
passenger seat .............................. 280 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 299
Stowage net ....................................... 281 Vehicle remote malfunction
Stowage space diagnosis ....................................... 297
Center console (rear) ..................... 280 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 296
Stowage well beneath the trunk Telephone
floor .................................................... 283 Accepting a call ............................. 226
Summer tires ..................................... 336 Display message ............................ 262
Sun visor ............................................ 286 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 226
Surround lighting (on-board Number from the phone book ........ 226
computer) .......................................... 231 Redialing ........................................ 227
Suspension tuning Rejecting/ending a call ................. 226
AIRMATIC ...................................... 190 Temperature
AMG adaptive sport suspension Coolant .......................................... 219
system ........................................... 191 Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 234
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 234 Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 234
Switching air-recirculation mode Outside temperature ...................... 220
on/off ................................................. 141 Setting (climate control) ................ 138
Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 74 Theft deterrent systems
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 74
T Immobilizer ...................................... 73
Through-loading feature ................... 281
Tachometer ........................................ 219 Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 235
Tail lamps Tire pressure
Display message ............................ 246 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 342
Tank content Checking manually ........................ 341
Fuel gauge ............................... 31, 219 Display message ............................ 258
Technical data Maximum ....................................... 340
Capacities ...................................... 373 Notes ............................................. 339
Emergency spare wheel ................. 370 Recommended ............................... 338
Information .................................... 372 Tire pressure loss warning system
Tires/wheels ................................. 362 General notes ................................ 341
Vehicle data ................................... 379 Important safety notes .................. 341
TELEAID Restarting ...................................... 342
Call priority .................................... 294 Tire pressure monitoring system
Downloading destinations Checking the tire pressure
(COMAND) ..................................... 294 electronically ................................. 344
Downloading routes ....................... 298 Function/notes ............................. 342
Emergency call .............................. 291 Restarting ...................................... 345
Geo fencing ................................... 298 Warning lamp ................................. 276
Important safety notes .................. 290 Warning message .......................... 344
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 297 Tires
MB info call button ........................ 293 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 356
Remote vehicle locking .................. 296 Average weight of the vehicle
Roadside Assistance button .......... 293 occupants (definition) .................... 355
Search & Send ............................... 295 Bar (definition) ............................... 354
Self-test ......................................... 291 Changing a wheel .......................... 357
18 Index
Characteristics .............................. 354 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 356

Checking ........................................ 335 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 356
Definition of terms ......................... 354 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 355
Direction of rotation ...................... 357 Tire size (data) ............................... 362
Display message ............................ 258 Tire size designation, load-bearing
Distribution of the vehicle capacity, speed rating .................... 351
occupants (definition) .................... 357 Tire tread ....................................... 335
DOT, Tire Identification Number Tire tread (definition) ..................... 356
(TIN) ............................................... 354 Total load limit (definition) ............. 357
DOT (Department of Traction ......................................... 350
Transportation) (definition) ............ 355 Traction (definition) ....................... 356
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Tread wear ..................................... 350
(definition) ..................................... 355 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Standards ...................................... 349
(definition) ..................................... 355 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Standards (definition) .................... 355
Rating) (definition) ......................... 355 Unladen weight (definition) ............ 356
Important safety notes .................. 334 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 356
Increased vehicle weight due to Wheel rim (definition) .................... 355
optional equipment (definition) ...... 355 see Flat tire
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 355 Top Tether ............................................ 64
Labeling (overview) ........................ 351 Towing
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 356 Important safety guidelines ........... 328
Load index ..................................... 353 Installing the towing eye ................ 329
Load index (definition) ................... 355 Removing the towing eye ............... 330
Maximum loaded vehicle weight With the rear axle raised ................ 330
(definition) ..................................... 355 Towing away
Maximum load on a tire With both axles on the ground ....... 330
(definition) ..................................... 356 Tow-starting
Maximum permissible tire Emergency engine starting ............ 331
pressure (definition) ....................... 356 Important safety notes .................. 328
Maximum tire load ......................... 353 Transmission
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 356 see Automatic transmission
MOExtended tires .......................... 336 Transmission position display ......... 156
Optional equipment weight Transmission position display
(definition) ..................................... 356 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 156
PSI (pounds per square inch) Transporting the vehicle .................. 330
(definition) ..................................... 356 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 316
Replacing ....................................... 357 Trip computer (on-board
Service life ..................................... 336 computer) .......................................... 222
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 356 Trip odometer
Speed rating (definition) ................ 355 Calling up ....................................... 222
Storing ........................................... 357 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 223
Structure and characteristics Trunk
(definition) ..................................... 354 Emergency release .......................... 87
Temperature .................................. 350 Important safety notes .................... 84
TIN (Tire Identification Number) Opening/closing (automatically
(definition) ..................................... 356 from inside) ...................................... 86
Index 19
Opening/closing (automatically Vehicle emergency locking ................ 84

from outside) ................................... 86 Vehicle identification number
Opening/closing (manually from see VIN
outside) ............................................ 85 Vehicle identification plate .............. 372
Trunk lid Vehicle level
Display message ............................ 261 AIRMATIC ...................................... 189
Opening/closing .............................. 84 Vehicle level (display message) ....... 252
Opening dimensions ...................... 379 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 320
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 379 Video
Turn signals Operating the DVD ......................... 226
Display message ............................ 245 VIN ...................................................... 372
Switching on/off ........................... 119
Type identification plate W
see Vehicle identification plate
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 267
U
Brakes ........................................... 266
Unlocking Check Engine ................................. 273
Emergency unlocking ....................... 84 Coolant .......................................... 273
From inside the vehicle (central Distance warning ........................... 275
unlocking button) ............................. 83 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 275
ESP® .............................................. 269
V ESP® OFF ....................................... 270
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 286 Fuel tank ........................................ 273
Vehicle Overview .................................. 32, 264
Data acquisition ............................... 27 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 47
Display message ............................ 260 Reserve fuel ................................... 273
Equipment ....................................... 22 Seat belt ........................................ 265
Individual settings .......................... 229 SPORT handling mode ................... 270
Limited Warranty ............................. 26 SRS ................................................ 272
Loading .......................................... 345 Tire pressure monitor .................... 276
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 84 Warranty ............................................ 372
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76 Washer fluid
Lowering ........................................ 361 Display message ............................ 262
Maintenance .................................... 23 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 361
Parking for a long period ................ 169 Wheel chock ...................................... 358
Pulling away ................................... 150 Wheels
Raising ........................................... 359 Changing a wheel .......................... 357
Reporting problems ......................... 26 Checking ........................................ 335
Securing from rolling away ............ 358 Cleaning ......................................... 314
Towing away .................................. 328 Cleaning (warning) ......................... 357
Transporting .................................. 330 Emergency spare wheel ................. 367
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 84 Important safety notes .................. 334
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76 Interchanging/changing ................ 357
Vehicle data ................................... 379 Mounting a new wheel ................... 360
Vehicle data ....................................... 379 Mounting a wheel .......................... 358
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 379 Removing a wheel .......................... 360
Storing ........................................... 357
20 Index
Tightening torque ........................... 361

Wheel size/tire size ....................... 362
Window curtain air bag
Operation ......................................... 47
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 139
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 309
Notes ............................................. 378
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 128
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 126
Switching on/off ........................... 125
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 174
Snow chains .................................. 337
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 336
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 314
Replacing ....................................... 126
Wooden trim (cleaning
instructions) ...................................... 316
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 139
Introduction 21
Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
General notes
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel
Daimler's declared policy is one of consumption.
comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner recommendations
that takes the requirements of both nature
Wherever the operating instructions require
and humanity into account.
you to dispose of materials, first try to
You too can help to protect the environment regenerate or re-use them. Observe the
by operating your vehicle in an relevant environmental rules and regulations
environmentally responsible manner. when disposing of materials. In this way you
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, will help to protect the environment.
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating conditions of your vehicle Product information
Ryour personal driving style
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
You can influence both factors. You should genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion
bear the following in mind: parts and accessories that have been
Operating conditions: approved for your vehicle.
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well as
consumption. conversion parts and accessories that have
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures been specifically approved for your vehicle for
are correct. their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
unable to assess other parts. Therefore,
Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for
them.
the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
vehicles. This is also the case, even if they
to environmental protection. You should have been independently or officially
therefore adhere to the service intervals. approved. The use of non-approved parts
Ralways have service work carried out at a could affect your vehicle's operating safety.
qualified specialist workshop. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approved
Personal driving style: conversion parts and accessories are
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
starting the engine. Center. Here, you will receive advice about
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle
permissible technical modifications, and the
parts will be professionally installed.
is stationary.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
Z
22 Introduction
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts More than 300,000 different genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
H Environmental note Mercedes-Benz models.
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
assemblies and parts which are of the same maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz
quality as new parts. They are covered by the parts for necessary service and repair work.
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new In addition, strategically located parts
parts. delivery centers provide quick and reliable
parts service.
! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Always specify the vehicle identification
Devices, as well as control units and number (VIN) (Y page 372) and the engine
sensors for these restraint systems, may be number (Y page 373) when ordering genuine
installed in the following areas of your Mercedes-Benz parts.
vehicle:
Rdoors
Operator's Manual
Rdoor pillars
Rdoor sills Vehicle equipment
Rseats This Operator's Manual describes all models
Rcockpit and all standard and optional equipment of
Rinstrument cluster your vehicle available at the time of going to
Rcenter console print. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may
Do not install accessories such as audio not feature all functions described here. This
systems in these areas. Do not carry out also applies to safety-relevant systems and
repairs or welding. You could impair the functions. The equipment in your vehicle may
operating efficiency of the restraint therefore differ from that shown in the
systems. descriptions and illustrations.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at The original purchase agreement lists all
a qualified specialist workshop. systems installed in your vehicle.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of Should you have any questions concerning
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels equipment and operation, please consult an
as well as accessories relevant to safety authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
which have not been approved by Mercedes. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
This could lead to malfunctions in safety- Booklet are important documents and should
relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use be kept in the vehicle.
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and
accessories that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been
specifically developed, manufactured or
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz
vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should therefore be used.
Introduction 23
Service and vehicle operation notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in

writing of the need for its repair,
Service and literature (2) the same substantial defect or
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the malfunction of a less serious nature than
warranties printed in the Service and category (1) has been subject to repair
Warranty Information booklet. Your four or more times and you have directly
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will notified us in writing of the need for its
exchange or repair any defective parts repair, or
originally installed in the vehicle in (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
accordance with the terms of the following repair of the same or different substantial
warranties: defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty total of more than 30 calendar days.
REmission Systems Warranty Please send your written notice to:
REmission Performance Warranty Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Customer Assistance Center
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, One Mercedes Drive
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Control Systems Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws) Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
all the necessary maintenance work which
Information for customers in
should be done at regular intervals.
California
Always have the Service and Warranty
Under California law you may be entitled to a Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
purchase price or lease price, if after a service advisor will record every service for
reasonable number of repair attempts you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or Roadside Assistance
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
18 months from original delivery of the Program offers technical help in the event of
vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
(approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer Assistance Hotline are answered by our
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
reasonable number of repair attempts is 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or (USA)
more of the following occurs: 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
(1) the same substantial defect or For additional information, refer to the
malfunction results in a condition that is Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
likely to cause death or serious bodily Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect Assistance" section in the Service and
or malfunction has been subject to repair Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both
two or more times, and you have directly in your vehicle literature portfolio.
Z
24 Introduction
Change of address or change of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

ownership European Delivery Department
In the event of a change of address, please One Mercedes Drive
send us the "Notification of Address Change" Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
in the Service and Guarantee booklet or In Canada
simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline
European Delivery Department
number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Customer Service Center (Canada) at Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
contacting you in a timely manner should the
need arise. Operating safety
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the Important safety notes
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner. G WARNING
If you have purchased a used car, please send If you do not have the prescribed service/
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in maintenance work or any required repairs
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Center (USA) at the hotline number Always have the prescribed service/
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or maintenance work as well as any required
Customer Service (Canada) at repairs carried out at a qualified specialist
1-800-387-0100. workshop.
G WARNING
Vehicle operation outside the USA If you switch off the ignition while driving,
and Canada safety-relevant functions are only available
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
countries, please be aware that: for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
Rservice facilities or replacement parts may
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
not be readily available.
of an accident.
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic
G WARNING
converter.
Modifications to electronic components, their
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower
software as well as wiring can impair their
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause
function and/or the function of other
engine damage.
networked components. In particular,
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available systems relevant to safety could also be
for delivery in Europe through our European affected. As a result, these may no longer
Delivery Program. For details, consult an function as intended and/or jeopardize the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to operating safety of the vehicle. There is an
one of the following addresses. increased risk of an accident and injury.
In the USA
Introduction 25
Never tamper with the wiring as well as must accept any interference received,
electronic components or their software. You including interference that may cause
should have all work to electrical and undesired operation. Changes or
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified modifications not expressly approved by the
specialist workshop. party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: equipment."
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
curb or an unpaved road comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
a curb or a hole in the road following two conditions: (1) These devices
may not cause interference, and (2) These
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage
devices must accept any interference,
or parts of the chassis. including interference that may cause
In situations like this, the body, the undesired operation of the device."
undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or
tires could be damaged without the
damage being visible. Components Diagnostics connection
damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail
or, in the case of an accident, no longer The diagnostics connection is only intended
withstand the strain they are designed to. for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
a qualified specialist workshop.
If the underbody paneling is damaged,
combustible materials such as leaves, G WARNING
grass or twigs can gather between the If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
underbody and the underbody paneling. If connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
these materials come in contact with hot operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
parts of the exhaust system for an the operating safety of the vehicle could be
extended period, they can catch fire. affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the vehicle checked and repaired Do not connect any equipment to a
immediately at a qualified specialist diagnostics connection in the vehicle.
workshop. If on continuing your journey
you notice that driving safety is impaired, G WARNING
pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
paying attention to road and traffic pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified The operating and road safety of the vehicle
specialist workshop. is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
Declarations of conformity stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
Vehicle components which receive securely and as specified in order to ensure
and/or transmit radio waves sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats.
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. ! If the engine is switched off and
Operation is subject to the two following two equipment on the diagnostics connection
conditions: 1) These devices may not cause is used, the starter battery may discharge.
harmful interference, and 2) These devices
Z
26 Introduction
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

connection can lead to emissions monitoring 98 Vanderhoof Avenue
information being reset, for example. This Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
requirements of the next emissions test
during the main inspection. Reporting safety defects
USA only:
Qualified specialist workshop The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
qualified specialist workshop. It has the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
necessary specialist knowledge, tools and
of 1966".
qualifications to correctly carry out the work
required on your vehicle. This is especially the If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
case for work relevant to safety. which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
Observe the notes in the Maintenance
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Booklet.
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
Always have the following work carried out at notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
Rwork relevant to safety open an investigation, and if it finds that a
Rservice and maintenance work safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
Rrepair work may order a recall and remedy campaign.
Ralterations, installation work and However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
modifications individual problems between you, your
Rwork on electronic components
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
Problems with your vehicle 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If you should experience a problem with your Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may SW., Washington, DC 20590.
affect its safe operation, we urge you to You can also obtain other information about
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center motor vehicle safety from
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
http://www.safercar.gov
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or
Limited Warranty
contact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA ! Follow the instructions in this manual
Customer Assistance Center about the proper operation of your vehicle
as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
One Mercedes Drive culpable contraventions against these
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 instructions is not covered either by the
In Canada Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
Customer Relations Department New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Introduction 27
Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic data
acquisition in the vehicle
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
Your vehicle records electronic data. If your
vehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada:
TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event of
an accident.
This information helps, for example, to test
vehicle systems after an accident and to
continually improve vehicle safety.
Daimler AG can access this data and submit
it:
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner
Ron the instruction of prosecuting
authorities
Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that
involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its sales
and service organizations
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE

AID) purchase agreement to find out more
about data that can be recorded and
transmitted by this system.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the
following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Z
28
29
Dashboard ........................................... 30
Instrument cluster .............................. 31
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 33
At a glance
Center console .................................... 34
Overhead control panel ...................... 37
Door control panel .............................. 38
30 Dashboard
Dashboard
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle F Adjusts the steering wheel 106
shifters 160 Steering wheel heating 107
; Cruise control lever 176 G Combination switch 119
= Instrument cluster 31 H Parking brake 169
? Horn I Diagnostics connection 25
A DIRECT SELECT lever 155 J Opens the hood 306
B PARKTRONIC warning K Releases the parking brake 169
display 193
L Light switch 116
C Overhead control panel 37
M Night View Assist Plus 204
D Climate control systems 130
E Ignition lock 147
Start/Stop button 147
Instrument cluster 31
Instrument cluster
Displays
At a glance
: Speedometer with ? Coolant temperature 219
segments 220
A Fuel gauge
; Multifunction display 221
= Tachometer 219
i Adjust the instrument cluster lighting

using the on-board computer
(Y page 230).
32 Instrument cluster

At a glance

: ÷ ESP® 269 G ü Seat belt 265
M SPORT handling H ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 270
mode in AMG vehicles 270
I ? Coolant 273
; · Distance warning 275
J K High-beam
= å ESP® OFF 269 headlamps 119
? #! Turn signals 119 K L Low-beam
A $ Brakes (USA only) 266 headlamps 118
B J Brakes (Canada only) L T Parking lamps 118

266
C ! ABS M R This lamp has no
267
function
D 6 SRS 272
N 8 Reserve fuel 273
E ; Check Engine 273
F h Tire pressure monitor 276
Multifunction steering wheel 33
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 221 A =;
; COMAND display; see the Selects a menu 220
separate operating 9:
instructions Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 220
= ?
a
Switches on the Voice
Confirms your selection 220
Control System; see the
separate operating Hides display messages 237
instructions B %
? ~ Back 220
Rejects or ends a call 226 Switches off the Voice
Exits phone book/redial Control System; see the
memory separate operating
6 instructions
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial
memory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
34 Center console
Center console
Center console, upper section
At a glance

: COMAND; see the separate B 45 Indicator lamp 47
operating instructions
C £ Hazard warning
; c Seat heating 104 lamps 120
= s Seat ventilation 105 D u Roller sunblind in the
rear window 287
? c PARKTRONIC 193
A ¤ ECO start/stop
function (AMG vehicles) 150
Center console 35
Center console, lower section
At a glance
E Stowage compartment 278 H É Sets the vehicle level 189
Ashtray 287 I Stowage compartment 278
Cigarette lighter 288
Socket 289 J Ú Selects the drive
Cup holder 284 program 159
F K COMAND controller; see

Cup holder 284
the separate operating
G e Sets the suspension instructions
tuning 190
36 Center console
Center console, lower section (AMG vehicles)

At a glance

E Cup holder 284 J Stowage compartment 278
F Engages parking position P 168 K ß Calls up/saves the
G suspension tuning 191
Selector lever 155
L à Sets the suspension
H Ashtray 287
tuning 191
Cigarette lighter 288
Socket 289 M å ESP® 70
I COMAND controller; see N Drive program selector 159
the separate operating
instructions
Overhead control panel 37
Overhead control panel
At a glance
: u Switches the rear E Integrated electronic
interior lighting on/off 124 compass 302
; | Switches the F Microphone for mbrace
automatic interior lighting (emergency call system),
control on/off 124 telephone and Voice
Control System; see the
= p Switches the right- separate operating
hand reading lamp on/off 123 instructions
? ï MB Info call button G F Roadside Assistance
(mbrace system) 293 call button (mbrace
A 3 Opens/closes the system) 293
sliding sunroof 93 H p Switches the left-
B G SOS button (mbrace hand reading lamp on/off 123
system) 291 I c Switches the front
C Rear-view mirror 111 interior lighting on/off 124
D Buttons for the garage door

opener 299
38 Door control panel
Door control panel

At a glance

: r45= B W Opens/closes the
Stores settings for the seat, side windows 89
exterior mirrors and
C n Activates/
steering wheel 112
deactivates the override
; Adjusts the seats feature for the side
electrically 100 windows in the rear
compartment 65
= %& Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 83 D p Opens/closes the
trunk lid 86
? Opens the door 82
A 7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the
exterior mirrors in/out
electrically 109
39
Useful information .............................. 40

Panic alarm .......................................... 40
Occupant safety .................................. 40
Children in the vehicle ........................ 60
Driving safety systems ....................... 66
Safety
Theft deterrent locking system ......... 73
40 Occupant safety
Useful information Occupant safety
i This Operator's Manual describes all Important safety notes

models and all standard and optional G WARNING
equipment of your vehicle available at the Modifications to the restraint systems could
Safety
time of publication of the Operator's result in them not functioning properly any
Manual. Country-specific differences are more. The restraint systems could then no
possible. Please note that your vehicle may longer protect vehicle occupants as they are
not be equipped with all features designed to do and could fail in the event of
described. This also applies to safety- an accident or activate unexpectedly, for
related systems and functions. example. There is an increased risk of injury.
i Read the information on qualified Never modify parts of the restraint systems.
specialist workshops: (Y page 26). Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as
electronic components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
Panic alarm to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center.
USA only: for further information contact our
Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1800-367-6372).
In this section, you will learn the most

important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
The restraint system consists of:
RSeat belts
RChild restraint systems
X To activate: press ! button : for at RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
least one second. system
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting Additional protection is provided by:
flashes. RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
X To deactivate: press ! button :
RNECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
again. luxury head restraints
or RPRE-SAFE®
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
RAir bag system components with:
or - PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.
- Front-passenger seat with Occupant
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the Classification System (OCS)
vehicle.
The different air bag systems work
independently of each other. The protective
functions of the system work in conjunction
with each other. Not all air bags are deployed
in an accident.
Occupant safety 41
i For information on infants and children The SRS components are in operational
traveling with you in the vehicle as well as readiness when the 6 SRS indicator lamp
restraint systems for infants and children, goes out while the engine is running.
see "Children in the vehicle" There is a malfunction if:
(Y page 60). Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not light
Safety
up when the ignition is switched on
Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
warning lamp does not go out after a few
Introduction seconds
RS consists of: Rthe engine is running and the 6 SRS
RThe
warning lamp lights up again.
6 RS warning lamp
RAir bags Safety guidelines for seat belts,
RThe air bag control unit with crash sensors
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
REmergency Tensioning Device for the front and air bags
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the
rear G WARNING
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
belts and the outer seat belts in the rear been subjected to stress in an accident
must be replaced. Their anchoring points
RS reduces the risk of occupants coming into
must also be checked. Only use seat belts
contact with the vehicle's interior in the event
installed or supplied by an authorized
of an accident. It can also reduce the effect
Mercedes-Benz Center.
of the forces to which occupants are
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
subjected during an accident.
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain
SRS warning lamp perchlorate material, which may require
special handling and regard for the
G WARNING environment. Check your national disposal
If SRS is malfunctioning, child restraint guidelines. California residents, see
system components may be triggered www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all Perchlorate/index.cfm.
in the event of an accident with a high rate of RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function
vehicle deceleration. There is an increased on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
risk of injury, possibly even fatal. that has deployed must be replaced. PRE-
Have SRS checked and repaired immediately SAFE® has electrically operated reversible
at a qualified specialist workshop. belt tensioners in addition to the
pyrotechnic ETDs.
SRS functions are checked regularly when RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
you switch on the ignition and when the They could tear.
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions RDo not make any modification that could
can be detected in good time. change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched severely weaken them. In a crash they may
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds not be able to provide adequate protection.
after the engine is started.
Z
42 Occupant safety
RNo modifications of any kind may be made from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
to any components or wiring of the SRS. Center.
RDo not change or remove any component RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
or part of the SRS. required inflation volume, and the material
RDo not install additional trim material, seat of the air bags, there is the possibility of
Safety
covers, badges, etc. to the: abrasions or other, potentially more serious

- padded steering wheel boss injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
- knee bag covers
If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz
- front-passenger air bag cover strongly recommends that you inform the
- outer side of front seat bolsters subsequent owner that the vehicle is
- side trim next to the rear seat backrest equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the
- roof lining trim
applicable section in the Operator's Manual.
RDo not install additional electrical/
electronic equipment on or near SRS Air bags
components and wiring.
RKeep area between air bags and occupants Important safety notes
free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
G WARNING
RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
If you modify the air bag covers or affix objects
such as stickers to them, the air bags may not
from the coat hooks or handles over the
function correctly. There is an increased risk
door. These items may be thrown around in
of injury.
the vehicle and cause head and other
injuries when the window curtain air bag is Never modify the air bag covers or affix
deployed. objects to them.
RAir bag system components will be hot after
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
G WARNING
RNever place your feet on the instrument
Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or
even prevent deployment of the air bags
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
integrated into the seats. Consequently, the
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
seat.
they are designed to do. In addition, the
RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
function of the air bag deactivation system
risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or could be restricted. This poses an increased
causing unintended air bag deployment. risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be
You should only use seat covers that have
performed by qualified technicians.
been approved for the respective seat by
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz.
Center.
RFor your protection and the protection of
G WARNING
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
The air bag parts are hot after the airbag has
ETD, our safety instructions must be
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
followed. These instructions are available
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have the
deployed air bags replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Occupant safety 43
G WARNING As the air bag inflates with considerable

Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence speed and force, a proper seating position
of injuries and fatalities in certain situations: and correct positioning of the hands on the
steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-
distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
passenger front air bags and knee bags)
Safety
not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
Rside impacts (side impact air bags, window
properly or are too close to the air bag can be
curtain air bags and pelvis air bags) seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it
Rrollover (window curtain air bags) inflates with great force instantaneously:
However, no system available today can Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. in a position that is as upright as possible
When the air bags are deployed, a small with your back against the backrest.
amount of powder is released. The powder Rmove the driver's seat as far back as
generally does not constitute a health hazard possible, still permitting proper operation
and does not indicate that there is a fire in the of vehicle controls. The distance from the
vehicle. In order to prevent potential center of the driver's chest to the center of
breathing difficulties, you should leave the the air bag cover on the steering wheel
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get should be able to accomplish this by
out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
then get fresh air by opening a window or you have any difficulties, please contact an
door. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the
G WARNING steering wheel or dashboard.
In order to reduce the potential danger of Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
injuries caused during the deployment of the
Placing hands and arms inside the rim can
front air bags, the driver and front passenger
increase the risk and potential severity of
must always be correctly seated and wear
hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag
their seat belts.
inflates.
For maximum protection in the event of a Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back
collision, you must always be in the normal
as possible from the dashboard when the
seat position with your back against the
seat is occupied.
backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure
Roccupants, especially children, should
that it is correctly positioned on your body.
never place their bodies or lean their heads
in the area of the door where the side
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
serious or fatal injuries should the side
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized
infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight
of the child.
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
Z
44 Occupant safety
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you function for the vehicle occupants in the
make the buyer aware of this safety event of a crash.
information. Be sure to give the buyer this i After an air bag has been deployed, have
Operator's Manual. the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified
specialist workshop, even if your vehicle is
If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a
Safety
ready to drive.
bang, and a small amount of powder may also
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
affect your hearing. The powder that is Front air bags
released generally does not constitute a
health hazard and does not indicate that there
is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
some temporary breathing difficulty for
people with asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out
of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
You can also open the window to allow fresh
air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS
warning lamp lights up.
The air bag installation locations are
identified by the AIR BAG symbol. Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
The air bags are deployed if the air bag control steering wheel; front-passenger front air
unit detects the need for deployment. Only in bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
the event of such a situation will the air bags box.
provide their supplemental protection. The front air bags increase protection for the
If the driver and front passenger do not wear driver's and front passenger's head and
their seat belts, it is not possible for the air chest.
bags to provide their supplemental They are deployed:
protection. Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
In the event of other types of impacts and of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a
impacts below air bag deployment longitudinal direction
thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
driver and passenger will then be protected
Rif the system determines that air bag
to the extent possible by a properly fastened
seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also deployment can offer additional protection
needed to provide the best possible to that provided by the seat belt
protection in a rollover. Rdepending on whether the seat belt is being
Air bags provide additional protection; they used

are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. Rindependently of other air bags in the
All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat vehicle

belts regardless of whether your vehicle is If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are
equipped with air bags or not. generally not deployed.
It is important for your safety and that of your Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced bags. The air bag control unit evaluates
and to have any malfunctioning air bags vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the
repaired. This will help to make sure the air event of a collision. In the first deployment
bags continue to perform their protective stage, the front air bag is filled with part of the
Occupant safety 45
total available propellant gas, thereby Driver's knee bag : deploys underneath the
reducing the risk of injury. If the air bag steering column and front-passenger knee
control unit recognizes within a few bag ; underneath the glove box. They
milliseconds that the vehicle is being braked deploy together with the front air bags. They
or accelerated faster than originally are designed to operate together with the
predicted, the front air bag is filled with the front air bags in frontal impacts if certain
Safety
maximum amount of propellant gas available. thresholds are exceeded. The knee bags
The deployment of the front-passenger front operate at best in conjunction with correctly
air bag is also influenced by the weight positioned and fastened seat belts.
category of the front passenger, which is Knee bags provide increased protection for
determined by the Occupant Classification the driver and front passenger against the risk
System (OCS) (Y page 47). of:
The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the Rknee injuries
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
Rthighinjuries
(predicted at the start of the impact) for
second-stage inflation of the front-passenger Rlower leg injuries
front air bag. In the second stage, the front

air bags are inflated with the maximum Side impact air bags
amount of propellant gas available.
G WARNING
The front air bags are not deployed in
situations where a low impact severity is Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or
predicted. You will then be protected by the even prevent deployment of the air bags
fastened seat belt. integrated into the seats. Consequently, the
air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
The front-passenger front air bag will only they are designed to do. In addition, the
deploy if: function of the air bag deactivation system
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight could be restricted. This poses an increased
sensor readings, detects that the front- risk of injury or even fatal injury.
passenger seat is occupied You should only use seat covers that have
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator been approved for the respective seat by
lamp on the center console is not lit Mercedes-Benz.
(Y page 47)
Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high G WARNING
impact severity Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not
Knee bags performed correctly to the doors or door
paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead
to the function of the sensors being impaired.
The air bags might therefore not function
properly any more. Consequently, the air bags
cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door
paneling carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Z
46 Occupant safety
You should only use seat cover that have been Side impact air bags will not deploy in side
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. impacts which do not exceed the system's
The seat covers must have a special tear preset deployment thresholds for lateral
seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise, the acceleration/deceleration. You will then be
side impact air bags cannot deploy correctly protected by the fastened seat belt.
and therefore cannot provide the intended The side impact air bag on the front-
Safety
protection in the event of an accident. passenger side is not deployed in the

following situations:
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
seat is unoccupied.
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not
fastened.
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side will deploy if the front-
passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of
whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer Pelvis air bags
seat cushions. G WARNING
When deployed, the side impact air bags offer Only use seat covers which have been tested
additional protection for the thorax of the and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat
on which the impact occurs. However, they coverings can cause a malfunction of the side
do not protect the: impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.
Rhead Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Rneck for availability.
Rarms
The side impact air bags are deployed:

Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs
If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air

bags are generally not deployed. Side impact Pelvis air bags : enhance the level of
air bags are deployed if the system detects protection of the vehicle occupants on the
high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a side of the vehicle on which the impact
lateral direction and determines that side occurs.
impact air bag deployment can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt.
Occupant safety 47
The pelvis air bags deploy next to and below Window curtain air bags : enhance the level
the outer seat cushions. They are deployed: of protection for the head, but not chest or
Ron the side on which an impact occurs arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of
Rat
the vehicle on which the impact occurs.
the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or The window curtain air bags are integrated
Safety
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact into the side of the roof frame and deploy in
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
Rindependently of the front air bags
Window curtain air bags are deployed:
Rindependently of the ETDs Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
If the vehicle rolls over, the pelvis air bags are
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
generally not deployed. Exception: if the
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
system detects high vehicle deceleration or
acceleration in a lateral direction and Ron the driver's side and passenger side, in
determines that deployment can offer the event of a vehicle rollover and if the
additional protection to that provided by the system determines that air bag deployment
seat belt. can offer the vehicle occupants additional
Pelvis air bags : will not deploy in side protection to that provided by the seat belt
impacts which do not exceed the system's Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
preset deployment thresholds for lateral Rregardless of whether the front-passenger

acceleration/deceleration. You will then be seat is occupied
protected by the fastened seat belt. Rindependently of the front air bags
The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in
is not deployed in the following situations: the event of impacts which do not exceed the
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger system's preset deployment thresholds for
seat is unoccupied. vehicle acceleration/deceleration. You will
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not then be protected by the fastened seat belt.
fastened.
The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
Occupant Classification System
will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is
(OCS)
fastened, regardless of whether the front-
passenger seat is occupied or not. Method of operation
Window curtain air bags G WARNING

If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates
when an adult or someone larger than a small
individual is in the front-passenger seat, have
the front passenger reposition himself or
herself in the seat until the 45
indicator lamp goes out.
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front-passenger front air
bag deployment when the OCS has classified
the front-passenger seat occupant as
weighing as much as or less than a typical 12-
month-old child in a standard child restraint
Z
48 Occupant safety
or if the front-passenger seat is classified as If the 45 indicator lamp is not

being empty. illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag
When the OCS senses that the front- and the front-passenger knee bag are
passenger seat occupant is classified as activated and will be deployed:
being up to or less than the weight of a typical Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
Safety
12-month-old child in a standard child Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment

restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will threshold
illuminate when the engine is started and
Rindependently of the side impact air bag or
remain illuminated, indicating that the front-
pelvis air bag
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
If the front-passenger front air bag is
When the OCS senses that the front-
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
passenger seat is classified as being empty,
influenced by:
the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate
when the engine is started and remain Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as
illuminated, indicating that the front- assessed by the air bag control unit
passenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe front passenger's weight category as
When the OCS senses that the front- identified by OCS
passenger seat occupant is classified as
being heavier than the weight of a typical 12- G WARNING
month-old child seated in a standard child According to accident statistics, children are
restraint or as being a small individual (such safer when properly restrained on the rear
as a young teenager or a small adult), the seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
45 indicator lamp will illuminate for we strongly recommend that children be
approximately 6 seconds when the engine is placed in the rear seats whenever possible.
started and then, depending on occupant Regardless of seating position, children 12
weight sensor readings from the front- years old and under must be seated and
passenger seat, remain illuminated or go out. properly secured in an appropriate infant
With the 45 indicator lamp restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag recommended for the size and weight of the
is deactivated. With the 45 indicator child.
lamp out, the front-passenger front air bag is The infant or child restraint must be properly
activated. secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
When the OCS senses that the front- belt and Top Tether strap, or lower LATCH-
passenger seat occupant is classified as an type (ISOFIX) child seat retaining loops and
adult or someone larger than a small Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with the
individual, the 45 indicator lamp will infant or child seat manufacturer's
illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when instructions.
the engine is started and then go out, Occupants, especially children, should always
indicating that the front-passenger front air sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
bag is activated. properly and use an appropriately sized infant
If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
the front-passenger front air bag and the recommended for the size and weight of the
front-passenger knee bag are deactivated and child.
will not be deployed. Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag.
Occupant safety 49
Note the following important information if it RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child
is necessary to carry a child on the front- restraint on the front-passenger seat:
passenger seat: - move the seat as far back as possible
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag - use the proper child restraint
technology designed to deactivate the recommended for the age, size and
Safety
front-passenger front air bag and the front- weight of the child
passenger knee bag in your vehicle when - secure child restraint with the vehicle's
the system senses the weight of a typical seat belt according to the child seat
12-month-old child or less along with the manufacturer's instructions
weight of a standard appropriate child RFor children larger than the typical 12-
restraint on the front-passenger seat. month-old child, the front-passenger front
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the air bag and the front-passenger knee bag
front-passenger seat will be seriously may or may not be activated.
injured or even killed if the front-passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which G WARNING
could occur under some circumstances, If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the
even with the air bag technology installed instrument cluster and the 45
in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate
indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the
this risk completely is never to place a child
OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger
in a rear-facing child restraint in the front-
front air bag and the front passenger knee bag
passenger seat. We therefore strongly
will be deactivated in this case. Have the
recommend that you always place a child
system checked by qualified technicians as
in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear
soon as possible. Contact an authorized
seat.
Mercedes-Benz Center.
RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
the front-passenger seat, make sure the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
In order to ensure proper operation of the air
indicating that the front-passenger front air
bag system and OCS:
bag and front-passenger knee bag are
deactivated. Should the 45 RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while position that is as upright as possible with
the restraint is installed, please check your back against the seat backrest.
installation. Periodically check the RWhen seated, a passenger should not
45 indicator lamp while driving to position him/herself in such a way as to
make sure that the 45 indicator cause the passenger's weight to be lifted
lamp is illuminated. If the 45 from the seat cushion as this may result in
indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do the OCS being unable to correctly
not transport a child on the front-passenger approximate the passenger's weight
seat until the system has been repaired. category.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the RRead and observe all warnings in this
front-passenger seat could be seriously chapter.
injured or even killed if the front-passenger
front air bag is deployed.
Z
50 Occupant safety
The OCS weight sensor reading is affected if

the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by
leaning on the armrest.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
the seat cushion are damaged, have the
necessary repair work carried out at a
Safety
qualified specialist workshop.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use seat
accessories that have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
If the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
lock or is in position 0, PASSENGER AIR BAG Both the driver and the front passenger
OFF indicator lamp : does not light up. should always observe the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) whether or not the front passenger is
categorizes the occupant on the front- positioned correctly. Observe also the air bag
passenger seat using a weight sensor. The display messages that can be displayed in the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated instrument cluster (Y page 244).
automatically for certain weight categories.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
mean that the front-passenger front air bag
shows you the current status.
will also deploy.
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
The OCS may have detected that the seat:
categories the occupant on the front-
passenger seat using a weight sensor. Ris empty or occupied by the weight of a
The front-passenger front air bag and the typical child up to twelve months old,
front-passenger knee bag are deactivated seated in a child restraint system
automatically for certain weight categories. Ris occupied by a small individual, such as a
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp young teenager or a small adult
shows you the current status. Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator system whose weight is greater than that
lamp lights up, the front-passenger front air of a typical twelve month old child.
bag and the front-passenger knee bag are These are examples of when the OCS
disabled. deactivates the front-passenger front air bag
The system does not deactivate: and front-passenger knee bag. Deactivation
takes place although the collision fulfills the
Rthe side impact air bag criteria for deploying the driver's air bag.
Rthe pelvis air bag For further information, see "Air bag display
Rthe window curtain air bag messages" (Y page 244).
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
To be classified correctly, the front passenger System self-test

must sit:
G WARNING
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly If the 4 5 indicator lamp does not
Rin a position that is as upright as possible
illuminate, the system is not functioning. You
with their back against the seat backrest must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Rwith their feet on the floor
Occupant safety 51
Center before seating any child on the front

passenger seat.
G WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
Safety
child restraint system could affect the
function of the OCS. This could result in the
front-passenger front air bag not functioning
as intended during an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. Make
sure that the bottom and back of the child
restraint system make full contact with the
front-passenger seat cushion and backrest.
Always comply with the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

lights up:
Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock
to position 1 or 2
Rif you press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop
button once or twice on vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO
Rif an adult is seated properly on the front-
passenger seat and the OCS classifies the
occupant as an adult
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp goes out again after approximately six
seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the OCS
system detects that the front-passenger
seat is empty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator lamp will continue to light up.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp will not go out.
For more information about the OCS, see
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (Y page 52).
Z
52 Occupant safety
Problems with the Occupant Classification System

G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical
adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not
allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Safety
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger
seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR The COS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct, upright
lights up and remains position.
on. X Have the COS checked as soon as possible at a qualified
The person on the specialist workshop.
front-passenger seat: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
Rhas the weight of a display (Y page 244).
typical adult
Rhas been determined
by the system not to
be a child
Occupant safety 53

The PASSENGER AIR The COS is malfunctioning.
BAG OFF indicator X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
lamp does not light up child seat.
and/or does not stay
Safety
X Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraint
on.
system rest on the front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust
The front-passenger the position of the front-passenger seat.
seat is: X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
Runoccupied seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-
Roccupied with the passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt
weight of a child up being pulled too tightly.
to twelve months old X Check the installation of the child restraint system.
in a child restraint X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
system the seat.
X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, have
the COS checked immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat
until the COS has been repaired.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display (Y page 244).
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK- driver's and front-passenger's head and

PRO luxury head restraints neck. In the event of a rear collision of a
certain severity, the NECK-PRO head
Important safety notes restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
on the driver's and the front-passenger seats
G WARNING are moved forwards and upwards. This
The function of the head restraint may be provides better head support.
impaired if you:
If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the luxury head restraints have been triggered in
head restraints, for example an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head
Ruse head restraint covers restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill on the driver's and front-passenger seats
their intended protective function in the event (Y page 54). Otherwise, the additional
of an accident. In addition, objects attached protection will not be available in the event of
to the head restraints could endanger other another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head
vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
of injury. that have been triggered are moved forwards
Do not attach any objects to the head
and can no longer be adjusted.
restraints and do not use head restraint Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
covers. the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
luxury head restraints checked at a qualified
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury specialist workshop after a rear-end collision.
head restraints increase protection of the
Z
54 Occupant safety
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraint and the rear cover of the head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.
restraints X Push resetting tool : downwards until you
hear the head restraint deployment
NECK-PRO head restraints
mechanism engage.
Safety
X Pull out resetting tool :.

X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-
PRO luxury head restraint cushion
backwards in the direction of arrow = until
it engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second
NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.
X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle
document wallet.
NECK-PRO head restraints i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-
X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint PRO luxury head restraints, have this work
cushion forwards in the direction of carried out at a qualified specialist
arrow :. workshop.
X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
down in the direction of arrow ; as far as
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
it will go.
protection system)
X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-
PRO head restraint cushion backwards in ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
the direction of arrow = until it engages. footwell or behind the seats when resetting
X Repeat this procedure for the second
the seats. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
NECK-PRO head restraint.
PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints protect occupants in certain hazardous
situations. Despite your vehicle being
equipped with the PRE-SAFE® system, the
possibility of personal injuries occurring as a
result of an accident cannot be eliminated.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the
prevailing road and weather conditions and
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in
front. Drive carefully.
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
Rif BAS intervenes, e.g. in emergency
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints braking situations.
Rif BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully — on
X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle
document wallet. vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.
X Slide resetting tool : into guide ;
between the NECK-PRO luxury head
Occupant safety 55
Rif,on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the of an accident, you could slide underneath the
radar sensor system detects an imminent seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck
danger of collision in certain situations. injuries, for example. This poses an increased
Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when risk of injury or even fatal injury.
physical limits are exceeded and the Adjust the seat properly before beginning
vehicle understeers or oversteers severely.
Safety
your journey. Always make sure that the seat
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures is in the upright position.
depending on the hazardous situation
detected: G WARNING
Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if:
Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is Rthey are damaged, extremely dirty,
in an unfavorable position. bleached or dyed
Rvehicles with a multicontour seat or active Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
multicontour seat: the air pressure in the extremely dirty
side bolsters of the seat cushion and Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices or the
backrest is increased. belt anchorage has been modified.
Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and Damage caused to seat belts in an accident
the side windows are closed so that only a may not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass.
small gap remains. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or
If the hazardous situation passes without fail, for example in the event of an accident.
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may
the belt pre-tensioning. The air pressure in be deployed unintentionally or fail to be
the side bolsters on the multicontour seat/ deployed when required. There is an
active multicontour seat is reduced again. All increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be Never modify seat belts, Emergency
reversed. Tensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages and
If the seat belts are not released: inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not
damaged or worn and are clean.
X When the vehicle is stationary, move the
backrest or seat back slightly. Only use seat belts that have been approved
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
the locking mechanism is released. The use of seat belts and infant and child
Information about seat belt adjustment, a restraint systems is required by law in:
convenience function integrated into PRE- Rall 50 states
SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat belt Rthe U.S. territories
adjustment" section (Y page 57).
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
Seat belts Even where this is not required by law, all

vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
Important safety notes their seat belts before starting the journey.
G WARNING i See "Children in the vehicle"
The seat belt does not offer the intended level (Y page 60) for further information on
of protection if the backrest is not in the infants and children traveling in the vehicle
upright position. When braking or in the event as well as on child restraint systems.
Z
56 Occupant safety
Correct use of the seat belts RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
your hips and not across the abdomen. If
G WARNING the lap belt is positioned across your
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
RSeat belts can only work when used a crash.
Safety
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
way than as described in this section, as breakable objects in or on your clothing,
that could result in serious injuries in the such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
event of an accident. these might cause injuries.
REach occupant should wear their seat belt RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
at all times, because seat belts help reduce snugly. Take special care of this when
the likelihood of and potential severity of wearing loose clothing.
injuries in accidents, including rollovers. RNever use a seat belt for more than one
The integrated restraint system includes person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee around a person and another person or
bag, front-passenger front air bag, side other objects at the same time.
impact air bags, pelvis air bags, window RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
curtain air bags for the side windows),
crash, you would not have the full width of
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt
the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
force limiters, and front seat knee bolsters.
The twisted seat belt against your body
The system is designed to enhance the could cause injuries.
protection offered to properly belted RPregnant women should also always use a
occupants in certain frontal (front air bags,
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side
should be positioned as low as possible on
(side impact air bags, window curtain air
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed
the abdomen.
preset deployment thresholds and in
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
certain rollovers (window curtain air bags
and ETDs). as upright as possible.
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, across your neck or off your shoulder. sure it is properly positioned.
In a frontal crash, your body would move RNever place your feet on the instrument
too far forward. That would increase the panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat keep both feet on the floor in front of the
belt would also apply too much force to the seat.
ribs or abdomen, which could severely RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
injure internal organs such as your liver or restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
spleen. booster seats, always follow the child seat
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder manufacturer's instructions.
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. It should not Fastening seat belts
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
portion of the seat belt under your arm. For G WARNING
this purpose, you can adjust the height of According to accident statistics, children are
the seat belt outlet. safer when properly restrained on the rear
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be
Occupant safety 57
placed in the rear seat whenever possible. X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
Regardless of seating position, children 12 appropriate height (Y page 58).
years old and under must be seated and X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
properly secured in an appropriately sized section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
child restraint system or booster seat across your body.
Safety
recommended for the size and weight of the All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
child. For additional information, see the equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
"Children in the vehicle" section. securely fasten child restraint systems in the
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is vehicle. Further information can be found
significantly increased if the child restraints under "Special seat belt retractor"
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ (Y page 63).
or the child is not properly secured in the child For more information about releasing the seat
restraint. belt with release button ?, see "Releasing
seat belts" (Y page 58).
Seat belt adjustment

The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the
driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the
upper body of the occupants.
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt
buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
lock and you then engage the belt tongue
in the buckle.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a
retraction force if any slack is detected
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to between the occupant and the seat belt. Do
an almost vertical position (Y page 98). not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is
X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt
sash guide :. adjustment on and off in the on-board
X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder
computer (Y page 233).
section of the seat belt across the middle The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
of your shoulder and the lap section across the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More
your pelvis. information about PRE-SAFE® can be found
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. under "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant
Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the protection)" (Y page 54).
driver's and front-passenger seat belts
automatically adjust to the upper body
(Y page 57).
Z
58 Occupant safety
Belt height adjustment

Safety
You can adjust the seat belt height on the

front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that
allows the upper part of the seat belt to be
routed across the center of your shoulder.
X Press release button ? on belt buckle =.
X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
The belt sash guide engages in various X Guide belt tongue ; to belt sash
positions. guide :.
X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide
release :. Belt warning for the driver and front
X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. passenger
X Release belt sash guide release : and Regardless of whether the driver's and front-
make sure that the belt sash guide has passenger seat belts have already been
engaged. fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp
lights up for six seconds each time the engine
Releasing seat belts is started. It then goes out if the driver and
the front passenger have already fastened
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled their seat belts.
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when
will be trapped in the door or in the seat the engine is started, an additional warning
mechanism. This could damage the door, tone will sound. This warning tone stops after
the door trim panel and the seat belt. a maximum of six seconds or once the
Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill driver's seat belt is fastened.
their protective function and must be
If after six seconds, the driver or front
replaced. Visit a qualified specialist
passenger have not fastened their seat belts
workshop.
and the doors are closed:
Rthe 7 seat belt warning lamp remains lit
as long as the driver's or front-passenger's
seat belt is not fastened
and
Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is
exceeded, the 7 seat belt warning lamp
begins to flash. A warning tone also sounds
with increasing intensity for a maximum of
Occupant safety 59
60 seconds or until the driver or front Tensioning Device could be triggered in the
passenger have fastened their seat belts. event of an accident.
If the driver/front passenger unfasten their i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: Emergency
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the Tensioning Devices that are triggered by an
7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a electric motor can be deployed as often as
Safety
warning tone sounds again. desired and do not need to be replaced.
The warning tone ceases even if the driver or
The front seat belts and the outer seat belts
front-passenger seat belt has still not been
in the rear are equipped with Emergency
fastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt
Tensioning Devices and seat belt force
warning lamp stops flashing but remains
limiters.
illuminated.
The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,
After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the
pulling them close against the body.
warning tone is reactivated and the seat belt
warning lamp 7 flashes again if the vehicle The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat
speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.
The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back
towards the backrest.
out if:
The ETDs can only be activated when:
Rboth the driver and the front passenger
Rthe ignition is switched on
have fastened their seat belts.
Rthe restraint systems are operational; see
or
Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.
"SRS warning lamp 6" (Y page 41)
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
i For more information on the 7 seat each of the front seat belts.
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, compartment are triggered independently of
seat belts" (Y page 265). the lock status of the seat belts.
The ETDs are triggered depending on the type
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat
and severity of an accident:
belt force limiters
Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end
G WARNING collision, the vehicle decelerates or
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal
that have been deployed are no longer direction during the initial stages of the
operational and are unable to perform their impact
intended protective function. This poses an Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. opposite the impact the vehicle
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a
Tensioning Devices which have been lateral direction
triggered immediately replaced at a qualified Rif, in certain situations where the vehicle
specialist workshop. rolls over, the system determines that it
can provide additional protection
! If the front-passenger seat is not
If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,
occupied, do not engage the seat belt
and a small amount of powder may also be
tongue in the buckle on the front-
released. Only in rare cases will the bang
passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency
affect your hearing. The powder that is
released generally does not constitute a
Z
60 Children in the vehicle
health hazard and does not indicate that there recommended for the size and weight of the
is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause child.
some temporary breathing difficulty for Children can be killed or seriously injured by
people with asthma or other breathing an inflating air bag. Note the following
trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out important information when circumstances
of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Safety
require you to place a child in the front

You can also open the window to allow fresh passenger seat:
air to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRS
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
warning lamp lights up.
technology designed to deactivate the front
If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
belt force limiter and this is triggered, the
when the system senses the weight of a
force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle
typical 12-month-old child or less along
occupant is reduced.
with the weight of a standard appropriate
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats child restraint on the front passenger seat.
are synchronized with the front air bags, RFor children larger than the typical
which take on a part of the deceleration force.
12-month-old child, the front passenger
This results in the force exerted on the
front air bag may or may not be activated.
occupant being distributed over a greater
Always make sure the 4 5 indicator
area.
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
Children in the vehicle
front passenger seat will be seriously
Child restraint systems injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
Important safety notes could occur under some circumstances,
G WARNING even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to
According to accident statistics, children are
completely eliminate this risk is to never
safer when properly restrained in the rear
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
seating positions than in the front seating
in the front seat. We therefore strongly
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
recommend that you always place a child
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
possible. Regardless of seating position,
RIf you must install a rear-facing child
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate restraint on the front passenger seat
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster because circumstances require you to do
seat recommended for the size and weight of so, make sure the 4 5 indicator
the child. lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front
The infant or child restraint must be properly passenger front air bag is deactivated.
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and illuminate or go out while the restraint is
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the installed, please check installation.
child seat manufacturer's instructions. Periodically check the 4 5 indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the 4
Occupants, especially children, should always
5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized infant 4 5 indicator lamp goes out or
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat remains out, do not transport a child on the
Children in the vehicle 61
front passenger seat until the system has system manufacturer's installation
been repaired. instructions.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously G WARNING
injured or even killed if the front passenger Child restraint systems or their securing
Safety
front air bag inflates. systems which have been damaged or
RIf you have to place a child in a forward- subjected to a load in an accident can no
facing child restraint on the front passenger longer protect as intended. The child cannot
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, then be restrained in the event of an accident,
use the proper child restraint heavy braking or sudden changes of direction.
recommended for the age, size and weight There is an increased risk of injury, possibly
of the child, and secure child restraint with even fatal.
the vehicle's seat belt according to the Replace child restraint systems which have
child seat manufacturer's instructions. been damaged or subjected to a load in an
accident as soon as possible. Have the
G WARNING securing systems on the child restraint
If the child restraint system is installed system checked at a qualified specialist
incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot workshop, before you install a child restraint
protect as intended. The child cannot then be system again.
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There G WARNING
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even Infants and small children should never share
fatal. a seat belt with another occupant. In the event
Make sure that you observe the child restraint of an accident, they could be crushed
system manufacturer's installation between the occupant and seat belt.
instructions and the notes on use. Please A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
ensure, that the base of the child restraint significantly increased if the child restraints
system is always resting completely on the are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. or the child is not properly secured in the child
cushions, under or behind the child restraint restraint.
system. Only use child restraint systems with Children that are too large for a child restraint
the original cover designed for them. Only must travel in seats using normal seat belts.
replace damaged covers with genuine covers. Position the shoulder belt across the chest
and shoulder, not the face or neck. A booster
G WARNING seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat
If the child restraint system is installed belt positioning for children over 41 lbs
incorrectly or is not secured, it can come (18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/
loose in the event of an accident, heavy shoulder belt fits properly without a booster
braking or a sudden change in direction. The seat.
child restraint system could be thrown about, When the child restraint is not in use, remove
striking vehicle occupants. There is an it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. belt to prevent the child restraint from
Always install child restraint systems becoming a projectile in the event of an
properly, even if they are not being used. accident.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
Z
G WARNING If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, RSecure the child with a child or infant seat
they could: restraint system appropriate to the age and
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other weight of the child.
people or road users. RMake sure that the infant or child is
Safety
Rget out and disrupt traffic. properly secured at all times while the
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
vehicle is in motion.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
properly secure all infants and children with
motion if, for example, they:
a child or infant seat restraint system for the
Rrelease the parking brake. trip.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of The use of seat belts and infant and child
park position P restraint systems is required by law in:
RStart the engine. Rall 50 states
There is a risk of an accident and injury. Rthe U.S. territories
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Rthe District of Columbia
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Rall Canadian provinces
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of Infants and children must always be seated in
reach of children. an appropriate infant or child restraint system
recommended for the size and weight of the
G WARNING child. The infant or child restraint system
must be properly secured in accordance with
If persons, particularly children are subjected
the manufacturer's instructions.
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even All infant or child restraint systems must meet
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the the following standards:
vehicle. RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225
G WARNING RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
If the child restraint system is subjected to 213 and 210.2
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Confirmation that the child restraint system
Children may burn themselves on these parts, corresponds to the standards can be found
particularly on the metal parts of the child on an instruction label on the child restraint
restraint system. There is a risk of injury. system. This confirmation can also be found
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with in the installation instructions that are
you, always ensure that the child restraint included with the child restraint system.
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Always read and follow the manufacturer's
Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the instructions when using an infant or child
child restraint system has been exposed to restraint system or booster seat.
direct sunlight, let it cool down before Observe the warning labels in the vehicle
securing the child in it. Never leave children interior or on the infant or child restraint.
unattended in the vehicle.
Special seat belt retractor LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors

in the rear
G WARNING
If the seat belt is released while driving, the G WARNING
child restraint system will no longer be LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
secured properly. The special seat belt do not offer sufficient protective effect for
Safety
retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt (22 kg). The child could, for example, not be
cannot be immediately refastened. There is restrained correctly in the event of an
an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. accident. This poses an increased risk of
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying injury or even fatal injury.
attention to road and traffic conditions. If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and also secure the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
secure the child restraint system properly. restraint system with the vehicle seat belt.
Also secure the child restraint system with the
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are Top Tether belt, if available.
equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
When activated, the special seat belt When installing a child restraint system, be
retractor ensures that the seat belt will not sure to observe the manufacturer's
slacken once the child restraint system has installation instructions and the instructions
been secured. for correct use of the child restraint system.
Installing a child restraint system:
X Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat
belt retractor.
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat
belt retractor retract it again. Securing ring
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
belt retractor is activated. restraint system, fold protective caps ; of
securing rings : inwards.
X Push down on the child restraint system to
take up any slack. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
securing system. Comply with the
Removing a child restraint system/ manufacturer's instructions when
deactivating the special seat belt retractor: installing.
X Always comply with the manufacturer's The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system is a
installation instructions. standardized securing system for specially
X Press the seat belt release button and designed child restraint systems on the rear
guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet. seats. Securing rings for two LATCH-type
The special seat belt retractor is (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed
deactivated. on the left and right of the rear seats.
Z
Secure child restraint systems without a Top Tether provides an additional connection
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing between a child restraint system, secured
system using the seat belts in the vehicle. with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,
When installing child restraint systems, you and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk
must observe the manufacturer's installation of injury even further.
instructions. The Top Tether anchorage points are located
Safety
in the rear compartment behind the head

Top Tether restraints.
X Move head restraint : upwards.
Top Tether anchorages
X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
G WARNING
=.
Always lock the rear seat backrests in their
X Route Top Tether belt A under head
upright position when the rear seats are
occupied by passengers. Lock the rear seat restraint : between the two head restraint
backrests in their upright position before bars.
installing the Top Tether straps or when the X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether
cargo compartment is not in use. Make sure anchorage =.
that rear seat backrests are secured properly X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not
by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests.
twisted.
If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the
X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether
seat backrest could fold forward. The child
restraint system is no longer supported anchorage =.
properly or held in position and can no longer X Slide down head restraint : until it
fulfill its function. This could cause serious or engages (Y page 101).
even fatal injuries. Make sure that you do not interfere with the
correct routing of Top Tether belt A.
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system with Top Tether. Comply
with the manufacturer's installation
instructions when doing so. Make sure that
Top Tether belt A is tight.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in Child-proof locks for the rear doors
G WARNING
Rrelease the parking brake. Children could open a rear door from inside
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of the vehicle. This could result in serious
park position P injuries or an accident. Therefore, when
Safety
RStart the engine. children ride in the rear always secure the rear
There is a risk of an accident and injury. doors with the child-proof locks.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G WARNING
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. You secure each door individually with the
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
G WARNING secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they opened from inside the vehicle. When the
could: vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
Ropen doors, thus endangering other people from the outside.
or road users X To activate: press the child-proof lock
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming lever up in the direction of arrow :.
traffic X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
Roperate vehicle equipment and become working properly.
trapped X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
There is a risk of an accident and injury. lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in the Override feature for the rear side
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take windows
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING
When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,
You can activate the following child-proof activate the override switch. Otherwise, the
locks: children could be injured, e.g. by trapping
Rrear doors (Y page 65) themselves in the rear side window.
Rrear side windows (Y page 65)
Z
66 Driving safety systems
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in

front, for vehicle speed and for braking in
good time. Always adapt your driving style to
suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic
conditions and maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
Safety
i The driving safety systems described only

work as effectively as possible when there
is adequate contact between the tires and
the road surface. Please pay special
attention to the notes on tires,
X To activate/deactivate: press button ;.
recommended minimum tire tread depths,
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the
etc. (Y page 334).
rear side windows is disabled. Operation is
In wintry driving conditions, always use
only possible using the switches in the
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,
driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off,
snow chains. Only in this way will the
operation is possible using the switches in
driving safety systems described in this
the rear compartment.
section work as effectively as possible.
Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Overview of driving safety systems Important safety notes
In this section, you will find information about i Observe the "Important safety notes"
the following driving safety systems: section (Y page 66).
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 66) G WARNING
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67)
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)
characteristics may be severely impaired.
(Y page 67) Additionally, further driving safety systems
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) are deactivated. There is an increased danger
(Y page 68) of skidding and accidents.
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked
(Y page 71) immediately at a qualified specialist
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72) workshop.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72)
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 267) and
If you fail to adapt your driving style or display messages which may be shown in the
become distracted, the driving safety instrument cluster (Y page 238).
systems can neither reduce the risk of ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
accident nor override the laws of physics. that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
Driving safety systems are merely aids This allows you to continue steering the
designed to assist driving. You are vehicle when braking.
Driving safety systems 67
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface PLUS)
conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,
even if you only brake gently. General information
The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the i Observe the "Important safety notes"
Safety
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition section (Y page 66).
is switched on. It goes out when the engine is
BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles
running.
equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS.
Braking For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the
radar sensor system must be:
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the Ractivated (Y page 232)
brake pedal vigorously until the braking
Roperational
situation is over.
X To make a full brake application: With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS
depress the brake pedal with full force. PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the
path of your vehicle for an extended period of
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel time.
a pulsing in the brake pedal.
If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,
The pulsating brake pedal can be an BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake
indication of hazardous road conditions, and system is still available with complete brake
functions as a reminder to take extra care boosting effect and BAS.
while driving.
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in
hazardous situations at speeds greater than
4 mph (7 km/h).
BAS (Brake Assist System)
At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph
i Observe the "Important safety notes" (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react to
section (Y page 66). stationary objects. Examples of stationary
objects are stopped or parked vehicles.
G WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING
In an emergency braking situation, depress BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents objects and complex traffic situations. BAS
the wheels from locking. PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There
is a risk of an accident.
BAS operates in emergency braking
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situations. If you depress the brake pedal
situation and be ready to brake.
quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking
force, thus shortening the stopping distance.
G WARNING
The brakes will function as usual once you
BAS PLUS does not react:
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Rto people or animals
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
Z
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are
critical situations. There is a risk of an activated simultaneously.
accident. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
Always pay careful attention to the traffic emergency braking situation is over.
situation and be ready to brake. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Safety
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes

In particular, the detection of obstacles can
function as usual if:
be impaired if there is:
Ryou release the brake pedal
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision
covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
Rinterference by other radar sources

vehicle
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike Important safety notes
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
relative to the center of your vehicle section (Y page 66).
Following damage to the front end of the
vehicle, have the configuration and operation G WARNING
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
specialist workshop. This also applies to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further
collisions at low speeds where there is no driving safety systems are deactivated. This
visible damage to the front of the vehicle. increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
Braking assistance qualified specialist workshop.
To prevent a collision with the vehicle in front, ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the
BAS PLUS calculates the brake force ignition when the parking brake is being
necessary if: tested on a brake dynamometer.
Ryou approach an obstacle, and Application of the brakes by ESP® may
RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision otherwise destroy the brake system.
When driving at a speed under 20 mph Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, on ESP®(Y page 330) when towing the
BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake vehicle with a raised rear axle.
pressure will be carried out at the last
possible moment. ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up
When driving at a speed greater than
continuously when the engine is running.
20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake
pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises If the ÷ warning lamp and the å
the brake pressure to a value adapted to the warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not
traffic situation. available due to a malfunction.
If BAS PLUS demands particularly high Observe the information on warning lamps
braking force, preventative passenger (Y page 269) and display messages which
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 238).
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
from the direction desired by the driver, one extended period with ESP® deactivated.
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to X To deactivate:(Y page 227).
keep the vehicle on the desired course within
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when
Safety
instrument cluster lights up.
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®
can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. X To activate: (Y page 227).
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. instrument cluster goes out.
If ESP® intervenes: ESP® is activated automatically when the
engine is started.
X Do not deactivate ESP® under any
The ECO start/stop function switches the
circumstances.
engine off automatically when the vehicle
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far
stops moving. The engine starts
as necessary when pulling away. automatically when the driver wants to pull
X Adapt your driving style to suit the away again. ESP® remains in its previously
prevailing road and weather conditions. selected status. Example: if ESP® was
i Only use wheels with the recommended deactivated before the engine was switched
tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function off, ESP® remains deactivated when the
properly. engine is switched on again.
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the
individually if they spin. This enables you to
pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,
for example if the road surface is slippery on Rwhen using snow chains
one side. In addition, more drive torque is Rin deep snow
transferred to the wheel or wheels with Ron sand or gravel
traction.
If you deactivate ESP®:
Traction control remains active, even if you
RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
deactivate ESP®.
Rtraction control is still activated.
Deactivating/activating ESP® (except RESP® still provides support when you
AMG vehicles) brake.

Rengine torque is not limited and the drive
G WARNING wheels are able to spin. The spinning
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer wheels produce a cutting effect for better
stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased traction.
risk of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations
described in the following.
Z
Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMG It may be best to activate SPORT handling

vehicles) mode in the following situations:
Rwhen using snow chains
Activating/deactivating SPORT handling
Rin deep snow
mode
Ron sand or gravel
Safety
G WARNING
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and
or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®
accidents. warning lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the
limited degree.
situations described in the following.
When SPORT handling mode is activated:
RESP® only improves driving stability to a
limited degree.
Rtraction control is still activated.
RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
Rengine torque is only restricted to a limited
degree, and the drive wheels are able to
spin. The spinning wheels produce a
cutting effect for better traction.
Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the
X To activate: briefly press button :. ECO start/stop function switches the engine
The M SPORT handling mode warning off automatically when the vehicle comes to
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. a stop. The engine starts automatically when
The SPORT handling mode message the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®
appears in the multifunction display. remains in its previously selected status. For
SPORT handling mode is designed for example, if ESP® was deactivated before the
driving on designated roads when the engine was switched off, ESP® remains
vehicle's own oversteering and deactivated when the engine is switched on
understeering characteristics are desired. again.
Driving in SPORT handling mode requires
an extremely qualified and experienced Deactivating/activating ESP®
driver who is able to cope with these critical G WARNING
driving conditions. If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer
X To deactivate: briefly press button :. stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased
The M SPORT handling mode warning risk of skidding and an accident.
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations
ESP® is activated automatically when the described in the following.
engine is started.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP® deactivated.
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it

activated if you brake firmly and ESP®
intervenes.
RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it
is also not activated if you brake firmly and
Safety
ESP® intervenes.
RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
Rengine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning
X To deactivate: press button : until the wheels produce a cutting effect for better
å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in traction.
the instrument cluster. Vehicles with ECO start/stop function: the
The ÷OFF message appears in the ECO start/stop function switches the engine
multifunction display. off automatically when the vehicle comes to
Deactivate ESP® when driving on a stop. The engine starts automatically when
designated roads when the vehicle's own the driver wants to pull away again. ESP®
oversteering and understeering remains in its previously selected status. For
characteristics are desired. Driving without example, if ESP® was deactivated before the
ESP® requires an extremely qualified and engine was switched off, ESP® remains
experienced driver who is able to cope with deactivated when the engine is switched on
these critical driving conditions. again.
X To activate: briefly press button :.
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the EBD (electronic brake force
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ON distribution)
message appears in the multifunction
display.
section (Y page 66).
ESP® is activated automatically when the
engine is started. G WARNING
If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
still lock, e.g. under full braking. This
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such
You should therefore adapt your driving style
situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
to the different handling characteristics. Have
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the the brake system checked at a qualified
following situations: specialist workshop.
Rwhen using snow chains
Rin deep snow Observe information regarding indicator and
warning lamps (Y page 267) as well as
Ron sand or gravel
display messages (Y page 240).
If you deactivate ESP®: EBD monitors and controls the brake
RESP® no longer improves driving stability. pressure on the rear wheels to improve
Rtraction control is still activated. driving stability while braking.
Z
ADAPTIVE BRAKE Automatic emergency braking cannot prevent

a collision. There is a risk of an accident.
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
and offers increased braking comfort. In Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE take evasive action.
BRAKE also has the HOLD function
Safety
(Y page 186) and hill start assist G WARNING

(Y page 150). PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic
conditions.
PRE-SAFE® Brake In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:
General information Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
i Observe the "Important safety notes" Rnot give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles Always pay particular attention to the traffic
with DISTRONIC PLUS. situation and be ready to brake, especially if
If PRE-SAFE® Brake is to aid you, the radar PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the
sensor system must be: intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
Ractivated (Y page 232)
Roperational
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if there is:
With the help of the radar sensor system,
Rdirton the sensors or anything else
PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that
are in front of your vehicle for an extended covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
period of time.
Rinterference by other radar sources
PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize
the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE- example in parking garages
SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
you will be warned visually and acoustically motorbike
as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
Brake cannot prevent a collision without your relative to the center of your vehicle
intervention.
G WARNING
At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph
(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:
stationary objects. Examples of stationary Rto people or animals
objects are stopped or parked vehicles. Rto oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Important safety notes Rwhen cornering
G WARNING As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither

PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your give warnings nor intervene in all critical
vehicle by a partial application of the brakes situations. There is a risk of an accident.
if a danger of collision is detected. There may Always pay careful attention to the traffic
be a collision unless you also brake. situation and be ready to brake.
Theft deterrent locking system 73
In order to maintain the appropriate distance The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is
to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a ended automatically if:
collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end
complicated driving conditions may cause
collision.
unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary
Safety
Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake.
front of your vehicle.
Following damage to the front end of the
vehicle, have the configuration and operation If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE®
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified Brake detects a risk of a collision, the system
specialist workshop. This also applies to will alert you both visually and acoustically. If
collisions at low speeds where there is no you do not brake or take evasive action, the
visible damage to the front of the vehicle. system will warn you by automatically braking
the vehicle gently. If there is an increased risk
of collision, preventative passenger
Function
protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are
X To activate/deactivate: activate or activated (Y page 54). If a risk of collision
deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on- remains at speeds of over 20 mph
board computer (Y page 228). (30 km/h) and you do not brake, take evasive
If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the action or significantly accelerate, automatic
æ symbol appears in the multifunction braking may be performed up to and including
display. emergency braking. Automatic emergency
braking is not performed until immediately
If you approach a vehicle in front very quickly,
prior to an accident that can no longer be
this function warns you from a speed of
avoided.
approximately 4 mph (7 km/h). An
intermittent warning tone sounds and the
· distance warning signal lamp in the
Theft deterrent locking system
X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. Immobilizer
or The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do being started without the correct SmartKey.
so. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove
From a speed of approximately 4 mph the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
(7 km/h), if the driver and front passenger X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
have fastened their seat belts, PRE-SAFE® ignition off and open the driver's door.
Brake can brake the vehicle automatically at X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
speeds up to approximately 124 mph
(200 km/h).
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- Anyone can start the engine if a valid
SAFE® Brake at any time by: SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.
Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further. i The immobilizer is always deactivated
Ractivating kickdown. when you start the engine.
Rreleasing the brake pedal.
In the event that the engine cannot be
started when the starter battery is fully
charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.
Z
74 Theft deterrent locking system
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:

Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the grasp the outside door handle. The
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
or
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Safety
X Press the Start/Stop button on the

dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside
the vehicle.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call
system automatically sends a message to
the Customer Assistance Center by text
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey message or data connection. The
or KEYLESS-GO. emergency call system sends the message
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm provided that:
system is armed after approximately Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace
15 seconds. service
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Rthe mbrace service has been activated
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. properly
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the Rthe necessary mobile phone network is
alarm system is armed and you open: available

Ra door
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe hood
X To turn the alarm off with the
SmartKey: press the % or & button
on the SmartKey.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
75

SmartKey ............................................. 76
Doors .................................................... 82
Trunk .................................................... 84
Side windows ...................................... 88
Sliding sunroof .................................... 92
Opening and closing

76 SmartKey
Useful information G WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to the
i This Operator's Manual describes all SmartKey, the SmartKey could be
models and all standard and optional unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This
equipment of your vehicle available at the could cause the engine to be switched off.
time of publication of the Operator's There is a risk of an accident.
Manual. Country-specific differences are Do not attach any heavy or large objects to
possible. Please note that your vehicle may the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings
Opening and closing
not be equipped with all features before inserting the SmartKey into the
described. This also applies to safety- ignition lock.
related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
specialist workshops: (Y page 26). magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
SmartKey vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
RDo not keep the SmartKey:
- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
G WARNING phone or another SmartKey
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, - with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
they could: foil
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other - inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
people or road users. This can affect the functionality of the
Rget out and disrupt traffic. SmartKey.

SmartKey functions
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
RStart the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.

reach of children.
: & To lock the vehicle
G WARNING ; F To unlock the trunk lid
If persons, particularly children are subjected = % To unlock the vehicle
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or X To unlock centrally: press the %
button.
vehicle.
SmartKey 77
If you do not open the vehicle within KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically
Rthe vehicle is locked again. establishing a radio connection between the
Rthe
vehicle and the SmartKey. This happens:
theft deterrent locking system is
armed again. Rwhen the external door handles are
touched
X To lock centrally: press the & button. Rwhen starting the engine
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rwhile the vehicle is in motion
Opening and closing

Rthe doors
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking

and three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 232).
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
computer (Y page 231). surface of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor
surface :.
KEYLESS-GO
X Convenience closing feature: touch
General notes recessed sensor surface ; for an
Bear in mind that the engine can be started extended period.
by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on
KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. the trunk lid.
Further information on the convenience
Locking/unlocking centrally closing feature (Y page 90).
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry
the SmartKey with you. You can combine the Changing the settings of the locking
functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a system
conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle You can change the settings of the locking
by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock system. This means that only the driver's door
it using the & button on the SmartKey. and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you
the distance between the SmartKey and the frequently travel on your own.
corresponding door handle must not be X To change the setting: press and hold
greater than 3 ft (1 m). down the % and & buttons on the
SmartKey simultaneously for
Z
78 SmartKey
approximately six seconds until the battery There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
check lamp flashes twice (Y page 79). X To turn the alarm off with the
i If the setting of the locking system is SmartKey: press the % or & button
changed within the signal range of the on the SmartKey.
vehicle, pressing the & or % button: or
Rlocks
or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Runlocks the vehicle or
Opening and closing
The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-
X To unlock the driver's door: press the GO: press the Start/Stop button in the
% button once. ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
X To unlock centrally: press the %
or
button twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO. The SmartKey must be outside the
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as vehicle.
follows:
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
inner surface of the door handle on the automatically.
driver's door. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
surface of the door handle on the front-
passenger door or the rear door.
Removing the mechanical key
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X To restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp
flashes twice (Y page 79).
Mechanical key
General notes : Release catch
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or ; Mechanical key
unlocked with the SmartKey, use the X Push release catch : in the direction of
mechanical key.
the arrow and at the same time remove
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the
anti-theft alarm system will be triggered
(Y page 74).
SmartKey 79
SmartKey battery Replacing the battery
Important safety notes You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.

X Take the mechanical key out of the
G WARNING SmartKey (Y page 78).
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive
substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can
result in severe health problems. There is a
risk of fatal injury.
Opening and closing

Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have

the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
: Battery compartment cover
Checking the battery ; Mechanical key
X Press mechanical key ; into the opening
in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery compartment cover :
opens. Do not hold battery compartment
cover : closed while doing so.
X Remove battery compartment cover :.
X Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X Change the battery (Y page 79).
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within = Battery
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
pressing the & or % button: X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
Rlocks or
X Insert the new battery with the positive
Runlocks the vehicle
terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free
i You can get a battery at any qualified cloth to do so.
specialist workshop. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
Z
80 SmartKey
X Insert the front tabs of battery

compartment cover : into the housing
first and then press to close it.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the
SmartKey (Y page 78).
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
Opening and closing
SmartKey 81
Problems with the SmartKey

You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the SmartKey. function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % or
Opening and closing

& button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if
necessary (Y page 79).
X Lock (Y page 84) or unlock (Y page 84) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.

the mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
using KEYLESS-GO. the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the % or & button.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if
necessary (Y page 79).
the mechanical key.
You have lost a X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist

SmartKey. workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Z
82 Doors

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
Opening and closing
(Y page 324).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 326).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as
started using KEYLESS- easily.
GO. The SmartKey is in X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
the vehicle.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Doors G WARNING
G WARNING cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
they could: vehicle.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Unlocking and opening doors from
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. If the vehicle has
been locked with the SmartKey or with
Rrelease the parking brake. KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
park position P Switch off the alarm (Y page 74).
RStart the engine. You can only open the rear doors from inside
There is a risk of an accident and injury. the vehicle if they are not secured by the
child-proof locks (Y page 65).
reach of children.
Doors 83
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from

the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
You can only open the rear doors from inside
the vehicle if they are not secured by the
child-proof locks (Y page 65).
Opening and closing

If the vehicle has been locked using the
locking button for the central locking, or has
X To unlock a front door: pull door been locked automatically, and a door is
handle ;. opened from the inside:
Locking knob : pops up. Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
The door is unlocked and can be opened. previously been fully unlocked
Ronly the door which has been opened form
X To open a front door: pull door the inside is unlocked if only the driver's
handle ;. door had been previously unlocked
X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking
knob :.
The door is unlocked and can be opened. Automatic locking feature
X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.
Centrally locking and unlocking the

vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside.
X To deactivate: press and hold button :

for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
i If you press one of the two buttons and
do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
already been selected.
X To unlock: press button :. The vehicle is locked automatically when the
X To lock: press button ;. ignition is switched on and the wheels are
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks. turning.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be

locked or unlocked.
Z
84 Trunk
You could therefore lock yourself out if: X Open the driver's door.
Rthe vehicle is being pushed. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
Rthe vehicle is being towed. doors and the trunk lid.

Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. X Press the locking button (Y page 83).
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
You can also switch the automatic locking
function on and off using the on-board front-passenger door and the rear doors
computer (Y page 232). are still visible. Press down the locking
knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 82).
Opening and closing
X Close the driver's door.

Unlocking the driver's door X Take the mechanical key out of the
(mechanical key) SmartKey (Y page 78).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. the driver's door as far as it will go.
X Take the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 78).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
1 To lock
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far
as it will go to position 1.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
1 To unlock it.
X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
to position 1. are locked.
The door is unlocked. X Insert the mechanical key into the
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove SmartKey.

it.
X Insert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey. Trunk
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and Important safety notes
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 74). G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
Trunk 85
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is Opening/closing from outside

a risk of poisoning.
Opening
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
G WARNING
Opening and closing

vehicle.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when

opened. Therefore, make sure that there is X Press the % button on the SmartKey.
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. X Pull handle :.
i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid
(Y page 379). Closing
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the cargo compartment. Observe the
loading guidelines (Y page 278).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
Vehicles without trunk lid remote closing
feature: the trunk lid can be:
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Ropened automatically from outside
Ropened automatically from inside
Rlocked separately X Pull the trunk lid down using recess :.
Runlocked with the mechanical key X If necessary, lock the vehicle with
Ropened with the emergency release button the & button on the SmartKey
Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing (Y page 76) or with KEYLESS-GO
feature: the trunk lid can be: (Y page 77).
Ropened and closed manually from outside i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the
Ropened and closed automatically from trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and
outside will open again.
Ropened and closed automatically from
inside
Rlocked separately
Runlocked with the mechanical key
Ropened with the emergency release button
Z
86 Trunk
Opening/closing automatically from Use one of the following options to stop the
outside closing process:
RPress the F button on the key.
Rpress the remote operating switch on the
G WARNING driver's door.
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust RPress the closing or locking button on the
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust trunk lid.
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
Opening and closing
RPull the trunk lid handle.

trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is
a risk of poisoning.
open.

opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
(Y page 379).
Example: closing and locking button (vehicle with
the trunk lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-
Opening GO)
: Closing button
You can open the trunk lid automatically
using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk ; Locking button
lid. X To close: press closing button : in the
X Press and hold the F button on the trunk lid.
SmartKey until the trunk lid opens. Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closing
or feature and KEYLESS-GO: you can
X If the trunk is unlocked, pull the trunk lid simultaneously close and lock the trunk lid.
handle and release it again immediately X Press locking button ; in the trunk lid.
(Y page 85).
i If you leave a KEYLESS-GO key in the
Closing trunk, the trunk lid will not lock.
G WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped Opening/closing automatically from
during automatic closing of the trunk lid. inside
Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the Important safety notes
closing area during the closing process. There
G WARNING
is a risk of injury.
Parts of the body could become trapped
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the during automatic closing of the trunk lid.
closing area during the closing process. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be
standing in the closing area or may enter the
Trunk 87
closing area during the closing process. There Opening and closing
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
RPress the F button on the key.
Opening and closing

Rpress the remote operating switch on the
driver's door.
RPress the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid.
RPull the trunk lid handle. X To open: pull remote operating switch for
trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens.
G WARNING X To close: press remote operating switch
The trunk lid can be automatically opened or for trunk lid : until the trunk lid is closed.
closed even if the SmartKey is not in the
You can open the trunk lid from the driver's
vehicle. If children are left unsupervised in the
seat when the vehicle is stationary and
vehicle, they could activate the functions.
unlocked.
There is a risk of injury.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNING opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running, mechanical key.
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
a risk of poisoning. open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system
Always switch off the engine before opening will be triggered (Y page 74).
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid X Take the mechanical key out of the
open. SmartKey (Y page 78).
X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
(Y page 379). lock as far as it will go.
Z
88 Side windows
Trunk lid emergency release light:

Remergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened
Remergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed
Side windows
Opening and closing

1 Neutral position. G WARNING
2 To unlock While opening the side windows, body parts
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise could become trapped between the side
from position 1 as far as it will go to window and the door frame as the side
position 2. window moves. There is a risk of injury.
The trunk is unlocked. Make sure that nobody touches the side
X Turn the mechanical key back to position
window during the opening procedure. If
1 and remove it. somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or pull the switch to close the side
X Insert the mechanical key into the
window again.
SmartKey.
G WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
Trunk emergency release in the closing area could become trapped.
You can open the trunk lid from inside the There is a risk of injury.
vehicle with the emergency release button. Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or press the switch to open the side
window again.
G WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
X Press emergency release button : briefly. take the SmartKey with you and lock the
The trunk lid unlocks and opens. vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened the vehicle.
with the trunk lid emergency release when
the vehicle is stationary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergency release does not Side window reversing feature
open the trunk lid if the battery is The side windows are equipped with an
disconnected or discharged. automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
Side windows 89
blocks or restricts a side window during the = Rear right

closing process, the side window opens again ? Rear left
automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
relieve you of the responsibility of paying ignition lock.
attention when closing a side window. X To open: press the corresponding switch.
X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
G WARNING
The reversing feature does not react: i If you press the switch beyond the point
Opening and closing

of resistance, an automatic opening/
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small closing process is started in the
fingers corresponding direction. You can stop
Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement automatic operation by operating the
Rduring resetting switch again.
Rwhen closing the side window again
i You can continue to operate the side
manually immediately after automatic windows after you switch off the engine or
reversing remove the SmartKey. This function is
This means that the reversing feature cannot available for up to five minutes or until the
prevent someone being trapped in these driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
situations. There is a risk of injury.
i When the override feature for the side
Make sure that no body parts are in close
windows is activated (Y page 65), the side
proximity during the closing procedure. If
windows cannot be operated from the rear.
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.
Convenience opening
Opening and closing the side General notes
windows You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
The switches for all side windows are located driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on carry out the following functions
each door for the corresponding side window. simultaneously:
The switches on the driver's door take Runlock the vehicle
precedence. Ropen the side windows
Ropen the sliding sunroof
Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the
driver's seat
i The convenience opening feature can
only be operated using the SmartKey. The
SmartKey must be close to the driver's
door handle.
: Front left
; Front right
Z
90 Side windows
Convenience opening operating. Make sure that no body parts are

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's in close proximity during the closing
door handle. procedure.
X Press and hold the % button until the
Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
side windows and the sliding sunroof are in With the SmartKey:
the desired position.
Rrelease the & button.
X To interrupt convenience opening:
Opening and closing
release the % button. Rpress and hold the % button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
Convenience closing feature panel open again.
Using KEYLESS-GO:
Important safety notes Rrelease the sensor surface on the door
Information on the side window reversing handle.
feature (Y page 88). Rpull the door handle immediately and hold
G WARNING it.
The reversing feature does not react: The side windows and the sliding sunroof
or the panorama roof with power tilt/
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small sliding panel open.
fingers
Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement
General notes
Rduring resetting
When you lock the vehicle, you can
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again
simultaneously:
manually immediately after automatic
Rclose the side windows
reversing
Rclose the sliding sunroof
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury. Using the SmartKey
Make sure that no body parts are in close The SmartKey must be close to the driver's
proximity during the closing procedure. door handle.
If somebody becomes trapped: X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
Rrelease the switch immediately, or door handle.
Rduring automatic operation, push the X Press and hold the & button until the
switch briefly in any direction side windows and the sliding sunroof are
The closing process is stopped. fully closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
G WARNING sliding sunroof are closed.
When the convenience closing feature is X To interrupt convenience closing:
operating, parts of the body could become release the & button.
trapped in the closing area of the side window
and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of
injury. Using KEYLESS-GO
Observe the complete closing procedure The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the
when the convenience closing feature is vehicle. All the doors must be closed.
Side windows 91
Opening and closing

XTouch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are fully closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed
sensor surface :.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
X To interrupt convenience closing:
release recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle.
Resetting the side windows

If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 89).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side
window is completely closed (Y page 89).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly.
If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Z
92 Sliding sunroof
Problems with the side windows

G WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
Opening and closing
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot X Remove the objects.
be closed because it is X Close the side window.
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
be closed and you slightly:
cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Sliding sunroof The opening or closing procedure will be

stopped.
G WARNING G WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, If children operate the sliding sunroof they
body parts in close proximity could become could become trapped, particularly if they are
trapped. There is a risk of injury. left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close When leaving the vehicle, always take the
proximity during the opening and closing SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
procedures. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
If somebody becomes trapped: ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
Rrelease the switch immediately, or of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions
Rduring automatic operation, push the may occur.
switch briefly in any direction
Sliding sunroof 93
Do not allow anything to protrude from the If somebody becomes trapped:

sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could Rrelease the switch immediately, or
be damaged.
Rduring automatic operation, push the
! The weather can change abruptly. It could switch briefly in any direction
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the The closing process is stopped.
sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the
vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be
damaged if water enters the vehicle
Opening and closing

interior. Operating the sliding sunroof
i Resonance noises can occur in addition Opening and closing

to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature

The sliding sunroof is equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
Overhead control panel
blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during
: To raise
the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens
again automatically. However, the automatic ; To open
reversing feature is only an aid and does not = To close/lower
relieve you of the responsibility of paying X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
attention when closing the sliding sunroof.
ignition lock.
G WARNING X Press or pull the 3 switch in the
The reversing feature does not react: corresponding direction.
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
fingers point of resistance, an automatic opening/
Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement closing process is started in the
Rduring resetting
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by operating the
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again
switch again.
manually immediately after automatic
reversing i The automatic opening and raising
This means that the reversing feature cannot feature is available only when the sliding
prevent someone being trapped in these sunroof is closed.
situations. There is a risk of injury. The sun protection cover automatically opens
Make sure that no body parts are in close along with the sliding sunroof. You can open
proximity during the closing procedure. or close the sun protection cover manually
when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
i You can continue to operate the sliding
sunroof after switching off the engine or
Z
94 Sliding sunroof
removing the SmartKey from the ignition

lock. This function remains active for five
minutes or until you open a front door.
Resetting
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
opened or closed fully after resetting,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Opening and closing
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move

smoothly.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear
(Y page 93).
X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another
second.
X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be
fully opened and closed again (Y page 93).
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Sliding sunroof 95
Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Opening and closing

If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact

The sliding sunroof If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens
cannot be closed and again slightly:
you cannot see the X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
cause. switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of
resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3
switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of
resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment
feature.
Z
96
97

Correct driver's seat position ............ 98
Seats .................................................... 99
Steering wheel .................................. 106
Mirrors ............................................... 109
Memory function .............................. 112
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

98 Correct driver's seat position
Useful information X Observe the safety guidelines on seat

adjustment (Y page 99).
i This Operator's Manual describes all X Make sure that seat = is adjusted
models and all standard and optional properly.
equipment of your vehicle available at the Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 100)
time of publication of the Operator's When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
Manual. Country-specific differences are
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features as possible.
described. This also applies to safety- Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

i Read the information on qualified Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost
specialist workshops: (Y page 26). vertical position.
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported.
Correct driver's seat position Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
X Check whether the head restraint is
G WARNING adjusted properly.
You could lose control of your vehicle if you When doing so, make sure that you have
do the following while driving: adjusted the head restraint so that the back
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, of your head is supported at eye level by
steering wheel or mirrors the center of the head restraint.
Rfasten the seat belt X Observe the safety guidelines on steering
There is a risk of an accident. wheel adjustment (Y page 106).

X Make sure that steering wheel : is
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your adjusted properly.
seat belt before starting the engine. Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 106)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly.
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 55).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 56).
Seats 99
The seat belt should: adjustment buttons and become trapped.

Rfit snugly across your body There is a risk of injury.
Rbe routed across the middle of your While moving the seats, make sure that your
shoulder hands or other body parts do not get under
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip the lever assembly of the seat adjustment
joints system.
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view
G WARNING
mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a
way that you have a good view of road and When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
traffic conditions (Y page 109). occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the

seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
X Vehicles with a memory function: save
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
settings with the memory function has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
(Y page 112).
G WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and
Seats adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
protection as intended. There is an increased
Important safety notes risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
G WARNING
Always drive with the head restraints
Children could become trapped if they adjust installed. Before driving off, make sure for
the seats, particularly when unattended. every vehicle occupant that the center of the
There is a risk of injury. head restraint supports the back of the head
When leaving the vehicle, always take the at about eye level.
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
G WARNING of protection if the backrest is not in the
You could lose control of your vehicle if you upright position. When braking or in the event
do the following while driving: of an accident, you could slide underneath the
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck
steering wheel or mirrors injuries, for example. This poses an increased
Rfasten the seat belt risk of injury or even fatal injury.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the seat
is in the upright position.
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
G WARNING
According to accident statistics, children are
G WARNING
safer when properly restrained on the rear
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
we strongly recommend that children be
thereby injured. Children in particular could
placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
accidentally press the electrical seat
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
Z
100 Seats
properly secured in an appropriately sized Adjusting the seats

child restraint system or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see the
"Children in the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat

heating, observe the following information: : Head restraint height
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If ; Seat cushion angle
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as = Seat height
soon as possible. ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
A Backrest angle
switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not be used to dry i If PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the front-
the seats. passenger seat will be moved to a better
Rclean the seat covers as recommended; position if it was previously in an
see "Interior care". unfavorable position.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the i You can store the seat settings using the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the memory function (Y page 112).
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
The seats should only be occupied by i Vehicles with the through-loading
passengers, if possible. feature: if you fold down a rear seat
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
backrest, the respective front seat is
moved forwards slightly in order to avoid
not cover the seats with insulating
contact.
materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,
seat covers, child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the Adjusting the head restraints
footwell or behind the seats when resetting
the seats. There is a risk that the seats Important safety notes
and/or the objects could be damaged. G WARNING
i The head restraints in the front seats are You could lose control of your vehicle if you
installed with the NECK-PRO system do the following while driving:
(Y page 53). For this reason, it is not Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
possible to remove the head restraints steering wheel or mirrors
from the front seats.
Rfasten the seat belt
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
i Further related subjects: steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
Seats 101
G WARNING Adjusting the luxury head restraints

adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
installed. Before driving off, make sure for
every vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head

at about eye level.
General notes X To adjust the side bolsters of the head

restraint: push or pull right or left-hand
Observe the important safety guidelines for side bolster : into the desired position.
seats (Y page 99). X To adjust the angle of the head
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front restraint: push or pull the head restraint in
and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the direction of arrow ;.
the height and angle of the head restraints to
i Adjust the head restraint so that the back
the correct position.
of your head is as close to the head
restraint as possible.
Adjusting the height of the head
restraints electrically
Rear seat head restraints
G WARNING
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraints so that they are as
close as possible to your head. This will
reduce the potential for injury to the head and
neck in the event of an accident or similar
situation.
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide Whenever the rear seats are occupied, only
switch for head restraint adjustment : up drive the vehicle with the head restraints
or down in the direction of the arrow. installed and engaged. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
Z
102 Seats
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint X To remove: pull the head restraint up to
angle the stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so
that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
Adjusting the multicontour seat

The multicontour seat function is only
X Pull or push the top of the head restraint available for vehicles in Canada.
until it is in the desired position.
Removing and installing the rear seat

head restraints
G WARNING
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
: To adjust the thigh cushion
installed. Before driving off, make sure for
every vehicle occupant that the center of the ; To adjust the backrest contour in the
head restraint supports the back of the head lumbar region
at about eye level. = To adjust the backrest contour in the
upper back region
! Make sure that the rear window roller ? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat
sunblind has been retracted before the rear backrest
head restraints are removed. You could You can adjust the contour of the front seats
otherwise damage the roller sunblind. individually so as to provide optimum support
for your back and sides.
ignition lock (Y page 147).
Seats 103
Adjusting the active multicontour You can select the following levels:
seat
Level 1 (one Standard setting:
Overview indicator lamp) slightly increased
lateral support and
slow build-up of air
pressure in the side
bolsters of the seat
backrest.
Level 2 (two Sport setting:
indicator lamps) increased lateral

support and fast
build-up of pressure
in the side bolsters
of the seat backrest.
: To adjust the seat cushion length
; To switch the dynamic function on or off Massage function (PULSE)
= To adjust the side bolsters of the seat
backrest The massage function helps you to prevent
muscle tension on long journeys. You can
? To switch the massage function on or off
choose between two levels.
A To adjust the contour of the backrest to
X To switch on: press button ? once or
increase/decrease support
twice until the desired level is set.
B To adjust the height/depth of the
One or two indicator lamps in button ?
backrest contour
light up. The air cushions in the lumbar
The active multicontour seat on the driver's region vibrate for approximately
side automatically adapts the sides of the 20 minutes.
backrest to your current driving style. You can
adjust the contour of the seat individually so
as to provide optimum support for your back Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
and sides.
Dynamic function
The dynamic function adjusts the air cushions
in the side bolsters of the seat backrests to
ensure ideal lateral support at all times. You
can choose between two levels.
X To switch on: press button ; once or
twice until the desired level is set.
One or two indicator lamps in button ;
light up.
: To raise the backrest contour
X To switch off: press button ; repeatedly
; To soften the backrest contour
until all indicator lamps in button ; go out.
= To lower the backrest contour
? To harden the backrest contour
Z
104 Seats
You can adjust the contour of the front seat X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
backrests individually to provide optimum ignition lock (Y page 147).
support for your back. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
Switching the seat heating on/off
until all the indicator lamps go out.
Activating/deactivating
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
G WARNING heating may switch off.
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to

become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high
temperatures may be affected or they may
even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk
of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
Driver's and front-passenger seat

The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
Seats 105
Problems with the seat heating

The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
switched off consumers are switched on.
prematurely or cannot X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will
switch back on automatically.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons

indicate the ventilation level you have
selected.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i You can open the side windows and the
sliding sunroof using the "Convenience
opening" feature (Y page 89). The seat
ventilation of the driver's seat
automatically switches to the highest level.
Z
106 Steering wheel
Problems with the seat ventilation

The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
switched off consumers are switched on.
prematurely or cannot X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation will
switch back on automatically.
Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel

electrically
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors

steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine. : To adjust the steering wheel height
; To adjust the steering wheel position
G WARNING (fore-and-aft adjustment)
Children could injure themselves if they i Further related subjects:
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
injury.
(Y page 108)
RStoring settings (Y page 112)
Steering wheel 107
Steering wheel heating


X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the
direction of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock,
the steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch
off the ignition and open the driver's door, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
i The steering wheel heating may switch off
temporarily if:
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior is
above 86 ‡ (30 †).
Rthe temperature of the steering wheel is
above 95 ‡ (35 †).
Indicator lamp = remains on.
Z
108 Steering wheel
Problems with the steering wheel heating

If the steering wheel The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical
heating indicator lamp consumers are switched on.
is flashing, the steering X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as
wheel heating has the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
switched off Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel
automatically. heating will switch back on automatically.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is
G WARNING complete before driving off.
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
in and out of your vehicle easier.
occupants – particularly children – could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury. You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is
making adjustments, make sure that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the
steering wheel.
Position of the steering wheel when the
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rpress
The steering wheel swings upwards when
one of the memory function position
you:
buttons, or
Rmove the switch for steering wheel Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
adjustment in the opposite direction to that Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;
in which the steering wheel is moving. KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1 in the
The adjustment process is stopped. ignition lock
Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's
G WARNING door; the SmartKey must be in position 0
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT or 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 147)
feature, they can become trapped, i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
particularly when unattended. There is a risk it has not already reached the upper end
of injury. stop.
G WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
Mirrors 109
Position of the steering wheel for Mirrors

driving
Exterior mirrors
The steering wheel is moved to the last
selected position when: Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Rthe driver's door is closed G WARNING
Rwith KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/ You could lose control of your vehicle if you
Stop button once on vehicles with do the following while driving:
KEYLESS-GO
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
or steering wheel or mirrors

Rwith the SmartKey: you insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
When you close the driver's door with the
ignition switched on, the steering wheel is Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
also automatically moved to the previously steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
set position. seat belt before starting the engine.
The last position of the steering wheel is
G WARNING
stored when you switch off the ignition or
when you store the setting with the memory The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
function (Y page 112). side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
distance from road users traveling behind,
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an
triggered in an accident, the steering column accident.
will move upwards when the driver's door is For this reason, always make sure of the
opened. This occurs irrespective of the actual distance from the road users traveling
position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. behind by glancing over your shoulder.
This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and
rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY
feature is activated in the on-board computer.
(Y page 233)
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition (Y page 147).
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
mirror or button ; for the right-hand
exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
Z
110 Mirrors
The indicator lamp goes out again after Setting the exterior mirrors
some time. You can adjust the selected
If the battery has been disconnected or
mirror using adjustment button = as long
completely discharged, the exterior mirrors
as the indicator lamp is lit. must be reset. The exterior mirrors will
X Press adjustment button = up, down, or otherwise not fold in when you select the
to the left or right until you have adjusted "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the
the exterior mirror to the correct position. on-board computer (Y page 233)
You should have a good overview of traffic X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger X Briefly press button :.
field of vision.
After the engine has been started, the
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
exterior mirrors are automatically heated if
automatically
the rear window defroster is switched on and
the outside temperature is low. Heating takes If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
a maximum of 10 minutes. is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 233):
i The exterior mirrors can also be heated
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
manually by switching on the rear window
defroster. soon as you lock the vehicle from the
outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically automatically as soon as you unlock the
vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
passenger door.
i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the into the correct position manually.
ignition (Y page 147). X Vehicles with electrically folding
X Briefly press button :. exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. folding button : until you hear a click and
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are then the mirrors engage in position
(Y page 110).
always folded out fully while driving. They
The mirror housing is engaged again and
could otherwise vibrate.
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
i If you are driving faster than 30 mp/h (Y page 109).
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the
exterior mirrors.
Mirrors 111
Automatic anti-glare mirrors X Engage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror side moves to the preset parking position.
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the
glare mode if the following conditions are met
simultaneously: exterior mirror to a position that allows you
to see the rear wheel and the curb.
Rthe ignition is switched on and The parking position is stored.
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the i If you shift the transmission to another
sensor in the rear-view mirror. position, the exterior mirror on the front-
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if passenger side returns to the driving

reverse gear is engaged or if the interior position.
lighting is switched on.
Using the memory button
Parking position for the exterior

mirror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gear
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror

; Button for the front-passenger side
exterior mirror
= Adjustment button
? Memory button M
You can position the front-passenger side
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
; Button for the front-passenger side the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
exterior mirror engage reverse gear. This setting can be
= Adjustment button stored using memory button M ?.
? Memory button M X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
You can position the front-passenger side ignition lock (Y page 147).
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see X With the exterior mirror on the front-
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you passenger side activated, use adjustment
engage reverse gear. You can store this button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In
position. the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the
X Park the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to curb should be visible.
position 2 in the ignition lock
(Y page 147).
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
Z
112 Memory function
X Press memory button M ? and one of the Memory function

arrows on adjustment button = within
three seconds. Storing settings
The parking position is stored if the exterior G WARNING
mirror does not move.
If you use the memory function on the driver's
X If the exterior mirror moves out of position,
side while driving, you could lose control of
repeat the steps. the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Calling up a stored parking position Only use the memory function on the driver's
setting side when the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNING
Children could become trapped if they
activate the memory function, particularly
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
With the memory function, you can store up

to three different settings, e.g. for three
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror different people.
; Button for the front-passenger side The following settings are stored as a single
exterior mirror memory preset:
= Adjustment button Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
? Memory button M restraint
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the Ractive multicontour seat: seat contour,
ignition lock (Y page 147). dynamic function level

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- Rdriver's side: position of the exterior
passenger side using button ;. mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger

X Engage reverse gear.
sides
side moves to the stored parking position.
side moves back to its original position:
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
Rif you press button : for the exterior
mirror on the driver's side
Memory function 113
X Adjust the seat (Y page 100).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 106) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 109).
X Press memory button M and one of the
storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected
preset position. A tone sounds when the
settings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting
XPress and hold the relevant storage
position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat,
steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in
the stored position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
button.
Z
114
115
Useful information ............................ 116

Exterior lighting ................................ 116
Interior lighting ................................. 123
Replacing bulbs ................................. 124
Windshield wipers ............................ 125
Lights and windshield wipers

116 Exterior lighting
Useful information Asymmetrical low beam

Have the headlamps converted back to
i This Operator's Manual describes all asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a
models and all standard and optional qualified specialist workshop as soon as
equipment of your vehicle available at the possible after crossing the border again.
time of publication of the Operator's
possible. Please note that your vehicle may Setting the exterior lighting
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety- Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using:
i Read the information on qualified Rthe light switch
specialist workshops: (Y page 26).
Rthe combination switch (Y page 119)

Rthe on-board computer (Y page 230)
Exterior lighting
Light switch
General notes
Operation
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you drive with the lights
switched on even during the daytime.
Therefore, your vehicle is equipped with
special daytime running lamps. In some
countries, operation of the headlamps varies
due to legal requirements and self-imposed
obligations.
If you wish to drive during the daytime without
lights, switch off the daytime running lamps
function in the on-board computer
(Y page 230). 1W Left-hand standing lamps
2X Right-hand standing lamps
Driving abroad 3T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
Symmetrical low-beam headlamps 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low controlled by the light sensor
beam in countries in which traffic drives on 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
the opposite side of the road from the country If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
where the vehicle is registered. This prevents vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
glare to oncoming traffic. When using
symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not X Turn the light switch to Ã.
lit as widely and as far ahead as normal.
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
specialist workshop as close to the border as
possible before driving in these countries.
Exterior lighting 117
The exterior lighting (except the parking/ Ã is the favored light switch setting. The
standing lamps) switches off automatically if light setting is automatically selected
you: according to the brightness of the ambient
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock light (exception: poor visibility due to weather
Ropen
conditions such as fog, snow or spray):
the driver's door with the SmartKey
in position 0. RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on or off
Automatic headlamp mode automatically depending on the brightness
G WARNING of the ambient light.
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- RWith the engine running: if you have
beam headlamps may not be switched on activated the daytime running lamps
automatically if there is fog, snow or other function via the on-board computer, the
causes of poor visibility due to the weather daytime running lamps or the low-beam

conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an headlamps and parking lamps are switched
accident. on or off automatically depending on the
In such situations, turn the light switch to brightness of the ambient light.
L. X To switch on automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an Only for Canada:
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
The daytime running lamps improve the
lighting at all times.
visibility of your vehicle during the day. The
daytime running lamps function is required by
law in Canada. It cannot therefore be
deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from
a drive position to P, the daytime running
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after
three minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is
stationary and in high ambient light: if you
1W Left-hand standing lamps turn the light switch to T, the daytime
2X Right-hand standing lamps running lamps and parking lamps switch on.
3T Parking lamps, license plate and If the engine is running and you turn the light
instrument cluster lighting switch to L, the manual settings take
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
controlled by the light sensor USA only:
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps The daytime running lamps improve the
visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do
this, the daytime running lamps function must
be switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 230).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to T or L, the manual settings
Z
take precedence over the daytime running Parking lamps

lamps. ! If the battery has been excessively
Low-beam headlamps discharged, the parking lamps or standing
lamps are automatically switched off to
G WARNING enable the next engine start. Always park
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
beam headlamps may not be switched on according to legal standards. Avoid the
automatically if there is fog, snow or other continuous use of the T parking lamps
causes of poor visibility due to the weather for several hours. If possible, switch on the
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an X right or the W left standing lamp.
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
1W Left-hand standing lamps

3T Parking lamps, license plate and
1W Left-hand standing lamps instrument cluster lighting
2X Right-hand standing lamps 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
instrument cluster lighting 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, X To switch on: turn the light switch to
controlled by the light sensor T.
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps The green T indicator lamp in the
Even if the light sensor does not detect that
it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam
headlamps switch on when the ignition is
switched on and the light switch is set to the
L position. This is a particularly useful
function in the event of rain and fog.
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the
Standing lamps = High-beam flasher

? Turn signal, left
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.
1W Left-hand standing lamps

High-beam headlamps

instrument cluster lighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is
illuminated.
X To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is : High-beam headlamps
in position 0. ; Turn signal, right
X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
= High-beam flasher
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
? Turn signal, left
the vehicle).
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
Combination switch position 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
Turn signal
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
In the Ã position, the high-beam
headlamps are only switched on when it is
dark and the engine is running.
: High-beam headlamps
; Turn signal, right
Z
The blue K indicator lamp in the Hazard warning lamps

instrument cluster lights up when the high-
beam headlamps are switched on.
X To switch off the high-beam
headlamps: move the combination switch
back to its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,
it controls activation of the high-beam
headlamps (Y page 121).
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
High-beam flasher press button :.

All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
a turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the
corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning
lamps: press button :.
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
Ran air bag is deployed
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
: High-beam headlamps speed of more than 45 mph (70 km/h) and
; Turn signal, right comes to a standstill
= High-beam flasher The hazard warning lamps switch off
? Turn signal, left
automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed
of over 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full
X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the brake application.
ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
engine.
the ignition is switched off.
X Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.
Headlamp cleaning system
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if
the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is
operated five times (Y page 125) while the
lights are on and the engine is running. When
you switch off the ignition, the automatic
headlamp cleaning system is reset and
counting is resumed from 0.
Cornering light function The active light function is a system that

moves the headlamps according to the
steering movements of the front wheels. In
this way, relevant areas remain illuminated
while driving. This allows you to identify
pedestrians, cyclists and animals.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist

The cornering light function improves the G WARNING

illumination of the road over a wide angle in Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
the direction you are turning, enabling better road users:
visibility in tight bends, for example. It can Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
only be activated when the low-beam
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
headlamps are switched on.
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
Active:
Rif
In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
may fail too recognize other road users that
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
have lights, or may recognize them too late.
turn the steering wheel
In this or similar situations, the automatic
Rif you are driving at speeds between
high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated
25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) or activated regardless. There is a risk of an
and turn the steering wheel accident.
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
signal or turn the steering wheel to the good time.
straight-ahead position.
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after
no more than three minutes.
Active light function
Z
You can use this function to set the The headlamp range is set automatically
headlamps to change between low beam and depending on the distance between the
high beam automatically. The system vehicle and other road users.
recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either If you are driving at speeds above
approaching from the opposite direction or approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no
traveling in front of your vehicle, and other road users have been detected:
consequently switches the headlamps from The high-beam headlamps are switched on
high beam to low beam. automatically. The K indicator lamp in
The system automatically adapts the low- the instrument cluster also lights up.
beam headlamp range depending on the If you are driving at speeds below
distance to the other vehicle. Once the approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or other
system no longer detects any other vehicles, road users have been detected or the roads
it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. are adequately lit:
The system's optical sensor is located behind The high-beam headlamps are switched off
the windshield near the overhead control automatically. The K indicator lamp in
panel.
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
indicator lamp in the multifunction display
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist remains lit.
on/off
X To switch off: move the combination
switch back to its normal position or move
the light switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Headlamps fogged up on the inside

The headlamps may fog up on the inside if
there is high atmospheric humidity.
X Switch on the light and drive off.
: High-beam headlamps
The level of moisture diminishes,
; Turn signal, right depending on the length of the journey and
= High-beam flasher the weather conditions (humidity and
? Turn signal, left temperature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
X To switch on: turn the light switch to
Ã. X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
X Press the combination switch beyond the specialist workshop.
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the
multifunction display lights up if it is dark
and the light sensor activates the low-beam
headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above
approximately 28 mph (45 km/h):
Interior lighting 123
Interior lighting Interior lighting control

Overview of interior lighting General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The color and brightness of the ambient
lighting may be set using the on-board
Automatic interior lighting control

Front overhead control panel
: u To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off
; | To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
= p To switch the right-hand front
reading lamp on/off
? c To switch the front interior lighting
on/off
A p To switch the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off Front overhead control panel
on/off
; | To switch the automatic interior
lighting control on/off
= p To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
on/off
A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
Rear-compartment overhead control panel X To activate/deactivate: press the |
: p To switch the right-hand reading button.
lamp on/off When the automatic interior lighting
; p To switch the left-hand reading lamp control is activated, the button is flush with
on/off the overhead control panel.
Z
124 Replacing bulbs
The interior lighting automatically switches Crash-responsive emergency lighting

on if you:
The interior lighting is activated automatically
Runlock the vehicle if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Ropen a door
X To switch off the crash-responsive
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
emergency lighting: press the hazard
The interior light is activated for a short while warning lamp button.
when the SmartKey is removed from the or
ignition lock. You can activate this delayed X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
switch-off using the on-board computer
SmartKey.
(Y page 232).
Manual interior lighting control

Replacing bulbs

Xenon bulbs
G DANGER
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get
an electric shock if you remove the cover of
the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical
contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Never touch the parts or the electrical
Front overhead control panel contacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work
on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified
on/off.
; | To switch the automatic interior Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
lighting control on/off vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
= p To switch the right-hand reading that these function correctly at all times.
lamp on/off Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
on/off LED lamps
A p To switch the left-hand reading lamp You can neither replace Xenon bulbs nor LED
on/off bulbs. Have LED bulbs changed at a qualified
X To switch the front interior lighting on/ specialist workshop.
off: press the c button. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/ vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
off: press the u button. that these function correctly at all times.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off:
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
press the p button.
Other bulbs
G WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
Windshield wipers 125
could burn yourself on these components. Changing the rear bulbs

Backup light
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
There are bulbs other than Xenon and LED

bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only
the bulbs listed (Y page 125). Have the bulbs
that you cannot replace yourself changed at
If you require assistance changing bulbs,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with

your bare hands. Even minor contamination
Lamp unit
can burn into the glass surface and reduce
the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint- X Switch off the lights.
free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb X Open the trunk.
when installing. X Reach up into the side paneling and pull
Only use bulbs of the correct type. downwards until the lamp cluster is easily
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult accessible.
a qualified specialist workshop. X Press the detent of connector ; and pull
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of out connector ;.
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure X Use a suitable tool to loosen and remove
that these function correctly at all times. four nuts :.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. X Remove the entire lamp cluster.
X Turn bulb holder = counter-clockwise and
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types pull it out.

X Pull out bulb.
You can change the following bulbs. The bulb
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder =.
type can be found in the legend.
X Insert bulb holder = into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
X Re-insert the lamp cluster.
X Tighten four nuts :.
X Push in connector ; until it engages.
X Insert the side paneling.
Windshield wipers
Tail lamp
Switching the windshield wipers on/
: Backup lamp: W 16 W
off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
Z
126 Windshield wipers
that has collected on the windshield can X Switch on the ignition.

scratch the glass if wiping takes place when X Turn the combination switch to the
the windshield is dry. corresponding position.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate
wipers in dry weather conditions, always wiping frequency is set automatically
use washer fluid when operating the according to the intensity of the rain. In
windshield wipers. the Å position, the rain sensor is more
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on sensitive than in the Ä position, causing
the windshield after the vehicle has been the windshield wipers to wipe more
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or frequently.
other residues may be the reason for this. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
Clean the windshield using washer fluid will no longer be wiped properly. This could
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
prevent you from observing the traffic

car wash. conditions. Replace the wiper blades twice a
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due year, ideally in spring and fall.
to optical influences and the windshield
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windshield wipers may be activated Replacing the wiper blades
inadvertently. This could then damage the Important safety notes
windshield wiper blades or scratch the
windshield. G WARNING
For this reason, you should always switch If the windshield wipers begin to move while
off the windshield wipers in dry weather. you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk
of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,

make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
arm has been folded away from the
windshield.
Combination switch
1 $ Windshield wiper off Never fold a windshield wiper arm without
a wiper blade back onto the windshield.
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
set to low sensitivity)
you change the wiper blade. If you release
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
the windshield wiper arm without a wiper
set to high sensitivity) blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow windshield may be damaged by the force of
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast the impact.
B í Single wipe/î To wipe the Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
windshield using washer fluid the wiper blades changed at a qualified
Windshield wipers 127
Depending on the equipment level of your Changing the wiper blades (version 2)
vehicle, there are two variants of wiper blade;
these are installed and removed in different Removing the wiper blades
ways. Based on the diagrams, check which X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
system is installed in your vehicle. lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).
X Fold the wiper arm away from the
Changing the wiper blades (version 1) windshield until it engages.
Removing the wiper blades
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).
X Fold the wiper arm away from the
windshield until it engages.

X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the
wiper arm.
X Firmly press release knob : and pull the

wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in
the direction of the arrow.
Installing the wiper blades

X Position the new wiper blade in the retainer
on the wiper arm and slide it into place in
the opposite direction from the arrow.
X Remove the wiper blade from the retaining The wiper blade audibly engages.
pin on the wiper arm in the direction of the X Make sure that wiper blade is seated
arrow. correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the
Installing the wiper blades windshield.
X Push the new wiper blade onto the
retaining pin on the wiper arm in the
opposite direction to the arrow.
Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully
onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm.
X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper
arm.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the
windshield.
Z
128 Windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
129

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 130
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 135
Setting the air vents ......................... 142
Climate control
130 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information i The integrated filter filters out most

particles of dust and soot and completely
i This Operator's Manual describes all filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous
models and all standard and optional pollutants and odors. A clogged filter
equipment of your vehicle available at the reduces the amount of air supplied to the
time of publication of the Operator's vehicle interior. For this reason, you should
Manual. Country-specific differences are always observe the interval for replacing
possible. Please note that your vehicle may the filter, which is specified in the
not be equipped with all features Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on
described. This also applies to safety- environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air
related systems and functions. pollution, the interval may be shorter than
stated in the Maintenance Booklet.
i Read the information on qualified
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems

Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could
otherwise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air
dehumidification function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when
the engine is running. Optimum operation is
only achieved with the side windows and roof
closed.
The residual heat function can only be
activated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 141).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the
convenience opening feature (Y page 89).
This will speed up the cooling process and
the desired vehicle interior temperature
will be reached more quickly.
Overview of climate control systems 131
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
Canada only
: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 138)
; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 139)
= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 139)
? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 136)
A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 140)
B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 138)
C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 141)
D Sets the air distribution (Y page 138)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 139)
F Reduces the airflow (Y page 139)
G Switches climate control on/off (Y page 135)
H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 137)
132
Climate control Overview of climate control systems
USA only
= Switches maximum cooling on/off (Y page 139)
C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 141)
D Sets the air distribution (Y page 138)
E Increases the airflow (Y page 139)
F Reduces the airflow (Y page 139)
G Switches climate control on/off (Y page 135)
H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 137)
Information about using dual-zone ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting"

automatic climate control function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
Automatic climate control ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
The following contains notes and if there are unpleasant outside odors or
recommendations on optimum use of dual- when in a tunnel. The windows could
zone automatic climate control. otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
RActivate climate control using the Ã and into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above
the Ã and ¿ buttons light up. temperature settings on the driver's side
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
for the front-passenger side as well. The
Overview of climate control systems 133
indicator lamp above the á button goes

out.
RVehicles with COMAND Multimedia-
System: if you change the settings of the
climate control system, the climate status
display appears for approximately three
seconds at the bottom of the screen in the
COMAND display. See also the separate
COMAND operating instructions. You will
see the current settings of the various
climate control functions.
ECO start/stop function

During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO
start/stop function only operates at a
Climate control
reduced capacity. If you require the full
climate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 152).
134 Overview of climate control systems
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
= Switches the residual heat function on/off (Y page 141)
C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 139)
D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 135)
E Sets the air distribution (Y page 138)
F Increases the airflow (Y page 139)
G Reduces the airflow (Y page 139)
H Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 137)
I Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 141)
J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 137)
Rear control panel

K Increases the airflow (Y page 139)
L Reduces the airflow (Y page 139)
M Display
N Reduces the temperature (Y page 138)
O Increases the temperature (Y page 138)
Operating the climate control systems 135
Information about using 3-zone ECO start/stop function

automatic climate control During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO
Automatic climate control start/stop function only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full
The 3-zone automatic climate control is only climate control output, you can switch off the
available on vehicles for Canada. ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
The following contains instructions and button (Y page 152).
recommendations to enable you to get the
most out of your automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the Ã and Operating the climate control
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above systems
the Ã and ¿ buttons light up. Switching climate control on/off
RIn automatic mode, you can also use the
ñ button to set a climate mode Points to observe before use
(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The When the climate control is switched off, the
Climate control
MEDIUM level is recommended. air supply and air circulation are also
RSet the temperature to f 72 ‡ (22 †). switched off. The windows could fog up.
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" Therefore, switch off climate control only
function briefly until the windshield is clear briefly
again. i Activate climate control primarily using
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. the Ã button (Y page 137).
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could Activating/deactivating
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the ignition lock (Y page 147).
temperature settings on the driver's side X To switch on: press the Ã button on
for the front-passenger side and the rear the control panel for the climate control.
compartment as well. The indicator lamp The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
above the á button goes out. up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
RUse the residual heat function if you want automatic mode.
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior or
when the ignition is switched off. The X Press the ^ button.
residual heat function can only be activated The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
or deactivated with the ignition switched out. The previously selected settings are
off. restored.
RVehicles with COMAND Multimedia- X To switch off: press the ^ button.
System: if you change the settings of the The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
climate control system, the climate status up.
display appears for approximately three
seconds at the bottom of the screen in the
COMAND display. See also the separate
COMAND operating instructions. You will
see the current settings of the various
climate control functions.
136 Operating the climate control systems
Activating/deactivating cooling with

air dehumidification
Points to observe before use
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function, the air inside the
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
deactivate the cooling with air-
dehumidification function only briefly.
The cooling with air dehumidification function
is only available when the engine is running.
The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to the temperature
Climate control
selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a
malfunction.
XTo activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
up.
i When the "Cooling with air
dehumidification" function is activated,
one of the indicator lamps on the auxiliary
heating button will light up on vehicles with
auxiliary heating.
X To deactivate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes
out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function has a delayed switch-off feature.
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
the ¿ button malfunction.
flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
remains off. The
"Cooling with air
dehumidification"
function cannot be
switched on.
Setting climate control to automatic X To switch to manual mode: press the

_ button.
Climate control
Points to observe before use or
In automatic mode, the set temperature is X Press the I or K button.
maintained automatically at a constant level. The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes
The system automatically regulates the out.
temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow
and the air distribution.
The automatic mode functions optimally Adjusting the climate mode settings
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function is activated. If necessary, cooling The "Set climate mode" function is only
with air dehumidification can be deactivated. available with 3-zone automatic climate
control.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function, the air inside the You can select the following climate mode
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the settings in automatic mode:
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, cooler
deactivate the cooling with air- MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
dehumidification function only briefly. DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
warmer and with less draft
Activating/switching
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147).
ignition lock (Y page 147). X Press the Ã button.
X Set the desired temperature.
X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the
X To activate: press the Ã button.
desired climate mode appears in the
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights display.
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are activated.
i 3-zone automatic climate control: when
automatic mode is activated, you can
select a climate mode (Y page 137).
Setting the temperature Only change the temperature setting in

small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
Dual-zone automatic climate control The temperature setting for the driver's
Different temperatures can be set for the side is adopted for the rear compartment
driver's and front-passenger sides. and the front-passenger side.
X To increase/reduce the temperature in
the rear compartment using the rear
control panel: press the r or s
X To increase/reduce: turn temperature
button on the rear control panel.
control : or B clockwise or counter-
Only change the temperature setting in
clockwise (Y page 131). small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
Setting the air distribution
3-zone automatic climate control
Air distribution settings
Climate control
P Directs air through the center and side

air vents
O Directs air through the footwell air
vents
S Directs air through the center, side and
footwell vents
¯ Directs air through the defroster vents
b Directs the airflow through the
defroster, center and side air vents
Automatic climate control zones (Canada only)
You can select different temperature settings a Directs air through the defroster and
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as footwell vents
well as for the rear compartment. _ Directs the airflow through the
defroster, center and side air vents, as
well as the footwell air vents (Canada
only)
the front compartment: turn temperature i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
control : or B clockwise or counter- airflow is always directed through the side
clockwise (Y page 134). air vents. The side air vents can only be
Only change the temperature setting in closed when the controls on the side air
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). vents are turned downwards.
the rear compartment using the front Setting the air distribution
control panel: press the á button. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
The indicator lamp in the á button goes ignition lock (Y page 147).
out. X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
X Turn temperature control : clockwise or desired symbol appears in the display.
counter-clockwise (Y page 134).
Setting the airflow Switch off the "Windshield defrosting"

function as soon as the windshield is clear
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the again.
X To increase: press the K button.
X To reduce: press the I button.
X To activate: press the ¬ button.
i You can use 3-zone automatic climate The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
control to set the airflow in the rear up.
compartment separately. The climate control system switches to the
If the battery is not sufficiently charged, following functions:
blower output may be reduced. As soon as Rhigh airflow
the battery is sufficiently charged, full blower Rhigh temperature
output will be available. Rair distribution to the windshield and
front side windows
Climate control
Rair-recirculation mode off
Switching the ZONE function on/off
If the battery is not sufficiently charged,
X To activate: press the á button. blower output may be reduced. Once the
The indicator lamp above the á button battery is sufficiently charged again, full
lights up. blower output will be available again.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
temperature setting for the driver's side is
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
not adopted for the front-passenger side.
out. The previously selected settings are
3-zone automatic climate control: the restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
temperature setting for the driver's side is deactivated.
not adopted for the front-passenger side
or
and the rear compartment.
X Press the Ã button.
X To deactivate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
The indicator lamp above the á button
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
goes out.
automatic mode.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the
or
temperature setting for the driver's side is
X Dual-zone automatic climate control: turn
adopted for the front-passenger side.
temperature controls : or B clockwise
3-zone automatic climate control: the
temperature setting for the driver's side is or counter-clockwise (Y page 131).
adopted for the front-passenger side and 3-zone automatic climate control: turn
the rear compartment. temperature controls : or B clockwise
or counter-clockwise (Y page 134).
or
Defrosting the windshield X Press the K or I button.
You can use this function to defrost the

windshield or to defrost the inside of the
windshield and the side windows. MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in
vehicles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the the rear window defroster switches off
engine is running. automatically after several minutes.
X To activate: press the Ù button. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
The indicator lamp in the button lights up. window defroster may switch off.
X To activate: press off-road button Ù X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
again. ignition lock (Y page 147).
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously X Press the ¤ button.
selected settings are restored. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
When you activate MAX COOL, climate up or goes out.
control switches to the following functions:
Rmaximum cooling
Rmaximum airflow
Rair-recirculation mode on
Climate control
Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside
X Activate the ¿ cooling with air
dehumidification function.
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X Adjust the side air vents so that the warmed
air is directed to the side windows.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the "windshield defrosting" function
(Y page 139).
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside

X Press the _ button repeatedly until the
P or O symbol appears in the
display.
X Adjust the side air vents so that no air is
directed to the side windows.
Rear window defroster

The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
Problems with the rear window defroster

The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
defroster has X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
deactivated lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
prematurely or cannot When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
be activated. defroster can be activated again.
Activating/deactivating air- g button does not light up. Outside air

recirculation mode is added after about 30 minutes.
Points to observe before use

XTo deactivate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button goes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
Climate control
out.
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle i Air-recirculation mode deactivates
from outside. The air already inside the automatically:
vehicle will then be recirculated.
Rafter approximately five minutes at
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows can fog up more quickly, in outside temperatures below
particular at low temperatures. Only use air- approximately 41 ‡ (5 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if
recirculation mode briefly to prevent the
windows from fogging up. cooling with air dehumidification is
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the deactivated
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at
same for all control panels.
outside temperatures above
Activating/deactivating approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling
with air dehumidification" function is
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the activated
X To activate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button lights Activating/deactivating the residual
up. heat function
i Dual-zone automatic climate control: air- The residual heat function is only available in
recirculation mode is automatically vehicles for Canada with 3-zone automatic
activated at high outside temperatures. climate control.
3-zone automatic climate control: air- It is possible to make use of the residual heat
recirculation mode is automatically of the engine to continue heating the vehicle
activated at high levels of pollution or at for approximately 30 minutes after the engine
high outside temperatures. has been switched off. The heating time
When air-recirculation mode is activated depends on the temperature that has been
automatically, the indicator lamp above the set.
142 Setting the air vents
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the Setting the center air vents
ignition lock or remove it (Y page 147).
X To activate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up.
i If the residual heat function is activated,
the windows may fog up on the inside.
i The blower will run at a low speed
regardless of the airflow setting.
i If you activate the residual heat function
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
will be activated. The blower runs at : Center air vent, left
medium speed. ; Center air vent, right
X To deactivate: press the Ì button. = Center vent thumbwheel, right
Climate control
The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes ? Center vent thumbwheel, left
out. X To open/close: turn thumbwheels =
Residual heat is deactivated automatically: and ? up or down.
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops Setting the side air vents
Setting the air vents

G WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always : Defroster vent
maintain a sufficient distance to the air
; Side air vent
outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior. = Control for side air vent
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air down.
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield Setting the glove box air vent
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,
snow or leaves. ! Close the air vent when heating the
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles vehicle.
in the vehicle interior. At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air
Setting the air vents 143
dehumidification" function. Otherwise, = Rear control panel, only for Canada with
temperature-sensitive items stored in the 3-zone automatic climate control
glove box could be damaged. ? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.
: Air vent thumbwheel

; Air vent
Climate control
When automatic climate control is activated,
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents. The level of airflow
depends on the airflow and air distribution
settings.
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :
clockwise or counter-clockwise.
Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
Setting the center vents in the rear
compartment
: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel

; Rear-compartment air vent, right
Z
144
145

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 146
Driving ............................................... 146
Automatic transmission ................... 155
Driving and parking

Refueling ............................................ 164
Parking ............................................... 167
Driving tips ........................................ 169
Driving systems ................................ 175
146 Driving
Useful information After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and accelerate
i This Operator's Manual describes all the vehicle to full speed.
models and all standard and optional Additional breaking-in notes for AMG
equipment of your vehicle available at the vehicles:
Driving and parking
time of publication of the Operator's RDo not drive faster than 85 mph
Manual. Country-specific differences are (140 km/h) for the first 1000 miles
possible. Please note that your vehicle may (1500 km).
not be equipped with all features ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum
described. This also applies to safety-
engine speed of 4500 rpm briefly.
RChange gear in good time.
specialist workshops: (Y page 26). i You should also observe these notes on
breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle i Always observe the respective speed
limits.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after AMG vehicles with self-locking rear
several hundred kilometers of driving. axle differential
Compensate for this by applying greater force
Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking
to the brake pedal.
differential on the rear axle. To protect the
differential on the rear axle, carry out an oil
change after a breaking-in phase of
The first 1000miles (1500 km)
2000 miles (3000 km). This oil change
The more you look after the engine when it is prolongs the service life of the differential.
new, the more satisfied you will be with its Have the oil change carried out at a qualified
performance in the future. specialist workshop.
RYou should therefore drive at varying
vehicle and engine speeds for the first
1000 miles (1500 km). Driving
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full Important safety notes
throttle, during this period.
RChange gear in good time, before the G WARNING
tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
red area of the tachometer. pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
brake the vehicle.
RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
pedal past the point of resistance
(kickdown).
securely and as specified in order to ensure
ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain. loose floormats.
Driving 147
G WARNING operation, avoid driving at full throttle when

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage the engine is cold.
of the pedals, e.g.:
Rshoes with thick soles Key positions
Driving and parking

Rshoes with high heels
Rslippers
SmartKey
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk g To remove the SmartKey
of an accident.
(shift the transmission to position P)
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. 1 Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windshield wipers
G WARNING
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
If the parking brake has not been fully and drive position
released when driving, the parking brake can:
3 To start the engine
Roverheat and cause a fire
Rlose
i The SmartKey can be turned in the
its hold function.
ignition lock even if it is not the correct
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not
the parking brake fully before driving off. switched on. The engine cannot be started.
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
the engine's full performance until it has KEYLESS-GO
reached operating temperature. General notes
Only shift the automatic transmission to RDo not store the KEYLESS-GO key together
the desired drive position when the vehicle with:
is stationary.
- electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive or another SmartKey
wheels when pulling away on slippery
- metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal film
roads. You could otherwise damage the
RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in metal
drive train.
objects, e.g. metal cases.
! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil
This can affect the functionality of
temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the KEYLESS-GO.
maximum engine speed is restricted in
order to protect the engine. To protect the Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
engine and maintain smooth engine keys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-GO
function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
Z
148 Driving
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the lock ;.
vehicle. i When you insert Start/Stop button :
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times into ignition lock ;, the system needs
in succession corresponds to the different approximately two seconds recognition
Driving and parking
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only time. You can then use Start/Stop
the case if you are not depressing the brake button :.
pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the Activating power supply
Start/Stop button, the engine starts X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not
immediately. yet been pressed, this corresponds to the
The Start/Stop button can be removed from SmartKey being removed from the ignition.
the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :.
SmartKey into the ignition lock. The power supply is switched on. You can
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop now activate the windshield wipers, for
button from the ignition lock when you example.
leave the vehicle. You should, however, i If you then open the driver's door when in
always take the SmartKey with you when this position, the power supply is
leaving the vehicle. As long as the deactivated.
SmartKey is in the vehicle: Switching on the ignition
Rthe vehicle can be started using the
XPosition 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop
Start/Stop button and button : twice.
Relectrically powered equipment can be
The ignition is switched on.
operated. i The ignition is switched off when:
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO Rthe driver's door is opened and
Ryou press Start/Stop button : once
when in this position.
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the

indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after Start/Stop button
starting the engine or lights up while driving, = USA only
see (Y page 266).
? Canada only
Driving 149
Starting the engine General notes
Important safety notes i The catalytic converter is preheated for

up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The
G WARNING sound of the engine may change during this
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, time.
Driving and parking

they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other Automatic transmission
people or road users. X Shift the transmission to position P.
Rget out and disrupt traffic. The transmission position display in the
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. multifunction display shows P.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in i You can also start the engine when the
motion if, for example, they: transmission is in position N.
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of Starting procedure with the SmartKey
parking position P. i To start the engine using the SmartKey
Rstarting the engine.
instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/
There is a risk of an accident and injury. Stop button out of the ignition lock.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never ignition lock (Y page 147) and release it as
leave children or animals unattended in the soon as the engine is running.
reach of children.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
G WARNING i The Start/Stop button can be used to
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust start the vehicle manually without inserting
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in
the engine running in enclosed spaces the vehicle. This mode for starting the
without sufficient ventilation. engine operates independently of the ECO
start/stop automatic engine start function.
G WARNING X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
Flammable materials introduced through depressed.
environmental influence or by animals can X Press the Start/Stop button once
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or (Y page 147).
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk The engine starts.
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal

when starting the engine.
Z
150 Driving
Pulling away Hill start assist
Automatic transmission G WARNING

After a short time, hill start assist will no
G WARNING longer brake your vehicle and it could roll
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
Driving and parking
away. There is a risk of an accident and injury.

and you engage transmission position D or Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
is a risk of an accident. leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
When engaging transmission position D or R, assist.
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate. Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.
! If a warning tone sounds and the It holds the vehicle for a short time after you
Release Park. Brake message appears have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
in the multifunction display, the parking This gives you enough time to move your foot
brake is still applied. Release the parking from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
brake. and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it roll.
depressed. X Take your foot off the brake pedal.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R. The vehicle is then held for about a second.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 169). X Pull away.
X Release the brake pedal. Hill start assist will not function if:
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on
a downhill gradient.
i It is only possible to shift the transmission
Rthe transmission is in position N.
from position P to the desired position if
you depress the brake pedal. Only then is Rthe parking brake is applied.
the parking lock released. If you do not RESP® is malfunctioning.

depress the brake pedal, you can move the
DIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lock
remains engaged. ECO start/stop function
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have Introduction
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down. The ECO start/stop function switches the
You can open the doors from the inside at engine off automatically if the vehicle is
any time. stopped under certain conditions.
You can also deactivate the automatic The engine starts automatically when the
locking feature (Y page 232). driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
start/stop function thereby helps you to
i Upshifts take place at higher engine reduce the fuel consumption and emissions
speeds after a cold start. This helps the of your vehicle.
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature more quickly.
Driving 151
Important safety notes Automatic engine switch-off

G WARNING General notes
If the engine is switched off automatically and If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted N, the ECO start/stop function switches off
Driving and parking

automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. the engine automatically.
There is a risk of accident and injury. The ECO start/stop function is operational
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in
the ignition and secure the vehicle against the multifunction display, if:
rolling away.
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green.
General notes Rthe outside temperature is within the
comfort range.
Rthe engine is at normal operating
temperature.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
: ECO start/stop display Rthe system detects that the windshield is

not fogged up when the air-conditioning
If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the system is switched on.
multifunction display, the ECO start/stop Rthe hood is closed.
function switches the engine off
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
automatically if the vehicle stops moving.
seat belt is fastened.
Every time you switch on the engine using the
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO If conditions for automatic engine switch-off
start/stop function is activated. have not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol will
be shown in yellow.
If the ECO start/stop function has been
manually deactivated (Y page 152) or a AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the
malfunction has caused the system to be multifunction display also shows the Stop/
deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not Start inactive message.
displayed. i If you shift the transmission from R to D,
AMG vehicles: the Stop/Start active or the ECO start/stop function is available
Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG again once the ¤ symbol reappears in
menu in the multifunction display goes out. green in the multifunction display.
AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function i All of the vehicle's systems remain active
is only available in drive program C. when the engine has been stopped
For further information on automatic engine automatically.
switch-off (Y page 151) and automatic
engine start (Y page 152). i All vehicles (apart from AMG
vehicles): automatic engine switch-off can
take place a maximum of four times
consecutively (initial stop then repeated
three times). The ¤ symbol is shown in
yellow in the multifunction display after the
engine has been started automatically for
Z
152 Driving
the fourth time. When the ¤ symbol is again once the ¤ symbol reappears in
shown in green in the multifunction display, green in the multifunction display.
automatic engine switch-off is again
possible. Deactivating/activating the ECO start/
i AMG vehicles: times which the engine stop function
Driving and parking
can be automatically switched off.

i The HOLD function can also be activated
if the engine has been switched off
automatically. It is then not necessary to
continue applying the brakes during the
automatic stop phase. When you depress
the accelerator pedal, the engine starts
automatically and the braking effect of the
HOLD function is deactivated.
Automatic engine start ECO button

The engine starts automatically if: X To switch off (except AMG vehicles):
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function press button :.
by pressing the ECO button. Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in
Ryou release the brakes when in the multifunction display go out.
transmission position D or N and when the X To switch on (except AMG vehicles):
HOLD function is not active. press button :.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If all conditions
Ryou engage reverse gear R. for automatic engine switch-off
Ryou move the transmission out of position
(Y page 151) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol
is shown in green in the multifunction
P.
display.
Ryou switch to drive program S, S+ or M
If not all conditions for automatic engine
(AMG vehicles).
switch-off (Y page 151) are fulfilled, the
Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the
¤ symbol is shown in yellow in the
driver's door. multifunction display. If this is the case, the
Rthe vehicle starts to roll. ECO start/stop function is not available.
Rthe brake system requires this.
X To switch off (AMG vehicles): press
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior
button : in drive program C.
deviates from the set range.
or
Rthe system detects moisture on the
X Switch to drive program S, S+ or M
windshield when the air-conditioning
(Y page 159).
system is switched on.
Indicator lamp ; and the ¤ symbol in
Rthe charge level of the battery is too low.
the multifunction display go out.
i Shifting the transmission to position P The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start
does not start the engine. inactive message in the AMG menu in the
i If you shift the transmission from R to D, multifunction display goes out.
the ECO start/stop function is available
Driving 153
X To switch on (AMG vehicles): press

button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive
program S, S+ or M is active, the automatic
transmission switches to drive program C.
Driving and parking

If all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 151) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in green in the
multifunction display. In addition, the
Stop/Start active message is shown in
the AMG menu in the multifunction display.
If conditions for automatic engine switch-
off (Y page 151) have not been fulfilled, the
¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. If this
is the case, the ECO start/stop function is
not available. In addition, the Stop/Start
inactive message is shown in the AMG
menu in the multifunction display.
i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
stop function has been deactivated
manually or as the result of a malfunction.
The engine will then not be switched off
automatically when the vehicle stops.
Z
154 Driving
Problems with the engine

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
Driving and parking
can be heard. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKey
in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button
repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 149). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
start. You cannot hear or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 326).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:

The engine is not There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical

running smoothly and component of the engine management system.
is misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter and damage it.
The coolant The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
temperature gauge is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
shows a value above X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
248 ‡ (120 †). to cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 308). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Automatic transmission 155
Automatic transmission Transmission position and drive

program display
! If the transmission position display in the
G WARNING multifunction display is not working, you
If the engine speed is above the idling speed should pull away carefully to check whether
Driving and parking

and you engage transmission position D or the desired transmission position is
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There engaged. Ideally, you should select
is a risk of an accident. transmission position D and drive program
When engaging transmission position D or R, C. Do not restrict the shift range.
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident. : Transmission position display
After switching off the engine, always switch ; Drive program display
to parking position P. Prevent the parked The current position of the selector lever is
vehicle from rolling away by applying the shown by the indicators next to the selector
parking brake. lever.
The indicators light up when the SmartKey is
inserted into the ignition lock. The indicators
Selector lever go out when the SmartKey is removed from
Overview of transmission positions the ignition lock.
DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions
Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button

j Park position with parking lock
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
k Reverse gear
i Neutral
h Drive
Z
156 Automatic transmission
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the

steering column.
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
to its original position. The current
transmission position P, R, N or D appears
Driving and parking
in the transmission position display

(Y page 155) in the multifunction display.
Transmission position and drive

program display
! If the transmission position display in the
multifunction display is not working, you k Reverse gear
should pull away carefully to check whether i Neutral
the desired transmission position is h Drive
engaged. Ideally, you should select
transmission position D and drive program X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the
E or S. Do not restrict the shift range. direction of arrow P.
i The automatic transmission shifts into
park position P automatically:
Rif you open the driver's door while the
vehicle is stationary in transmission
position D or R
Rif you open the door while traveling at
: Transmission position display very low speeds in transmission position

D or R
; Drive program display
HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS: if the
The current transmission position and drive vehicle is braked using the HOLD function or
program appear in the multifunction display. DISTRONIC PLUS, the automatic
i The arrows in the transmission position transmission shifts automatically to
display show how and into which transmission position P. In addition, at least
transmission positions you can change one of the following conditions must be
using the DIRECT SELECT lever. fulfilled:
Rthe engine is switched off.
Engaging park position P Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt
! If the engine speed is too high or the is not in the buckle.
vehicle is moving, do not shift the
automatic transmission directly from D to
R, from R to D or directly to P. The
automatic transmission could otherwise be
damaged.
Engaging park position P in AMG vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
vehicles reach of children.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal.
Driving and parking

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
If the engine has been switched off, the
automatic transmission automatically shifts
to N.
If the automatic transmission is to remain in
neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car
washes with a towing device, please observe
X When the vehicle is stationary, press P the following instructions:
button :.
Using the SmartKey:
RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.
Engaging reverse gear R
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
! Only shift the automatic transmission to brake pedal and keep it depressed.
R when the vehicle is stationary. RShift to neutral N.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the RRelease the brake pedal.
brake pedal. RIf the parking brake is engaged, release it.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the RSwitch off the ignition and leave the
first point of resistance. SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Using KEYLESS-GO:
Shifting to neutral N RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.
G WARNING RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, brake pedal and keep it depressed.
they could: REngage park position P.
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other RRelease the brake pedal.
people or road users. RRemove the Start/Stop button from the
Rget out and disrupt traffic. ignition lock.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment. RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in RSwitch on the ignition.

motion if, for example, they: RDepress the brake pedal and keep it
Rrelease the parking brake. depressed.

RShift to neutral N.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P. RRelease the brake pedal.
Rstarting the engine. RIf the parking brake is engaged, release it.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. RSwitch off the ignition and leave the
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Z
Engaging drive position D A Neutral

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the Do not shift the transmission to N
brake pedal. while driving. The transmission
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past could otherwise be damaged.
the first point of resistance. No power is transmitted from the
Driving and parking
engine to the drive wheels.

Releasing the brakes will allow you
Transmission positions to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it.
B Park position
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
Do not shift the transmission into only shift the transmission to
position P(Y page 167) unless the position N if the vehicle is in danger
vehicle is stationary. The parking of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
lock should not be used as a brake
when parking. In addition to ! Rolling in neutral N can damage
engaging the parking lock, you the drive train.
must always apply the parking 7 Drive
brake to secure the vehicle.
The automatic transmission
If the vehicle electronics are changes gear automatically. All
malfunctioning, the transmission forward gears are available.
may be locked in position P.
Have the vehicle electronics
checked immediately at a qualified Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the
C Reverse gear individual gears automatically when it is in
Only shift the transmission to R transmission position D. This automatic
when the vehicle is stationary. gearshifting behavior is determined by:
Ra shift range restriction, if selected
Rthe selected drive program (Y page 159)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Driving tips
AMG vehicles
When shifting down, the double-clutch
function is active regardless of the currently
selected drive program. The double-clutch
function reduces load change reactions and
is conducive to a sporty driving style. The
sound generated by the double-clutch
function depends on the drive program
selected.
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a
Driving and parking

lower gear depending on the engine speed.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Vehicles with the Sports package AMG
Rocking the vehicle free
X Press program selector button :
Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and repeatedly until the letter for the desired
forth between transmission positions D and drive program appears in the multifunction
R can help to free a vehicle that has become display.
stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine
management restricts repeated shifting The program selector button allows you to
between gears D and R up to a maximum choose between different driving
speed of up to 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift back characteristics.
and forth between transmission positions D E Economy Comfortable, economical
and R, move the selector lever up and down driving
beyond the pressure point.
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gear shifting
Program selector button
General notes i For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (Y page 160).
i The automatic transmission shifts to
automatic drive program E each time the
engine is started.
AMG vehicles
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles and vehicles with

the Sports package AMG)
X Press program selector button :
repeatedly until the letter for the desired
gearshift program appears in the
multifunction display.
Drive program selector with manual drive program
Z
X Turn drive program selector : until the In the automatic drive program, you can
desired drive program appears in the restrict or derestrict the shift range by using
multifunction display in the speedometer. the steering wheel paddle shifters
The drive program indicator on drive (Y page 162).
program selector : lights up in red. i You can only change gear with the
Driving and parking
C Controlled Comfortable, economical steering wheel paddle shifters when the

driving transmission is in position D.
Efficiency
S Sport Sporty driving style
Automatic drive program
S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving
style Automatic drive programs E and S
M Manual Manual gear shifting Drive program E (drive program C on MAG
vehicles) is characterized by the following:
RS RACE Optimal vehicle
Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic
START acceleration from a
standstill transmission settings
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
i For further information on the automatic the automatic transmission shifting up

drive program, see (Y page 160). sooner
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
Only change from automatic drive program C, forward and reverse gears, unless the
S or S+ to manual drive program M when the accelerator pedal is depressed fully
vehicle is stationary. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
i The automatic transmission shifts to stability on slippery road surfaces, for
automatic drive program C each time the example
engine is started. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
i RS cannot be selected during normal sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driving. For further information on RACE driven at lower engine speeds and the
START, see (Y page 188). wheels being less likely to spin
Drive program S (or, in the case of AMG
vehicles, drive programs S and S+) is
Steering wheel paddle shifters characterized by the following:
Rsporty engine and automatic transmission
settings
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
later
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic
transmission shift points
: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter

; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
Manual drive program M Shift recommendation
General notes
You can activate manual drive program M in
the E and S automatic drive programs.
Driving and parking

In manual drive program M, you can briefly
change gear yourself by using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must
be in position D. The gearshift recommendations assist you in
Activating adopting an economical driving style. The
recommended gear is shown in the
X Shift the transmission to position D.
X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle
X Shift to recommended gear ; according
shifter (Y page 160).
Manual drive program M is temporarily to gearshift recommendation : when
activated. The selected gear and M appear shown in the multifunction display of the
in the multifunction display. instrument cluster.
Shifting gears Disarming

If you pull on the left or right steering wheel If you have activated manual drive program
paddle shifter, the automatic transmission M, it will remain active for a certain amount
switches to manual drive program M for a of time. Under certain conditions the
limited amount of time. Depending on which minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in
paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic the case of lateral acceleration, during an
transmission immediately shifts into the next overrun phase or when driving on steep
gear down or up, if permitted. terrain.
X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering
If manual drive program M has been
deactivated, the automatic transmission
wheel paddle shifter (Y page 160).
shifts into the automatic drive program that
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
was last selected, i.e. E or S.
next gear.
i If the maximum engine speed on the You can also deactivate manual drive
currently engaged gear is reached and you program M yourself:
continue to accelerate, the automatic X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel
transmission automatically shifts up in paddle shifter and hold it in place
order to prevent engine damage. (Y page 160).
XTo shift down: pull on the left-hand or
steering wheel paddle shifter X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
(Y page 160). transmission position.
The automatic transmission shifts down to or
the next gear. X Use the program selector button to change
i If the engine exceeds the maximum the drive program (Y page 159).
engine speed when shifting down, the Manual drive program M is deactivated.
automatic transmission protects against The automatic transmission switches into
engine damage by not shifting down. the automatic drive program that was last
i Automatic down shifting occurs when selected, i.e. E or S.
coasting.
Z
Shift ranges restricted. This prevents the engine from

overrevving.
Introduction
i You can restrict or derestrict the shift Extending the shift range
range by using the steering wheel paddle X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
Driving and parking
shifters. shifter.
When the automatic transmission is in The shift range is derestricted.
position D, it is possible to restrict or expand
the shift range (Y page 162). Clearing the shift range restriction
The shift range selected is shown in the X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel
multifunction display. The automatic
paddle shifter until D is shown again in the
transmission shifts only as far as the selected
gear.
The automatic transmission shifts from the
Shift range: current shift range directly to D.
= You can use the engine's braking
effect Selecting the ideal shift range
5 You can use the braking effect of X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
the engine on downhill gradients shifter and hold it in position.
and for driving: The automatic transmission shifts to the
gear which allows optimum acceleration
Ron steep mountain roads and deceleration. To do this, the automatic
Rin mountainous terrain transmission shifts down one or more
Rin arduous conditions gears.
4 To use the braking effect of the
engine on extremely steep downhill
gradients and on long downhill Manual drive program (AMG vehicles
stretches and vehicles with AMG Sports
package)
Restricting the shift range Switching on the manual drive program
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle X Turn the drive program selector
shifter. (Y page 159) until M appears in the
The automatic transmission shifts down multifunction display.
one gear and restricts the shift range to the The indicator M on the drive program
relevant gear. selector lights up in red.
i If the engine exceeds the maximum The manual drive program is only available for
engine speed when shifting down, the AMG vehicles.
automatic transmission protects against Manual drive program M is different from
engine damage by not shifting down. drive programs S and S+ with regard to
spontaneity, responsiveness and
i If the maximum engine speed for the shift
smoothness of gear changes.
range is reached and you continue to
accelerate, the automatic transmission Manual drive program M can be selected
shifts up, even if the shift range is using the drive program selector. In manual
drive program M, you can change gear using
the steering wheel paddle shifters if the transmission selects the optimum gear for
transmission is in position D. The gear the current speed.
currently selected and engaged is shown in
the multifunction display. Kickdown
i Kickdown is not possible in manual drive
Driving and parking

Upshifting
program M.
! In manual drive program M, the automatic
transmission does not shift up Switching off the manual drive program
automatically even when the engine
limiting speed for the current gear is
X Press the program selector button
reached. When the engine limiting speed is (Y page 159) repeatedly until E or S
reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent appears in the multifunction display.
the engine from overrevving. Always make X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program
sure that the engine speed does not reach selector (Y page 159) until C, S or S+
the red area of the tachometer. There is appears in the multifunction display.
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
: Upshift indicator
; Gear indicator
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown in the
Downshifting
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
i If you brake the vehicle or stop without
shifting down, the automatic transmission
will shift down to a gear that will allow the
vehicle to accelerate or pull away again.
i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-
hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the
Z
164 Refueling
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
Driving and parking
workshop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
Refueling If you or others come into contact with fuel,

observe the following:
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
G WARNING using soap and water.
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and immediately rinse them thoroughly with
explosion. clean water. Seek medical assistance
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating without delay.
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before assistance without delay. Do not induce
refueling. vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
G WARNING has come into contact with fuel.
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury. G WARNING
You must make sure that fuel does not come Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel explosion.
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
Refueling 165
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a = Tire pressure table

gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ? Fuel type to be used
ignition if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the automatically when you open or close the
vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
Driving and parking

wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. The repair GO.
costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow
lines drained completely. next to the filling pump indicates the side of
the vehicle.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
Opening the fuel filler flap
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
system could be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray : To open the fuel filler flap
out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
; To insert the fuel filler cap
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
= Tire pressure table
(Y page 374).
? Fuel type to be used
X Switch the engine off.
Refueling X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap lock.

X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.
This corresponds to key position 0: "key
removed".
The driver’s door can be closed again.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
X Open the fuel filler flap fully.
X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
: To open the fuel filler flap
; To insert the fuel filler cap
Z
166 Refueling
X insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on X Open the right-hand side trim panel.
the inside of fuel filler flap ;. X Remove the first-aid kit (Y page 320).
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel X Detach the emergency release from
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place retainer :.
and refuel. X Pull the emergency release in the direction
Driving and parking
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle of arrow ;.

switches off. The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pump X Open the fuel filler flap.
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
fuel may leak out.
Closing the fuel filler flap

X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the

vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the
central locking prevents the fuel filler flap
from closing.
i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap
open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp
flashes. A message appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 251).
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up (Y page 273).
For further information on warning and
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
see (Y page 273).
Fuel filler flap emergency release
X open the trunk lid.

X Slide down the parcel net.
Parking 167
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
vehicle.
Driving and parking

G WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove
it immediately (Y page 147).
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
cannot be opened. or
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 78).
X Open the trunk lid or the tailgate.
X open the trunk lid.
X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(Y page 166).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is

jammed.
Parking for example, the power steering and the brake

Important safety notes more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
G WARNING of an accident.
If flammable materials such as leaves, grass Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
or twigs are exposed to prolonged contact to
parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they G WARNING
could ignite. There is a risk of fire. If you leave children unsupervised in the
Park the vehicle so that no flammable vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
materials come into contact with parts of the example:
vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not Rreleasing the parking brake
to park on dry grassland or harvested grain Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
fields. the parking position P
G WARNING
They could also operate the vehicle's
equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
injury.
Z
168 Parking

! Always secure the vehicle correctly

Driving and parking
against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle

or its drivetrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
Rthe parking brake must be applied.
Rthe transmission must be in position P and Selector lever in AMG vehicles with P button
the SmartKey must be removed from the X AMG vehicles: press P button :.
ignition lock.
Using the SmartKey
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front
wheels must be turned towards the curb. XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
Switching off the engine i If you turn off the engine with the
SmartKey and then remove it from the
Important safety notes ignition lock or open a front door, the
G WARNING automatic transmission shifts to P
automatically.
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the Using KEYLESS-GO
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a XPress the Start/Stop button (Y page 147).
risk of an accident. The engine stops and all the indicator
After switching off the engine, always switch lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
to parking position P. Prevent the parked i When the driver's door is closed, this
vehicle from rolling away by applying the corresponds to key position 1. When the
parking brake. driver's door is open, this corresponds to
key position 0: "key removed".
Vehicles with automatic transmission i If you turn off the engine with the Start/
X Apply the parking brake firmly. Stop button, the automatic transmission
X All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): shift shifts to N. If you then open one of the front
the transmission to position P. doors, the automatic transmission shifts to
P.
i The engine can be turned off while the
vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding
the Start/Stop button for about three
seconds. This function operates
independently of the ECO start/stop
automatic engine switch-off function.
Driving tips 169
Parking brake X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.

When the engine is running, the $ (USA
G WARNING only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking lights up in the instrument cluster.
brake, the braking distance is considerably X To release: depress the brake pedal and
Driving and parking

longer and the wheels could lock. There is an keep it depressed.
increased danger of skidding and accidents.
X Pull release handle :.
Only use the parking brake to brake the
When the ignition is switched on or the
vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do
engine is running, the $ (USA only) or
not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out
wheels lock, release the parking brake until
the wheels begin turning again.
in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
Parking the vehicle for a long period
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
example: four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
Rreleasing the parking brake exhaustive discharging.
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
the parking position P six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as
a result of lack of use.
They could also operate the vehicle's XVisit a qualified specialist workshop and
equipment. There is a risk of an accident and seek advice.
injury. i You can obtain information about trickle
When leaving the vehicle, always take the chargers from a qualified specialist
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never workshop.
Driving tips
General notes
G WARNING
for example, the power steering and the brake
If you brake the vehicle with the parking more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
brake, the brake lamps will not light up. of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING
If you operate mobile communication
equipment while driving, you will be
Z
170 Driving tips
distracted from traffic conditions. You could The possibility of a serious or even fatal
also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk accident are greatly increased when you drink
of an accident. or take drugs and drive.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
is stationary. anyone to drive who has been drinking or
Driving and parking
taking drugs.
Observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are driving. Some
Emission control
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile phone while driving a vehicle. G WARNING
If you make a call while driving, always use Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
when the traffic situation permits. If you are these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
before operating the telephone. the engine running in enclosed spaces
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph without sufficient ventilation.
(approximately 50 km/h) the vehicle covers
a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per Certain engine systems are designed to keep
second. the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
Drive sensibly – save fuel These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with
Observe the following tips to save fuel: the manufacturer's specifications. For this
X The tires should always be inflated to the reason, only have work on the engine carried
recommended tire pressure. out by qualified and authorized Mercedes-
X Remove unnecessary loads. Benz technicians.
X Remove roof racks when they are not The engine settings must not be changed
needed. under any circumstances. Furthermore, all
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. specific service work must be carried out at
regular intervals and in accordance with the
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
X Have all maintenance work carried out as
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
indicated by the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or by the service
interval display. ECO display
Fuel consumption also increases when
driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic
and in hilly terrain.
Drinking and driving

G WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and Example: ECO display
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
The ECO display gives you information on how
affect your reflexes, perceptions and
economical your driving style is. The ECO
judgment.
display assists you in achieving the optimum
Driving tips 171
driving style in terms of consumption, taking RAcceleration (evaluation of all

the actual and selected conditions into acceleration processes):
consideration. Your driving style can - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
significantly influence the vehicle's especially at higher speeds
consumption. - The bar empties: sporty acceleration
Driving and parking

The ECO display consists of three bars: RConstant (assessment of driving behavior
RAcceleration at all times):
RConstant - The bar fills up: constant speed and
RCoasting avoidance of unnecessary acceleration
The percent value is the average value of the and deceleration
three bars. The three bars and the mean value - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
begin at the value of 50%. A higher RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration

percentage indicates a more economical processes):
driving style. - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
The ECO display does not indicate the actual keeping your distance and early release
fuel consumption and a fixed percentage of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast
count in the ECO display does not indicate a without use of the brakes.
fixed consumption figure. - The bar empties: frequent braking
Apart from driving style, consumption is i An economical driving style specially
dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
requires driving at moderate engine
Rload speeds.
Rcheck To achieve a higher value in the categories
Rcold start Acceleration and Constant:
Rchoice of route Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Relectrical consumers switched on Rdrive in drive program E.
These factors are not taken into i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.
consideration by the ECO display. on the highway, only the bar for Constant
The evaluation of your driving style is carried will change.
out using the following three categories:
i The ECO display summaries the driving
characteristics from the start of the journey
to its completion. For this reason, the bars
change dynamically at the beginning of the
journey. On longer journeys, there are
fewer changes. For more dynamic changes,
carry out a manual reset.
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 223).
Z
172 Driving tips
Braking Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never

depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
Important safety notes pedal at the same time.
G WARNING ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
Driving and parking
results in excessive and premature wear to

an attempt to increase the engine's braking the brake pads.
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
accidents. load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but
drive on for a short while. This allows the
Do not shift down for additional engine
airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
braking on a slippery road surface.
Wet roads
Downhill gradients
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
! On long and steep gradients, you must without braking, there may be a delayed
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting reaction from the brakes when braking for the
early to a lower gear. This allows you to take first time. This may also occur after the
advantage of the engine braking effect and vehicle has been washed or driven through
helps avoid overheating and excessive deep water.
wear of the brakes.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
When you take advantage of the engine firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn vehicle in front.
for some time, e.g. on a slippery road
After driving on a wet road or having the
surface. This could cause damage to the
vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying
drive train. This type of damage is not
attention to the traffic conditions. This will
covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously more quickly and protecting them against
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the corrosion.
brakes to rub by constantly applying light
pressure to the pedal. This results in Limited braking performance on salt-
excessive and premature wear to the brake treated roads
pads.
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt
On long and steep downhill gradients, you
residue may form on the brake discs and
must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time.
brake pads. This can result in a significantly
This is especially important if the vehicle is
longer braking distance.
laden.
RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
Heavy and light loads salt residue. Make sure that you do not
endanger other road users when doing so.
G WARNING RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while beginning and end of a journey.
driving, the braking system can overheat. This RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
increases the stopping distance and can even ahead.
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Driving tips 173
Servicing the brakes All checks and maintenance work on the

brake system must be carried out at a
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in
qualified specialist workshop. Consult a
the instrument cluster and you hear a
qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.
warning tone while the engine is running,
the brake fluid level may be too low. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
Driving and parking

Observe additional warning messages in replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
the multifunction display. If the brake system has only been subject to
The brake fluid level may be too low due to moderate loads, you should test the
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. functionality of your brakes at regular
intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake
Have the brake system checked
pedal when driving at a high speed. This
immediately. This work should be carried
improves the grip of the brake pads.
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can find a description of Brake Assist
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or (BAS) on (Y page 67) or of BAS PLUS on
performance tests may only be carried out (Y page 67).
on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you are The braking characteristics of the vehicle can
planning to have the vehicle tested on such be seriously impaired if:
a dynamometer, contact an authorized
Rbrake pads other than those recommended
Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further
information first. Otherwise, you could are installed
damage the drive train or the brake system. Rthe recommended brake fluid is not used
Safe braking can no longer be guaranteed.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP®
system operates automatically, the engine
and the ignition must be switched off
AMG high-performance and ceramic
(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition
brakes
lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or The high-performance brake system is
1) while the parking brake is being tested installed only on the CLS 63 AMG.
on a brake dynamometer. The AMG brake systems are designed for
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically heavy loads. This may lead to noise when
by ESP® may seriously damage the brake braking. This will depend on:
system. RSpeed
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® RBraking force
system operates automatically, the engine REnvironmental conditions, such as
and the ignition system must be switched temperature and humidity
off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the The wear of individual components of the
ignition lock or Start/Stop button in brake system, such as the brake pads/linings
position 0 or 1) when: or brake discs, depends on the individual
Rtesting the parking brake on a brake driving style and operating conditions.
dynamometer. For this reason, it is impossible to state a
Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with mileage that will be valid under all
one of the axles raised. circumstances. An aggressive driving style
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically will lead to high wear. You can obtain further
by ESP® may seriously damage the brake information about this from your authorized
system. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
174 Driving tips
New and replaced brake pads and discs only Winter driving
reach their optimum braking effect after
several hundred kilometers of driving. Important safety notes
Compensate for this by applying greater force
to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and
G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
Driving and parking
adapt your driving and braking accordingly

during this break-in period. an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
Excessive heavy braking results in
There is an increased danger of skidding and
correspondingly high brake wear. Observe
accidents.
the # brake wear warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and note any brake status Do not shift down for additional engine
messages in the multifunction display. braking on a slippery road surface.
Especially for high performance driving, it is
important to maintain and have the brake G DANGER
system checked regularly. If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
Driving on wet roads vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
Hydroplaning fatal injury.
If water has accumulated to a certain depth If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
on the road surface, there is a danger of running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
hydroplaning occurring, even if: around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
Ryou
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open
drive at low speeds.
a window on the side of the vehicle that is not
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. facing into the wind.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or
in conditions in which hydroplaning may Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
occur, you must drive in the following specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
manner: Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
Rlower your speed. section (Y page 336).
Ravoidruts.
Rbrake carefully.
Driving with summer tires
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
Driving on flooded roads section (Y page 336).
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Slippery road surfaces
Check the depth of any water before driving
through it. Drive slowly through standing G WARNING
water. Otherwise, water may enter the If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
vehicle interior or the engine compartment. an attempt to increase the engine's braking
This can damage the electronic effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
components in the engine or the automatic There is an increased danger of skidding and
transmission. Water can also be drawn in accidents.
by the engine's air suction nozzles and this
Do not shift down for additional engine
can cause engine damage.
braking on a slippery road surface.
Driving systems 175
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be store any road speed above 20 mph
stopped when moving at low speed: (30 km/h).
X Shift the transmission to position N. If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
control can neither reduce the risk of an
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
accident nor override the laws of physics.
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
Driving and parking

Cruise control cannot take into account the
and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise
control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
control is only an aid. You are responsible for
i For more information on driving with the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
snow chains, see (Y page 337). speed, for braking in good time and for
The outside temperature indicator is not staying in your lane.
designed to serve as an ice-warning device Do not use cruise control:
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
Changes in the outside temperature are allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
displayed after a short delay. in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Indicated temperatures just above the Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
freezing point do not guarantee that the road accelerating could cause the drive wheels
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, to lose traction and the vehicle could then
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The skid
vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
driving style. Always adapt your driving style heavy rain or snow
and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
weather conditions.
driver of the speed stored.
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around General notes
freezing point.
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
Driving systems to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
Cruise control vehicle is laden, you must select shift range
Important safety notes 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will
make use of the braking effect of the engine,
Cruise control maintains a constant road which relieves the load on the brake system
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order and prevents the brakes from overheating
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and and wearing too quickly.
steep downhill gradients, especially if the Use cruise control only if road and traffic
vehicle is laden, you must select shift range conditions make it appropriate to maintain a
1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
make use of the braking effect of the engine. store any road speed above 20 mph
This relieves the load on the brake system and (30 km/h).
prevents the brakes from overheating and
wearing too quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic
conditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
Z
176 Driving systems
Cruise control lever You can accept the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
Driving and parking
up : or down ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
: To activate or increase speed the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
; To activate or reduce speed stored speed is resumed when the gradient
= To deactivate cruise control evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
? To activate at the current speed/last
automatically applying the brakes.
stored speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored Storing the current speed or calling up
speed is shown in the multifunction display the last stored speed
for five seconds. In the multifunction display,
the segments between the stored speed and
the maximum speed light up.
Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe parking brake must be released.
Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
Rthe transmission must be in position D. you :.
Storing and maintaining the current pedal.
speed The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously
stored speed.
Driving systems 177
Setting a speed Deactivating cruise control
Driving and parking

X Press the cruise control lever up : for a There are several ways to deactivate cruise
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. control:
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph X Briefly press the cruise control lever
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly forwards :.
press the cruise control lever up : or or
down ; to the pressure point. X Brake.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
stored is increased or reduced. Ryou depress the parking brake.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph
increments (10 km/h increments): (30 km/h).
briefly press the cruise control lever RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
up : or down ; to the pressure point. Ryou shift the transmission to position N
Every time the cruise control lever is while driving.
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear
stored is increased or reduced. a warning tone. You will see the Cruise
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you Control Off message in the multifunction
depress the accelerator pedal. For display for approximately five seconds.
example, if you accelerate briefly to i When you switch off the engine, the last
overtake, cruise control adjusts the speed stored is cleared.
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
after you have finished overtaking.
DISTRONIC PLUS
G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
Rpeopleor animals
Rstationaryobstacles on the road, e.g.
stopped or parked vehicles
Roncoming and crossing traffic
Z
178 Driving systems
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
warnings nor intervene in such situations. time and for staying in your lane.
There is a risk of an accident. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
Always pay careful attention to the traffic Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
situation and be ready to brake. allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
Driving and parking
in heavy traffic or on winding roads

G WARNING Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly accelerating could cause the drive wheels
identify other road users and complex traffic to lose traction and the vehicle could then
situations. skid
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then heavy rain or snow
brake the vehicle DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
Rneither give a warning nor intervene vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
Raccelerate unexpectedly vehicles driving on a different line.
There is a risk of an accident. In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, in particular when warned to do so by Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
DISTRONIC PLUS. covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
G WARNING Rinterference by other radar sources
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in
to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this parking garages
braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a
warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may
of an accident. unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and stored speed.
try to take evasive action. This speed may:
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane
is activated, the vehicle brakes or an exit lane
automatically in certain situations. To Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in countries)
the following or other similar situations: Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass
Rwhen towing the vehicle vehicles driving on the right (right-hand
Rin the car wash drive countries)
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
If you fail to adapt your driving style,
driver of the speed stored.
DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk
of accident nor override the laws of physics.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account General notes
the road, traffic and weather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are automatically helps you maintain the
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in distance to the vehicle detected in front.
Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar
Driving systems 179
sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes Any unauthorized modification to this

automatically so that the set speed is not device could void the user's authority to
exceeded. operate the equipment.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long i Canada only: This device complies with
and steep downhill gradients. This is RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
Driving and parking

especially important if the vehicle is laden. By subject to the following two conditions:
doing so, you will make use of the braking
1. This device may not cause harmful
effect of the engine. This relieves the load on
interference, and
the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly. 2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
cause undesired operation of the device.
of a collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot Removal, tampering, or altering of the
prevent a collision without your intervention. device will void any warranties, and is not
An intermittent warning tone will then sound permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
and the distance warning lamp will light up in in any non-approved way.
the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in Any unauthorized modification to this
order to increase the distance to the vehicle device could void the user's authority to
in front or take evasive action provided it is operate the equipment.
safe to do so.
For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar Cruise control lever
sensor system must be operational.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control in the speed range between 20 mph
(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:
200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of
you, it operates in the speed range between
0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:
200 km/h).
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
roads with steep gradients.
: To store the current speed or a higher
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,
speed
it can resemble the radar detectors of the
; To store the current speed or a lower
responsible authorities. You can refer to the
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if speed
questions are asked about this. = To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
? To store the current speed or call up the
i USA only: This device has been approved
last stored speed
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".
A To set the specified minimum distance
The radar sensor is intended for use in an
automotive radar system only. Removal,
tampering, or altering of the device will void
any warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Z
180 Driving systems
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS When driving at speeds below 20 mph

(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC
Activation conditions PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the and is shown in the multifunction display. If
following conditions must be fulfilled: the vehicle in front is no longer detected and
Driving and parking
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up displayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and
to two minutes after pulling away before a tone sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. i If you do not fully release the accelerator
Rthe parking brake must be released. pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override
RESP® must be active, but not intervening. message appears in the multifunction
RActive Parking Assist must not be display. The set distance to a slower-
moving vehicle in front will then not be
activated.
maintained. You will be driving at the speed
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
you determine by the position of the
Rthe hood must be closed. accelerator pedal.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be Activating when driving towards a
fastened. stationary vehicle
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
must be closed. you ? or press it up : or down ;.

Rthe vehicle must not skid.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly
Activating up : or down ; until the desired speed
is set.
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you
can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your
vehicle is stationary as well.
i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at
under 20 mph (30 km/h) if a vehicle in front
has been detected. Therefore, the
DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the
instrument cluster should be activated
(Y page 227).
i You can use the cruise control lever to set
you ; or press it up : or down =.
the stored speed and the control on the
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. cruise control lever to set the specified
X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly minimum distance (Y page 183).
up : or down = until the desired speed
is set. Activating at the current speed/last
stored speed
pedal. G WARNING
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the If you call up the stored speed and it differs
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired from the current speed, the vehicle
stored speed. accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know
the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
Driving systems 181
or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an X If you want to pull away with

accident. DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from
Pay attention to the road and traffic the brake pedal.
conditions before calling up the stored speed. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
If you do not know the stored speed, store the you :
Driving and parking

desired speed again. or
X Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its
speed to that of the vehicle in front.
i The vehicle can also pull away when it is
facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving
on a different line from another vehicle. The
vehicle then brakes automatically. There is
a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at
all times.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control.
you :.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front has slowed down, it brakes your
pedal.
vehicle. In this way, the distance you have
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
selected is maintained.
time it is activated, the current speed is
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving
speed to the previously stored value. vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.
However, the vehicle is only accelerated up
to the speed you have stored.
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
Changing lanes
Pulling away and driving If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
PLUS supports you when:
Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph
(60 km/h)
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the
distance to a vehicle in front
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle
is accelerated. Acceleration will be
interrupted if changing lanes takes too long
or if the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front becomes too small.
i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
monitors the left lane on left-hand drive
Z
182 Driving systems
vehicles and the right lane on right-hand The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is
drive vehicles. canceled and the vehicle can start moving if:
Vehicles with COMAND RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the
cruise control lever.
Ryou accelerate.
Driving and parking
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an

interruption in the power supply, e.g.
battery failure.
Rthe electrical system in the engine
compartment, the battery or the fuses are
tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it,

Example: traffic circle deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
i The following function is not operational
in all countries. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until
from your navigation system so that it can it is stationary.
react appropriately to certain traffic Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
situations. This is the case if, while following stationary and you do not need to depress the
a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you: brake.
Rapproach or drive through a traffic circle i Depending on the specified minimum
Rapproach a T-intersection distance, your vehicle will come to a
Rturn off at a highway exit standstill at a sufficient distance behind the
vehicle in front. The specified minimum
Even if the vehicle in front leaves the
distance is set using the control on the
detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS
cruise control lever.
temporarily maintains the current driving
speed and does not accelerate. This is based When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the
on the current map data in the navigation transmission is shifted automatically to
system. position P if:
Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
the speed you set. seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
Stopping
automatically switched off by the ECO
G WARNING start/stop function.
Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC Rthe hood is opened.
PLUS is activated. Ra system malfunction occurs.
DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
operated, activated or deactivated by a
passenger or from outside the vehicle.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the
parking brake and must not be used for
parking.
Driving systems 183
Setting a speed with the minimum distance as required by

law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in
front if necessary.
Driving and parking

X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
You can set the specified minimum distance
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
between one and two seconds. With this
press the cruise control lever up : or
function, you can set the minimum distance
down ; to the pressure point. that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
Every time the cruise control lever is front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed see this distance in the multifunction display
stored is increased or reduced. (Y page 184).
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph X To increase: turn control ; in direction
increments (10 km/h increments): =.
briefly press the cruise control lever
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
up : or down ; to the pressure point.
distance between your vehicle and the
Every time the cruise control lever is vehicle in front.
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed
X To decrease: turn control ; in
stored is increased or reduced.
direction :.
i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last distance between your vehicle and the
speed stored after you have finished vehicle in front.
overtaking.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the
Setting the specified minimum distance speedometer
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this
function, you can set the minimum distance
that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 184).
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient
distance to the vehicle in front and comply
Z
184 Driving systems
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is

two segments ; in the set speed range light activated
up.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
Driving and parking
front : and stored speed = light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the

multifunction display
: Vehicle in front, if detected
General notes
; Specified minimum distance to the
In the assistance graphics display menu vehicle in front; adjustable
(Y page 227) of the on-board computer, you = Own vehicle
can select the assistance graphics display.
? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is appears when the cruise control lever is
deactivated actuated)
You will see the stored speed for about five
seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
X Select the Distance Display function
(Y page 227).
i You will see the stored speed for about
five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC
PLUS.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Distance indicator, current distance to
the vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the
vehicle in front; adjustable
? Own vehicle
X Select the Distance Display function
(Y page 227).
Driving systems 185
There are several ways to deactivate ROther vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS: RNarrow vehicles
X Briefly press the cruise control lever RObstructions and stationary vehicles
forwards :. RCrossing vehicles
or In such situations, brake if necessary.
Driving and parking

X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you Cornering, going into and coming out of a
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message bend
in the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically
deactivated if:
Ryou engage the parking brake
Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph
(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect
or if the vehicle in front is no longer vehicles when cornering is limited. Your
detected vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Vehicles traveling on a different line
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door or one of the rear doors is
open
Rthe vehicle has skidded
Ryou activate Active Parking Assist
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will

hear a warning tone. You will see the
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the
multifunction display for approximately five DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles
seconds. traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
RCornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
RVehicles traveling on a different line
Z
186 Driving systems
Other vehicles changing lanes example, the detected vehicle turns a corner
and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,
DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
Driving and parking
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the

vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this
vehicle will be too short.
Narrow vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect
vehicles that are crossing your lane.
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights
with crossing traffic, for example, could cause
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep
vehicle in front on the edge of the road, slopes
because of its narrow width. The distance to Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Rwhen waiting in traffic
Obstructions and stationary vehicles The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for

obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for
Driving systems 187
Important safety notes Activating the HOLD function

G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Driving and parking

Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake X Make sure that the activation conditions
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. are met.
Rthe electrical system in the engine X Depress the brake pedal.
compartment, the battery or the fuses have X Quickly depress the brake pedal further
been tampered with. until ë: appears in the multifunction
Rthe battery is disconnected
display.
There is a risk of an accident. The HOLD function is activated. You can
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off release the brake pedal.
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
i If depressing the brake pedal the first
against rolling away.
time does not activate the HOLD function,
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function wait briefly and then try again.
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To Deactivating the HOLD function
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate The HOLD function is deactivated
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in automatically if:
the following or other similar situations:
Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in
Rwhen towing the vehicle position D or R.
Rin the car wash
Ryou shift the transmission to position P.
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
Activation conditions certain amount of pressure until ë
You can activate the HOLD function if: disappears from the multifunction display.
Rthe Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
vehicle is stationary
Rthe engine is running or if it has been When the HOLD function is activated, the
automatically switched off by the ECO transmission is shifted automatically to
start/stop function position P if:
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
is fastened seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe parking brake is released Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
Rthe hood is closed automatically switched off by the ECO
Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N start/stop function.
Rthe hood is opened.
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
Z
188 Driving systems
RACE START X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel

paddle shifter (Y page 160).
Important safety notes or
i Observe the safety notes for the SPORT XTo confirm: pull the right steering wheel
handling mode (Y page 70). paddle shifter (Y page 160).
Driving and parking
RACE START is intended solely for activation The RACE START Available Depress
on dedicated race circuits. gas pedal message appears in the
RACE START enables optimal acceleration
from a standing start. The precondition for i If you do not depress the accelerator
this is a suitable high-grip road surface. pedal fully within two seconds, RACE
START is canceled. The RACE START Not
i RACE START is only available in AMG Possible See Operator's Manual
vehicles. message appears in the multifunction
display.
Conditions for activation XFully depress the accelerator pedal.
You can activate RACE START if: The engine speed rises to approximately
Rthe doors are closed. 3,500 rpm.
Rthe engine is running and it has reached an The RACE START Release brake to
operating temperature of approximately start message appears in the
176 ‡ (80 †). This is the case when the multifunction display.
engine oil temperature in the multifunction i If you do not release the brake pedal
display stops flashing. within five seconds, RACE START is
RSPORT handling mode is activated. canceled. The RACE START Canceled
(Y page 70) message appears in the multifunction
Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
display.
position X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake accelerator pedal depressed.
pedal is depressed (left foot). The vehicle pulls away at maximum
Rthe transmission is in position D.
acceleration.
The RACE START Active message appears
Activating RACE START in the multifunction display.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph
and keep it depressed.
(Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S+ is
X Turn the drive program selector clockwise
activated. SPORT handling mode remains
(Y page 159) until the RS lamp lights up. activated.
The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP RACE START is deactivated immediately if
Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears you release the accelerator pedal during
in the multifunction display. RACE START or if any of the activation
i If the activation conditions are no longer conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE
fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The START Not Possible See Operator's
START Canceled message appears in the Manual message appears in the multifunction
multifunction display. display.
i If RACE START is used repeatedly within
a short period of time, it is only available
Driving systems 189
again after the vehicle has been driven a Your vehicle regulates its height
certain distance. automatically. All-round level control ensures
the best possible suspension and constant
ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle.
AIRMATIC When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered
Driving and parking

automatically to improve driving safety and to
Vehicle level reduce fuel consumption.
Important safety notes The following vehicle levels are possible:
Rnormal
G WARNING
Rraised: the vehicle is raised by about
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are 0.80 in (20 mm) when compared with the
between the vehicle body and the wheels or normal level
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of Rlowered: the vehicle is raised by about
injury. 0.40 in (10 mm) when compared with the
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle normal level
or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel i These changes in level are so slight that
arches when the vehicle is being lowered. you are hardly aware of them.
G WARNING The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can

be set manually.
Vehicles with level control:
The "Lowered” vehicle level is set
The vehicle is slightly lowered if:
automatically:
Ryou have selected comfort suspension Rat speeds above 70 mph (113 km/h)
tuning and
Rif you have selected "Sports tuning"
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately
(Y page 190)
60 seconds of switching off the engine
You and people in the vicinity of the wheel Setting the vehicle level
arch or the underbody may thus become Select the "Normal" setting for normal road
trapped. There is a risk of injury. surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the chains or on particularly poor road surfaces.
wheel arch or the underbody when you lock Your selection remains stored even if you
the vehicle. remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
! The vehicle is lowered by about 15 mm if: Setting raised level

Ryou have selected "Comfort tuning"
Ryou switch off the engine and then
60 seconds
When parking, position your vehicle so that
it does not make contact with the curb as
the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could
otherwise be damaged.
If you lock the vehicle within 60 seconds of
switching the engine off, it lowers slightly to
the selected Comfort suspension mode. X Start the engine.
Z
190 Driving systems
If indicator lamp ; is not lit: Sports tuning

X Press the : button.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle
height is adjusted to raised level.
The Vehicle Rising message appears in
Driving and parking
the display.
The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:
Rdrive at a speed over approximately
75 mph (120 km/h)
Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a
speed over 50 mph (80 km/h)
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode
The "Raised level" remains active when you ensures even better contact with the road.
are not driving within these speed ranges. Select this mode when employing a sporty
Setting the normal level driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
X Start the engine. X Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
suspension tuning is selected.
X Press the : button. The AIRMATIC SPORT message appears in
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is the multifunction display.
adjusted to normal level.
Comfort tuning
Suspension tuning In comfort mode, the driving characteristics
of your vehicle are more comfortable.
General notes Therefore, select this mode if you favor a
The electronically controlled damping system more comfortable driving style. Select
works continuously. This improves driving comfort mode also when driving fast on
safety and ride comfort. straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of
The damping is tuned individually to each freeway.
wheel and depends on: X Press button :.
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Indicator lamp = lights up. Comfort tuning
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps is selected.
Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or The AIRMATIC COMFORT message appears
comfort in the multifunction display.
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system
G WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
Driving systems 191
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of Sport mode

injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle
or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel
arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
Driving and parking

G WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
The vehicle is slightly lowered if:
Ryou have selected comfort suspension
tuning and
Ryou lock the vehicle within approximately : Mode selection button
60 seconds of switching off the engine ; Button to store, recall and display the
You and people in the vicinity of the wheel selected mode
arch or the underbody may thus become = Sport + mode indicator lamp
trapped. There is a risk of injury. ? Sport mode indicator lamp
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode
wheel arch or the underbody when you lock
ensures better contact with the road. Select
the vehicle.
this mode when employing a sporty driving
! The vehicle is lowered by about 0.8 in style, e.g. on winding country roads.
(20 mm) if: X Press button : once.
Ryou have selected "Comfortable tuning" Indicator lamp ? lights up. You have
Ryou
selected Sport mode.
switch off the engine and then
The AMG Ride Control SPORT message
appears in the multifunction display.
60 seconds
When parking, position your vehicle so that Sport + mode
it does not make contact with the curb as The very firm setting of the suspension tuning
the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could in Sport + mode ensures the best possible
otherwise be damaged. contact with the road. Select this mode
primarily when driving on race circuits.
Suspension tuning
If indicator lamps = and ? are off:
General notes X Press button : twice.
The electronically controlled damping system Indicator lamps = and ? light up. You
works continuously. This improves driving have selected Sport + mode.
safety and ride comfort. The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message
The damping is tuned individually to each appears in the multifunction display.
wheel and depends on:
If indicator lamp ? lights up:
Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty
Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps
X Press button : once.
Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport +
Second indicator lamp = lights up. You
have selected Sport + mode.
or Comfort
Z
192 Driving systems
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message The vehicle lowers when you press the button
appears in the multifunction display. for selecting the suspension tuning or the
AMG button. The vehicle also lowers if it is
Comfort mode stationary.
When comfort mode is selected, the driving ! If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning has
Driving and parking
characteristics of your vehicle are more

been selected, the vehicle's ground
comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a
clearance decreases. Make sure that no
comfort-oriented driving style. Select
objects become trapped or that the vehicle
comfort mode also when driving fast on
does not become damaged, for example,
straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of
on the curb.
highway.
X Press button : repeatedly until indicator i The vehicle level may change visibly at the
lamps = and ? go out. rear axle if you park the vehicle and the
outside temperature changes. If the
You have selected Comfort mode.
temperature drops, the vehicle level
The AMG Ride Control COMFORT lowers; with an increase in temperature,
message appears in the multifunction the vehicle level rises.
display.
Changing the rear axle ride height
Storing and calling up settings This function is only available for the CLS 63
Once the suspension tuning and drive AMG 4MATIC.
program have been selected, you can store The vehicle level at the rear axle depends on
and call up your settings using AMG the selected suspension tuning and the
button ;. vehicle speed.
X To store: press AMG button ; until you The vehicle level at the rear axle changes
hear a tone. during the journey depending on the selected
X To call up: press AMG button ;. suspension tuning:
The stored suspension tuning and drive RComfort: +0.4 in (+10 mm)
program are selected. RSport + and Sport: -0.6 in (-15 mm)
X To display: briefly press AMG button ;. When switching from Comfort to Sport or
Your selection appears in the multifunction Sport +, the rear axle lowers by approximately
display. 1.0 in (25 mm). When switching from Sport
or Sport + to Comfort, the rear axle raises by
approximately 1.0 in (25 mm). This level
Vehicle level change also takes place when the vehicle is
Important safety notes stationary.
If you drive faster than 105 mph (170 km/h),
G WARNING the rear axle ride height is set to a medium
When the vehicle is being lowered, people level. This increases driving safety and
could become trapped if their limbs are reduces air resistance. If you then drive at
between the vehicle body and the wheels or speeds below 93 mph (150 km/h), the rear
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of axle ride height is readjusted to the selected
injury. suspension tuning.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle
or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel
arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
Driving systems 193
Load compensation PARKTRONIC

The vehicle can compensate differences in
the vehicle level by raising or lowering the Important safety notes
rear axle. This is the case, for example, if PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
people get out or if luggage is being loaded. ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
Driving and parking

Load compensation takes place if: audibly the distance between your vehicle
Ra door or the trunk lid/tailgate is opened and an object.
Rthe parked vehicle is unlocked PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your
For larger level changes, the engine must be immediate surroundings. You are always
running. responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
and exiting a parking space. When
maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) parking space, make sure that there are no
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC persons, animals or objects in the area in
can neither reduce the risk of accident nor which you are maneuvering.
override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot ! When parking, pay particular attention to
take account of road, weather and traffic
objects above or below the sensors, such
conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are
as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
time and for staying in your lane.
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: or the objects.
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far The sensors may not detect snow and other
as necessary when pulling away. objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
RAccelerate less when driving. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
raised. This may damage the transfer case. truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
Damage of this sort is not covered by the PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
wheels must remain either on the ground uneven terrain.
or be fully raised. Observe the instructions PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full you:
contact with the ground. Rswitch on the ignition
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if Rrelease the parking brake
you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
chains if necessary. PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are speeds.
permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
improves the traction of your vehicle vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
whenever a drive wheel spins due to and four sensors in the rear bumper.
insufficient grip.
Z
194 Driving systems
Range of the sensors

General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into
consideration that are:
Driving and parking
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,

animals or objects
Rabove the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, truck overhangs or
loading ramps.
Example: top view
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand 120 cm)
side (example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
80 cm)
slush. They can otherwise not function
correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking Minimum distance
care not to scratch or damage them
(Y page 315). Center Approx. 8 in (approx.
20 cm)
15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the

relevant warning displays light up and a
warning tone sounds. If the distance falls
below the minimum, the distance may no
longer be shown.
Example: side view

Driving systems 195
Warning displays One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an
Driving and parking

intermittent warning tone for
approximately two seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two
seconds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Warning display for the front area
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the center air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is
located on the headliner in the rear
compartment. : Indicator lamp
The warning display for each side of the ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red
If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is
segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if
yellow segments showing operational deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also
readiness = light up. deactivated.
The selected transmission position and the i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
direction in which the vehicle is rolling when you turn the SmartKey to position 2
determine which warning display is active in the ignition lock.
when the engine is running.
Transmission Warning display
position
D Front area activated
R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas
is rolling activated
backwards
P No areas activated
Z
196 Driving systems
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking
warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.

You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the
indicator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 315).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
ultrasound waves.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist G WARNING

The vehicle swings out when parking and in
General notes
doing so could cross into the opposite lane.
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking This could result in a collision with another
aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on road user. There is a risk of an accident.
both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol Pay attention to other road users when
indicates a suitable parking space. Active parking. Stop the vehicle if necessary or
steering intervention can assist you during cancel the Active Parking Assist parking
parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC procedure.
(Y page 193).
! If unavoidable, you should drive over
Important safety notes obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at
a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
the wheels or tires.
a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking parking spaces which are not suitable for
and exiting a parking space. Make sure that parking, for example:
no persons, animals or objects are in the Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
maneuvering range. Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Ron unsuitable surfaces
Parking Assist is also unavailable.
Driving systems 197
Parking tips: You may cause a collision as a result. There is

ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the a risk of an accident.
parking space as possible. If there are objects above the detection range,
RParking spaces that are littered or stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
overgrown might be identified or measured
Driving and parking

incorrectly. For further information on the detection
RParking spaces that are partially occupied
range (Y page 194).
by trailer drawbars might not be identified Active Parking Assist does not support you
as such or be measured incorrectly. with parking spaces parallel to the direction
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
of travel if:
space being measured inaccurately. Rthe parking space is on a curb
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC Rthe parking space appears blocked to the
(Y page 195) warning messages during the system, for example, by foliage or grass
parking procedure. paving blocks
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure Rthe area that the vehicle needs to
to correct it at any time. Active Parking maneuver is too small

Assist will then be canceled. Rthe parking space is bordered by an
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes obstacle, such as a tree, a post or a trailer
from your vehicle, you should not use
Active Parking Assist.
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed.
RMake sure that the tire pressures are
always correct. This has a direct influence
on the parking characteristics of the
vehicle. Example: detected parking space
: Detected parking space on the left
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
; Parking symbol
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
= Detected parking space on the right
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. Active Parking Assist is switched on
not on the pavement automatically when driving forwards. The
system is operational at speeds of up to
Detecting parking spaces approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in
operation, the system independently locates
Objects located above the height range of and measures parking spaces on both sides
Active Parking Assist will not be detected of the vehicle.
when the parking space is measured. These Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
are not taken into account when the parking spaces:
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
vehicles. Rthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Rthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than
G WARNING
your vehicle
If there are objects above the detection range,
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as a
Z
198 Driving systems
status indicator in the instrument cluster. X To cancel the procedure: press the
When a parking space has been detected, an % button on the multifunction steering
arrow towards the right or the left also wheel or pull away.
appears. By default, Active Parking Assist or
only displays parking spaces on the front- X To park using Active Parking Assist:
Driving and parking
passenger side. Parking spaces on the

press the a button on the multifunction
driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn
steering wheel.
signal on the driver's side is activated. When
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
parking on the driver's side, this must remain
and Brake Observe Surroundings
switched on until you acknowledge the use of
Active Parking Assist by pressing the a
display.
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
i Take note that Active Parking Assist
X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake
cannot measure the size of parking spaces
that are at right angles to the direction of at all times. When backing up, drive at a
travel. You must decide for yourself speed below approximately 6 mph
whether the vehicle will fit in the parking (10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist
space. will be canceled.
i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve
A parking space is displayed while you are
the best parking results by backing up as
driving past it, and until you are
far as possible. When doing so, also
approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.
observe the PARKTRONIC messages.
Parking X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
G WARNING Maneuvering may be required in tight
Active Parking Assist merely aids you by parking spaces.
intervening actively in the steering. If you do The Park Assist Active Select D
not brake there is a risk of an accident. Observe Surroundings message appears in
Always apply the brakes yourself when the multifunction display.
maneuvering and parking. X Shift the transmission to position D while
the vehicle is stationary.
X Stop the vehicle when the parking space
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
symbol shows the desired parking space in
the other direction.
the instrument cluster.
X Shift the transmission to position R.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
display.
i You will achieve the best results by
waiting for the steering procedure to
complete before pulling away.
X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
Driving systems 199
The Park Assist Active Select R message appears in the multifunction

Observe Surroundings message appears in display.
the multifunction display. or
Further transmission shifts may be X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the
necessary. center console (Y page 195).
Driving and parking

As soon as the parking procedure is PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
complete, the Park Assist Finished Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
message appears in the multifunction The Park Assist Canceled message
display. PARKTRONIC continues to be appears in the multifunction display.
available. Active Parking Assist is canceled
X Maneuver if necessary. automatically if:
X Always observe the warning messages Rthe transmission is shifted too early.
displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 195). Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no
Parking tips: longer possible.
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph
parking space after parking is dependent (10 km/h).
on various factors. These include the Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The
position and shape of the vehicles parked ÷ warning lamp lights up in the
in front and behind it and the conditions of instrument cluster.
the location. It may be the case that Active A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol
Parking Assist guides you too far into a disappears and the multifunction display
parking space, or not far enough into it. In shows the Park Assist Canceled
some cases, it may also lead you across or message.
onto the curb. If necessary, you should
If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must
cancel the parking procedure with Active
steer again yourself.
Parking Assist.
RYou can also engage forward gear
prematurely. The vehicle redirects and Rear view camera
does not drive as far into the parking space.
Should a gear be changed too early, the Important safety notes
parking procedure will be canceled. A
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not
sensible parking position can no longer be
a replacement for your attention to your
achieved from this position.
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering and
Canceling Active Parking Assist parking. When maneuvering or parking, make
You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any sure that there are no persons, animals or
time. objects in the area in which you are
X Stop the movement of the multifunction maneuvering.
steering wheel or steer yourself. Under the following circumstances, the rear
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at view camera will not function, or will function
once. The Park Assist Canceled in a limited manner:
Rifthe trunk lid/tailgate is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Z
200 Driving systems
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Activating/deactivating the rear view
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED camera
lighting (the display may flicker) X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in X Make sure that the "Activation by R gear"
Driving and parking
winter setting is active in COMAND, see the

Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed separate COMAND operating instructions.
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In X Engage reverse gear.
this event, have the camera position and The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
setting checked at a qualified specialist COMAND display with guide lines.
workshop.
To deactivate: the rear view camera is
deactivated if you:
General notes
Rshift the transmission to position P
Rdrive 33 ft (10 m) forwards
Rshift the transmission from R to another
position after 15 seconds
Rdrive forwards at a speed of over 5 mph
(10 km/h)
Displays in the COMAND display

The rear view camera may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
Example: Coupe not at all. The rear view camera does not show
objects in the following positions:
Rear view camera : is located in the handle
Rvery close to the rear bumper
strip of the trunk lid.
Runder the rear bumper
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND handle

display. ! Objects not at ground level may appear to
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
i The text of messages shown in the Rthe drawbar of a trailer
COMAND display depends on the language Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
setting. The following are examples of rear Rthe rear section of an HGV
view camera messages in the COMAND
Ra slanted post
display.
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the
bottom-most guideline.
Driving systems 201
Driving and parking

: Yellow guide line at a distance of Additional messages for vehicles with
approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear PARKTRONIC
of the vehicle : Front warning display
; White guide line without turning the ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
steering wheel, vehicle width including operational readiness indicator
the exterior mirrors (static) = Rear warning display
= CLS Coupe: yellow guide line for the
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if
vehicle width including the exterior
PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 193), an
mirrors, for current steering wheel angle
additional operational readiness indicator will
(dynamic)
appear in COMAND display ;. If the
? Yellow lane marking tires at current
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or
steering wheel angle (dynamic) light up, warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the
COMAND display.
A Yellow guide line at a distance of

approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C Bumper
D Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the
transmission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Z
202 Driving systems
"Reverse parking" function Reverse perpendicular parking with the

steering wheel at an angle
Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel
Driving and parking
: Parking space marking

; CLS Coupe: yellow guide line for the
: White guide line without turning the
steering wheel, vehicle width including
the exterior mirrors (static)
(dynamic)
; CLS Coupe: yellow guide line for the
vehicle width including the exterior X Make sure that the rear view camera is
mirrors, for current steering wheel angle switched on (Y page 200).
(dynamic) The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X Drive past the parking space and bring the
= Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear vehicle to a standstill.
of the vehicle X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
? Red guide line at a distance of steering wheel in the direction of the

approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the parking space until yellow guide line ;
rear of the vehicle reaches parking space marking :.
X Keep the steering wheel in that position
X Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (Y page 200). and back up carefully.
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X With the help of white guide lines :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X Using white guide lines : as a guide,
carefully reverse until you reach the end
position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost
parallel in the parking space.
Backing up with the steering wheel turned
: CLS Coupe: yellow guide line for the
(dynamic)
Driving systems 203
X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly ATTENTION ASSIST

in front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel Important safety notes
with the parking space marking as ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
possible. driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
Driving and parking

or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
recognize them at all. The system is not a
substitute for a well-rested and attentive
driver.
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways.
It is active in the range between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).
Driving to the final position If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical
: White guide line at current steering wheel indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
angle concentration on the part of the driver, it
; Parking space marking suggests you take a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of
X Turn the steering wheel to the center fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking
position while the vehicle is stationary. the following criteria into account:
Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering
characteristics
Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length
of journey
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or
not occur at all:
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the
surface is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
: Red guide line at a distance of
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
rear of the vehicle
acceleration
; White lane with steering wheel straight
Rif you are predominantly driving slower
= End of parking space than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than
X Back up carefully until you have reached 112 mph (180 km/h)
the final position. Rif you are currently using COMAND or
Red guide line : is then at end of parking making a telephone call with it
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in Rif the time has been set incorrectly
the parking space. Rin active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
Z
204 Driving systems
Warning and display messages in the your driving style to suit the prevailing road
multifunction display and traffic conditions.
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- The system may be impaired or may not
board computer (Y page 228). function if:
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
Driving and parking
warned no sooner than 20 minutes after rain, fog or spray

your journey has begun. You then hear an Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or
intermittent warning tone twice and the covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
Attention Assist: Drowsiness vicinity of the camera
detected message appears in the Ron bends, on uphill gradients or downhill
multifunction display. gradients
X If necessary, take a break. Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or
X Press the a button to confirm the inoperative if:
message. Rpedestrians are partially or entirely
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good obscured by objects, e.g. parked vehicles
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night
do not take a break, you will be warned again View Assist Plus display is incomplete or
after 15 minutes at the earliest. The interrupted, e.g. by powerful light
precondition for this is that reflections
ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical Rpedestrians do not contrast adequately
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in from the background
concentration. Rpedestrians are not in an upright position,
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the e.g. sitting, squatting or lying
À symbol and OFF appear in the
multifunction display in the assistance
graphics display when the engine is running.
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you
continue your journey and starts assessing
your tiredness again if:
Ryou switch off the engine.
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break.
In addition to the illumination provided by the

Night View Assist Plus normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus
uses infrared light to illuminate the road.
Important safety notes Night View Assist Plus camera : picks up
Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not the infrared light and displays a monochrome
a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely image in COMAND. The image displayed in
on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by high-
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in beam headlamps. This enables you to see the
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in road's course and any obstacles in good time.
good time. Drive carefully and always adapt If pedestrian recognition is activated,
pedestrians recognized by the system are
Driving systems 205
highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus i The infrared headlamps only switch on
display. when the vehicle is being driven at speeds
Light from the headlamps of oncoming of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). This
vehicles does not affect the Night View Assist means that you do not have the full visual
Plus display in the multifunction display. This range while the vehicle is stationary and
Driving and parking

is also the case if you cannot switch on the cannot check whether Night View Assist
high-beam headlamps due to oncoming Plus is working.
traffic.
Pedestrian recognition
i Infrared light is not visible to the human
eye and therefore does not glare. Night
View Assist Plus can therefore remain
switched on even if there is oncoming
traffic.
Activating Night View Assist Plus

Activation conditions
You can only activate Night View Assist Plus
if:
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
: Night View Assist Plus display
lock.
; Pedestrian recognized
Rit is dark.
= Framing
Rthe light switch is in the Ã or L
? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition
position.
Rreverse gear has not been engaged. i Animals are not recognized by pedestrian
recognition.
Activating Night View Assist Plus
Night View Assist Plus is able to recognize
pedestrians by typical characteristics, e.g. a
silhouette in the shape of a person.
Pedestrian recognition is then switched on
automatically:
Rif Night View Assist Plus is activated
Rif you are driving faster than approximately
6 mph (10 km/h)
Rthe surroundings are dark, e.g. when
driving outside built-up areas without
street lighting
X Make sure that COMAND is switched on. If pedestrian recognition is active,
X Press button :. symbol ? appears. If pedestrians are
The Night View Assist Plus display appears detected, they are highlighted with framing
in the COMAND display. =. If the pedestrian recognition system has
You can read about how to adjust the brought a pedestrian to your attention, look
brightness of the COMAND display in the through the windshield to evaluate the
COMAND operating instructions. situation. The actual distance to objects and
Z
206 Driving systems
pedestrians cannot be gaged accurately by

looking at a screen.
It may be the case that objects are highlighted
as well as pedestrians.
Driving and parking
Fogged up or dirty windshield

G WARNING
Always remember that you must concentrate
primarily on driving the vehicle. A driver's
attention to the road must always be his/her
primary focus when driving. For your safety
and the safety of others: stop the vehicle
before attempting to clean fogged up
windows or the windshield area in front of the
Night View Assist Plus camera.
Please remember that when your vehicle is
traveling at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h) it covers a distance
of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.
If the windshield in front of the camera is

fogged up or dirty on the inside or outside, the
Night View Assist Plus display is affected.
X To defrost: check the automatic air
conditioning settings (Y page 140) and fold
down the camera cover (Y page 316).
X To defrost the inside of the windshield:
fold down the camera cover (Y page 316)
and clean the windshield (Y page 314).
Driving systems 207
Problems with Night View Assist Plus

The picture quality of The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.
Night View Assist Plus X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 126).
Driving and parking

has deteriorated.
The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a
car wash.
X Clean the windshield (Y page 314).
There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision.

X Replace the windshield.
The windshield is fogged up on the inside.

X Defrost the windshield (Y page 140).
The windshield is iced up.

X De-ice the windshield (Y page 139).
There is dirt on the inside of the windshield.

X Clean the inside of the windshield (Y page 314).
Lane Tracking package For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radar
sensor system must be operational.
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 207) and Lane Keeping G WARNING
Assist (Y page 209). Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
Blind Spot Assist placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
General notes
differential and overtake your vehicle
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
vehicle. It supports you from a speed of
an accident.
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your Always observe the traffic conditions
attention to vehicles detected in the carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
monitored area. If you then switch on the
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
corresponding turn signal to change lanes,
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
you will also receive a visual and audible
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses
sufficient distance to the side for other road
sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring
users and obstacles.
purposes.
i USA only:
Z
208 Driving systems
This device has been approved by the FCC If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
sensor is intended for use in an automotive be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
radar system only. Removing, tampering driving in the middle of their lane. This may
with, or altering the device will void any be the case if there are vehicles driving at the
Driving and parking
warranties, and is not permitted by the inner edge of their lanes.

FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in Due to the nature of the system:
any non-approved way. Rwarnings may be issued in error when
Any unauthorized modification to this driving close to crash barriers or similar
device could void the user’s authority to solid lane borders.
operate the equipment. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
Monitoring range of the sensors extended period next to long vehicles, such
In particular, the detection of obstacles can as trucks.
be impaired if: The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist
Rdirt
are integrated into the sides of the rear
on the sensors or anything else
bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of
dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain,
The sensors must not be covered, for
snow or spray example by cycle racks or overhanging loads.
Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or Following a severe impact or in the event of
bicycles damage to the bumpers, have the function of
Rthe road has very wide lanes the sensors checked at a qualified specialist
Rthe road has narrow lanes workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane not work properly.
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders Indicator and warning display
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at
speeds below approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range
are then not indicated.
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).
10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) the
next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.
Driving systems 209
indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
is operational. Rgive an unnecessary warning
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring Rnot give a warning
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the There is a risk of an accident.
Driving and parking

corresponding side lights up red. This warning Always pay particular attention to the traffic
is always emitted when a vehicle enters the situation and stay in lane, in particular if
blind spot monitoring range from behind or warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs if the difference in G WARNING
speed is less than 7 mph (12km/h). The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse return the vehicle to the original lane. There
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot is a risk of an accident.
Assist is no longer active. You should always steer, brake or accelerate
The brightness of the indicator/warning yourself, in particular if warned by Lane
lamps is adjusted automatically according to Keeping Assist.
the ambient light.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane
Collision warning Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range an accident nor override the laws of physics.
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account
corresponding turn signal, a double warning the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are
the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
are indicated by the flashing of red warning front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
lamp :. There are no further warning tones. time and for staying in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the
Switching on Blind Spot Assist vehicle in the lane.
X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist The system may be impaired or may not
(Y page 228) is activated in the on-board function if:
computer. Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to
insufficient illumination of the road, or due
ignition lock. to snow, rain, fog or spray
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
light up red for approximately
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
Lane Keeping Assist or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
Important safety notes vicinity of the camera
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane
G WARNING markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly construction work
recognize lane markings. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Z
210 Driving systems
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too (Y page 227) are shown in green. Lane
small and the lane markings thus cannot be Keeping Assist is ready for use.
detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. Standard
lanes branch off, cross one another or If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
Driving and parking
merge occurs if:

Rthe road is narrow and winding Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
General notes Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Adaptive
If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
Ryou brake hard.
front of your vehicle with camera :, which is
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
mounted at the top of the windshield. Lane
Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the obstacle or change lanes quickly.
road and warns you before you leave your Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
lane unintentionally. In order that you are warned only when
If you have chosen the function Display necessary and in good time if you cross the
Unit Speed-/Odometer:(Y page 229) and lane marking, the system recognizes certain
selected the display unit km in the on-board conditions and warns you accordingly.
computer, Active Lane Keeping Assist The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
supports you from a speed of 60 km/h. If the Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
miles display unit is selected, the assistance bend.
range begins at 40 mph. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
A warning may be given if a front wheel highway.
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
by means of intermittent vibration in the
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive(Y page 229).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
Driving systems 211
Active Driving Assistance package As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may
neither give warnings nor intervene in such
General notes situations. There is a risk of an accident.
The Active Driving Assistance package Always observe the traffic conditions
consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 177), carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Driving and parking

Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 211) and
Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 214). i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
Active Blind Spot Assist as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
General notes radar system only. Removing, tampering
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor with, or altering the device will void any
system, pointed toward the rear of the warranties, and is not permitted by the
vehicle, to monitor the area to the sides of the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A any non-approved way.
warning display in the exterior mirrors draws Any unauthorized modification to this
your attention to vehicles detected in the device could void the user’s authority to
monitored area. If you then switch on the operate the equipment.
corresponding turn signal to change lane, you
will also receive an optical and audible i Canada only: This device complies with
warning. If a risk of lateral collision is RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
detected, corrective braking may help you subject to the following two conditions:
avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting 1. This device may not cause harmful
brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist interference, and
evaluates the space in the direction of travel 2. this device must accept any interference
and at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active received, including interference that may
Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors which cause undesired operation of the device.
are pointed in the direction of travel. Removal, tampering, or altering of the
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a device will void any warranties, and is not
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you in any non-approved way.
when driving, the radar sensor system must Any unauthorized modification to this
be: device could void the user's authority to
Ractivated(Y page 232) operate the equipment.
Roperational Radar sensors
Important safety notes The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
integrated into the front and rear bumpers
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is
and behind a cover in the radiator grill. Make
not a substitute for attentive driving.
sure that the bumpers and the cover in the
G WARNING radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: rear sensors must not be covered, for
example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo.
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
Following a severe impact or in the event of
placing them in the blind spot area
damage to the bumpers, have the function of
Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
the radar sensors checked at a qualified
differential and overtake your vehicle
Z
212 Driving systems
specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist driving in the middle of their lane. This may
may otherwise no longer work properly. be the case if there are vehicles at the edge
of their lane.
Monitoring area
Due to the nature of the system:
G WARNING Rwarnings may be issued in error when
Driving and parking
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all driving close to crash barriers or similar
traffic situations and road users. There is a solid lane borders.
Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an
Always make sure that there is sufficient extended period next to long vehicles, such
distance on the side for other traffic or as trucks.
obstacles.
Indicator and warning display
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at
speeds below approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range
Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up are then not indicated.
to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and When active Blind Spot Assist is activated,
directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights
diagram. up yellow at speeds of up to
The detection of obstacles can be impaired in 20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph
the case of: (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and
active Blind Spot Assist is operational.
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or
20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the
spray corresponding side lights up red. This warning
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not is always given when a vehicle enters the
indicated or indicated with a delay. blind spot monitoring range from behind or
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or the warning only occurs if the difference in
bicycles, or may only detect them too late. speed is less than 7 mph (12km/h).
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not Spot Assist is no longer active.
Driving systems 213
The brightness of the indicator/warning course-correcting brake application is carried

lamps is adjusted automatically according to out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a
the ambient light. collision.
If a course-correcting brake application
Visual and acoustic collision warning
occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the
If you switch on the turn signals to change
Driving and parking

exterior mirror and a dual warning tone
lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side
sounds. In addition, the display shown in the
monitoring range, you receive a visual and
lower image appears in the multifunction
acoustic collision warning. You then hear a
display.
double warning tone and red warning
lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. An
detected vehicles are indicated by the
inappropriate course-correcting brake
flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no
application may be interrupted at any time if
further warning tones.
you steer slightly in the opposite direction or
Course-correcting brake application accelerate, for example.
G WARNING The course-correcting brake application is
available in the speed range between
A course-correcting brake application cannot
20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of
an accident. Either no braking application, or a course-
correcting brake application adapted to the
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
driving situation occurs if:
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
you or makes a course-correcting brake Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
application. Always maintain a safe distance barriers, located on both sides of your
at the sides. vehicle.
Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
RESP® is switched off.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
X Make sure that the radar sensor system
(Y page 232) and Active Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 228) are activated in the on-board
computer.
ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a light up red for approximately
lateral collision in the monitoring range, a 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Z
214 Driving systems
Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot

continuously keep your vehicle in its lane.
General notes
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
clearly detect lane markings.
Driving and parking
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist

can:
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
Rnot give a warning or intervene

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area Always pay particular attention to the traffic
in front of your vehicle by means of situation and keep within the lane, especially
camera : at the top of the windshield. Active if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on Terminate the intervention in a non-critical
the road and warns you before you leave your driving situation.
lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the
The system may be impaired or may not
warning, a lane-correcting application of the
function if:
brakes can bring the vehicle back into the
original lane. Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to
If you have chosen the function Display insufficient illumination of the road, or due
Unit Speed-/Odometer:(Y page 229) and to snow, rain, fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
selected the display unit km in the on-board
computer, Active Lane Keeping Assist the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
supports you from a speed of 60 km/h. If surface is wet)
miles is selected as the display unit, the Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
assistance range begins at 40 mph. or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you vicinity of the camera
when driving, the radar sensor system must Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear
be operational. bumper or in the radiator grill are dirty, e.g.
due to snow
Important safety notes Rthere are no, several or unclear lane
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road
Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the construction work
risk of accident nor override the laws of Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
take into account road, weather or traffic
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
conditions. It cannot detect possible road and
traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist small and the lane markings thus cannot be
is only an aid. You are responsible for the detected
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
speed, for braking in good time and for lanes branch off, cross one another or
staying in your lane. merge
Driving systems 215
Rthe road is narrow and winding If you leave your lane, under certain
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane on one side. This is meant to assist you in
and there are broken lane markings detected, bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.
no lane-correcting brake application is made. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
Driving and parking

display : appears in the multifunction
Warning vibration in the steering wheel display.
A warning may be given if a front wheel This function is available in the range between
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and
by means of intermittent vibration in the 200 km/h).
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
A lane-correcting brake application can only
Lane-correcting brake application be made after driving over a solid,
recognizable lane marking. Before this, a
G WARNING warning must be given by means of
A lane-correcting brake application cannot intermittent vibration in the steering wheel.
always bring the vehicle back into the original In addition, a lane with lane markings on both
lane. There is a risk of an accident. sides must be recognized. The brake
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, application also slightly reduces vehicle
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns speed.
you or makes a lane-correcting brake
application.
i A further lane-correcting brake
application can only occur after your
vehicle has returned to the original lane.
G WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect No lane-correcting brake application occurs
traffic conditions or road users. In very rare if:
cases, the system may make an inappropriate Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or
brake application, e.g. after intentionally accelerate.
driving over a solid lane marking. There is a Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
risk of an accident. Ryou have switched on the turn signals.
An inappropriate brake application may be Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
the opposite direction. Always make sure that
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind
there is sufficient distance on the side for
Spot Assist.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
other traffic or obstacles.
high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration.
RESP® is switched off.
Rthe transmission is not in position D.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has
been detected and displayed.
Active Lane Keeping Assist may is unable to
detect other road or traffic conditions. An
inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you:
Z
216 Driving systems
Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ruse a turn signal Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
Rclearly brake or accelerate bend.
A lane-correcting brake application is Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
interrupted automatically if: highway.
Driving and parking
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind The warning vibration occurs later if:
Spot Assist. Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive(Y page 229).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 227) are shown in green. Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
If Standard is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such
as ABS, BAS or ESP®.
If Adaptive is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In
this event, the warnings are suppressed
for a certain period of time.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid
an obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when

necessary and in good time if you cross the
lane marking, the system recognizes certain
conditions and warns you accordingly.
217
On-board computer and displays

Displays and operation .................... 219
Menus and submenus ...................... 222
Display messages ............................. 237
Indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 264
218 Important safety notes
Useful information multifunction display. You should therefore

make sure your vehicle is operating safely at

i This Operator's Manual describes all all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not
models and all standard and optional operating safely may cause an accident.
equipment of your vehicle available at the For an overview, see the instrument panel
time of publication of the Operator's illustration (Y page 31).
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and
communication equipment integrated in the
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the
equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or
malfunctioned, you may not recognize
function restrictions in systems relevant to
safety. The operating safety of your vehicle
may be impaired. There is a risk of an
accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
You must observe the legal requirements for

the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer.
The on-board computer only shows messages
or warnings from certain systems in the
Displays and operation 219
Displays and operation

Instrument cluster
: Speedometer with segments (Y page 220)

; Multifunction display (Y page 221)
= Tachometer (Y page 219)
? Coolant temperature (Y page 219)
A Fuel gauge
Coolant temperature display The coolant temperature gauge is in the

instrument cluster on the left-hand side
G WARNING (Y page 31).
Opening the hood when the engine is Under normal operating conditions and with
overheated or when there is a fire in the the specified coolant level, the coolant
engine compartment could expose you to hot temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
gases or other service products. There is a
risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before Tachometer
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
this could damage the engine.
and contact the fire department.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
! A display message is shown if the coolant engine's overrevving range.
temperature is too high. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
If the coolant temperature is over engine when the red band is reached.
248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The
engine will otherwise be damaged.
Z
220 Displays and operation
Outside temperature display Operating the on-board computer

You should pay special attention to road Overview

conditions when temperatures are around
freezing point.
The outside temperature display is in the
multifunction display (Y page 221).
Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.
Speedometer with segments

The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
RCruise control activated (Y page 175):
The segments light up from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 177):
One or two segments in the set speed : Multifunction display

range light up. ; Right control panel
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: = Switches on the Voice Control System;
The segments between the speed of the see the separate operating instructions
vehicle in front and the stored speed light ? Back button
up. A Left control panel
X To activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Displays and operation 221
Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume

X
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar
; 8 RMute
9 Press briefly:
Back button
: RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly:
RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack
stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off the Voice Control
a video scene System; see the separate
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: operating instructions
switches to the phone book and RHides display messages/calls
selects a name or telephone up the last Trip menu function
number used
9 Press and hold: RExits the telephone book/redial
: RIn
memory
the Audio menu: selects the
previous/next station or selects % Press and hold:
an audio track or a video scene RCalls up the standard display in
using rapid scrolling
the Trip menu
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open Multifunction display
a RConfirms a selection/display
message
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station
Right control panel : Text field

~ RRejects or ends a call ; Menu bar
RExits phone book/redial = Drive program (Y page 156)
memory ? Transmission position (Y page 155)
A Permanent display: outside temperature
6 RMakes or accepts a call
or speed (Y page 230)
RSwitches to the redial memory
X To show menu bar;: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
Menu bar ; disappears after a few seconds.
Z
222 Menus and submenus
Text field : shows the selected menu or Trip menu

submenu as well as display messages.

The following messages may appear in the
Standard display
multifunction display:
Z Shift recommendation (Y page 161)
XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 196)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 122)
¤ ECO start/stop function
(Y page 150) X Press and hold the % button on the
ë HOLD function (Y page 186) steering wheel until the Trip menu with
trip odometer : and odometer ; is
shown.
Menus and submenus
Menu overview Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to call up the menu bar and
select a menu.
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 220).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
RTrip menu (Y page 222) Example: trip computer "From Start"
RNavi menu (navigation instructions) : Distance
(Y page 224) ; Time
RAudio menu (Y page 225) = Average speed
RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 226) ? Average fuel consumption
RDriveAssist menu (assistance) X Press the = or ; button on the
(Y page 227) steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
RServ. menu (Y page 229) X Press 9 or : to select From Start
RSettings menu (settings) (Y page 229) or From Reset.
RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 234)
The values in the From Start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey whilst
the values in the From Reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 223).
The From Start trip computer is
automatically reset when:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
Menus and submenus 223
The From Reset trip computer is Digital speedometer

automatically reset if the value exceeds
9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.
ECO display
: Shift recommendation (Y page 161)

; Digital speedometer
X Press the = or ; button on the
Example: ECO display steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Select ECO DISPLAY with 9 or :. i If the gearshift recommendation is shown
at the top of the multifunction display, it is
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
no longer shown at the bottom of the
than four hours, the ECO display will be
automatically reset.
Further information on the ECO display
Resetting values
(Y page 170).
Displaying the range and current fuel

consumption
Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
steering wheel to select the Trip menu. function that you wish to reset.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the X Press the a button.
current fuel consumption (not for AMG X Press the : button to select Yes and
vehicles) and the approximate range. press the a button to confirm.
The approximate range that can be covered You can reset the values of the following
depends on the fuel level and your current functions:
driving style. If there is only a small amount RTripodometer
of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows
R"From Start" trip computer
a vehicle being refueled C instead of the
R"From Reset" trip computer
range.
RECO display
Z
i When you reset the values in the "ECO Change of direction announced without a
display", the values in the trip computer lane recommendation

"From start" are likewise reset. When you
reset the values in the trip computer "From
start", the values in the "ECO display" are
likewise reset.
Navigation system menu

: Road into which the change of direction
Displaying navigation instructions
leads
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display ; Distance to change of direction and visual
shows navigation instructions. For more distance display
information on navigation, see the separate = Change-of-direction symbol
operating instructions.
When a change of direction is announced, you
X Switch on COMAND (see the separate
will see symbol = for the change of direction
operating instructions).
and distance graphic ;. The distance
indicator shortens towards the top of the
steering wheel to select the Navi menu. display as you approach the point of the
announced change of direction.
Route guidance not active
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
: Direction of travel
; Current road : Road into which the change of direction
leads
Route guidance active ; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
No change of direction announced
= New lane during a change of direction
? Uninterrupted lane
A Lane recommendation
B Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, the system can display
lane recommendation = for the next change
: Distance to the destination of direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
; Distance to the next change of direction
Lane recommendations are only displayed if
= Current road
the relevant data is available on the digital
? "Follow the road's course" symbol map.
Other status indicators of the i For information on switching waveband

navigation system and storing stations; see the separate
RO: you have reached the destination or an
operating instructions.
intermediate destination. i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
RNew Route... or Calculating Route: normal radio.
calculating a new route For more information on satellite radio
ROff Map or Off Road: the vehicle position operation, see the separate operating
is outside the area of the digital map (off- instructions.
map position).
RNo Route: no route could be calculated to Operating an audio player or audio
the selected destination. media
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
Example: CD/DVD changer display

: Current title
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the
: Waveband
equipment installed in the vehicle.
; Station frequency with memory position X Switch on COMAND and activate audio
CD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see the
i Station ; is displayed with the station separate operating instructions.
frequency or station name. The memory X Press the = or ; button on the
position is only displayed along with steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
station ; if this has been stored.
X To select the next/previous track:
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND briefly press the 9 or : button.
and select Radio; see the separate X To select a track from the track list
operating instructions. (rapid scrolling): press and hold the
X Press the = or ; button on the 9 or : button until desired
steering wheel to select the Audio menu. track : has been reached.
X To select a stored station: briefly press
If you press and hold 9 or :, the
the 9 or : button. rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all
X To select a station from the station audio drives or data carriers support this
list: press and briefly hold the 9 function.
or : button. If track information is stored on the audio
If no station list is received: device or medium, the multifunction display
X To select a station using the station will show the number and title of the track.
search: press and briefly hold the 9 The current track does not appear in audio
or : button. AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
Z
Video DVD operation X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to

COMAND; see the separate operating

instructions.
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display
messages in the multifunction display:
RPhone READY or the name of the network
Example: CD/DVD changer display
: Current scene provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive.
X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD; RPhone No Service: there is no network
see the separate operating instructions. available or the mobile phone is searching
X Press the = or ; button on the for a network.
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous scene: Accepting a call
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until desired
scene : has been reached.
Telephone menu Example: incoming call

X Press the 6 button on the steering
Introduction
wheel to accept an incoming call.
G WARNING If someone calls you when you are in the
If you operate information systems and Tel menu, a display message appears in the
communication equipment integrated in the multifunction display.
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted You can accept a call even if you are not in
from traffic conditions. You could also lose the Tel menu.
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Rejecting or ending a call
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this X Press the ~ button on the steering
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention wheel.
to traffic conditions and operate the You can end or reject a call even if you are not
equipment when the vehicle is stationary. in the Tel menu.
When telephoning, you must observe the Dialing a number from the phone book
legal requirements for the country in which
you are currently driving. X Press the = or ; button on the
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
separate operating instructions). X Press the 9, : or a button to
X Switch on COMAND (see the separate switch to the phone book.

operating instructions).
X Press the 9 or : button to select the Assistance menu

desired name.
or
Introduction
X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
the 9 or : button for longer than
one second.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing. In the DriveAssist menu, you have the
following options:
or
RDisplaying the assistance graphic
X If there is more than one number for a
(Y page 227)
particular name: press the 6 or a
RActivating/deactivating
button to display the numbers.
ESP®(Y page 227)
RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake
number you want to dial.
(Y page 228)
X Press the 6 or a button to start
RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION
dialing.
ASSIST (Y page 228)
or
RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
X To exit the telephone book: press the
or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 228)
~ or % button.
RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist
Redialing (Y page 229)
The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialed in the redial memory. Displaying the assistance graphic
X Press the = or ; button on the X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Tel menu. steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
X Press the 6 button to switch to the menu.
redial memory. X Press the 9 or : button to select
X Press the 9 or : button to select the Assist. Graphic.
desired name or number. X Press the a button.
X Press the 6 or a button to start The DISTRONIC PLUS assistance graphic
dialing. appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 184).
or
X To exit the redial memory: press the
~ or % button. Deactivating/activating ESP®
section in the description of ESP
(Y page 68).
Z
G WARNING Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®

If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer Brake

stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles
risk of skidding and an accident. with DISTRONIC PLUS.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
described in the following.
to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the
following situations: PRE-SAFE Brake.
Rwhen X Press the a button.
using snow chains
Rin
The current selection is displayed.
deep snow
X To activate/deactivate: press the a
Ron sand or gravel
button again.
Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMG
vehicles (Y page 70). When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the
assistance graphic shows the æ symbol in
For further information about ESP®, see
(Y page 68). the multifunction display.
X Start the engine.
For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake,
see (Y page 72).
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
menu. ASSIST
ESP. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
X Press the a button.
X Press 9 or : to select Attention
Assist.
button again.
ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in the instrument cluster lights up
button again.
continuously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not À symbol and OFF appear in the
available due to a malfunction. multifunction display in the assistance
display when the engine is running.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 269). For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (Y page 203).
Observe the information on display messages
(Y page 238).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
Blind Spot Asst.
X Press the a button. RCalling up display messages in message

The current selection is displayed. memory (Y page 237)
X To activate/deactivate: press the a RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
button again. system (Y page 342)
RChecking the tire pressure electronically
If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors
Deactivated or Act. Blind Spot Asst. (Y page 342)
Sensors Deactivated message appears, RCalling up the service due date
the radar sensor system is deactivated. (Y page 310)

X Switch on the radar sensor system
(Y page 232).
Settings menu
For further information about Blind Spot
Assist, see (Y page 207). Introduction
For further information about Active Blind
Spot Assist, see (Y page 211).
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping

Assist
In the Sett. menu, you have the following
options:
Lane Keep. Asst. RChanging the instrument cluster settings
(Y page 229)
The current selection is displayed. RChanging the light settings (Y page 230)
X Press a to confirm.
RChanging the vehicle settings
X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, (Y page 232)
Standard or Adaptive. RChanging the convenience settings
X Press the a button to save the setting. (Y page 233)
For further information about Lane Keeping RRestoring the factory settings
Assist, see (Y page 209). (Y page 234)

For further information about Active Lane
Keeping Assist, see (Y page 214). Instrument cluster
Selecting the unit of measurement for
distance
Maintenance menu
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function allows you to choose whether
certain displays appear in kilometers or miles
in the multifunction display.
In the Serv. menu, you have the following

options:
Z
You can determine whether the multifunction i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph
display shows some messages in miles or (Canada).

kilometers.
X Press the = or ; button on the Lights
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
Setting the brightness of the instrument
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
cluster lighting and switches
Inst. Cluster submenu. The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
X Press a to confirm. displays and the controls in the vehicle
X Press the : or 9 button to select the interior can be adjusted using the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: Brightness Display/Switches: function.
function. X Press the = or ; button on the
You will see the selected setting: km or steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
miles. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Lights submenu.
The selected unit of measurement for X Press a to confirm.
distance applies to: X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu Brightness Display/Switches:
Rodometer and the trip odometer function.
Rtrip computer You will see the selected setting.
Rcurrent consumption and the range X Press a to confirm.
Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
menu brightness to any level from Level 1 to

Rcruise control Level 5 (bright).
X Press the a or % button to save the
RDISTRONIC PLUS
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
setting.
If the light switch is set to Ã, T or
Selecting the permanent display function L, the brightness is dependent upon
You can determine whether the multifunction the brightness of the ambient light.
display permanently shows your speed or the i The light sensor in the instrument cluster
outside temperature.
automatically controls the brightness of
X Press the = or ; button on the the multifunction display.
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. In daylight, the displays in the instrument
X Press the : or 9 button to select the cluster are not illuminated.
Inst. Cluster submenu.
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
off
i This function is not available in Canada.
Permanent Display: function.
You will see the selected setting Outside
Temperature or Speedometer [km/h] steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
(USA)/Speedometer [mph] (Canada). X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Press the a button to save the setting. Lights submenu.

X Press : or 9 to select the Day Activating/deactivating surround

Lights: function. lighting and exterior lighting delayed
If the Day Lights: have been switched on, switch-off
the cone of light and the W symbol in X Press the = or ; button on the
the multifunction display are shown in red. steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Further information on daytime running Lights submenu.

lamps (Y page 117). X Press a to confirm.
X Press : or 9 to select the
Setting the brightness of the ambient
lighting Surround Lighting function.
When the Surround Lighting function is
activated, the light cone and the area
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. around the vehicle are displayed in red in
X Press the : or 9 button to select the the multifunction display.
Lights submenu. X Press the a button to save the setting.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the
exterior lighting temporarily:
Amb. Light +/-. function.
You will see the selected setting. X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.
X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
ignition lock.
brightness to any level from Off to Level The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is
5 (bright). deactivated.
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is
setting.
reactivated the next time you start the
Setting the ambient lighting color engine.
X Press the = or ; button on the If you have activated the Surround
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. Lighting function and the light switch is set
to Ã, the following functions are activated
when it is dark:
Lights submenu. RSurround lighting: the exterior lighting
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
X Press the : or 9 button to select the with the SmartKey. If you start the engine,
Ambient Light Color function. the surround lighting is switched off and
X Press a to confirm. the automatic headlamp mode is activated
X Press the : or 9 button to set the
(Y page 117).
RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
color to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR.
exterior lighting remains lit for 60seconds
after the engine is switched off. If you close
setting.
all the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior
lighting goes off after 5 seconds.
i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
when the surround lighting and delayed
Z
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the If you activate the Automatic Door Lock
following light up: function, the vehicle is centrally locked above

RParking lamps a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
RLow-beam headlamps For further information on the automatic
RDaytime running lamps locking feature, see (Y page 83).
RSide marker lamps Activating/deactivating the acoustic
RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,
Activating/deactivating the interior
an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the
lighting delayed switch-off
vehicle.
If you activate the Interior Lighting
Delay function, the interior lighting remains
on for 20seconds after you remove the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
X Press the = or ; button on the submenu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu. Acoustic Lock function.

X Press a to confirm. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
the & symbol in the multifunction
X Press : or 9 to select the Light.
display lights up red.
Delay function.
When the Interior Lighting Delay
function is activated, the vehicle interior is Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
displayed in red in the multifunction system
display.
X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle
Vehicle submenu.
Activating/deactivating the automatic X Press a to confirm.
door locking mechanism X Press the 9 or : button to select
X Press the = or ; button on the Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. You will see the selected setting: Enabled
X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle or Disabled.
submenu. X Press the a button to save the setting.
X Press a to confirm. The following systems are switched off when

X Press : or 9 to select the Auto. the radar sensor system is deactivated:
Door Locks function. RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 177)
When the Automatic Door Lock function RBAS PLUS (Y page 67)
is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72)
in red in the multifunction display.
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 207)
RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 211)
Convenience X Press the : or 9 button to select the

Belt Adjustment function.
Activating/deactivating the EASY- When the Belt Adjustment function is
ENTRY/EXIT feature activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed
G WARNING in red in the multifunction display.
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts X Press the a button to save the setting.
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle For further information on belt adjustment,
occupants – particularly children – could see (Y page 57).
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is Switching the fold-in mirrors with the
making adjustments, make sure that no one locking feature on/off
has any body parts in the sweep of the This function is only available on vehicles with
steering wheel. the memory function (Y page 112).
If somebody becomes trapped: When you activate the Auto. Mirror
Rpress one of the memory function position Folding function, the exterior mirrors are
buttons, or folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you
Rmove the switch for steering wheel
unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the
exterior mirrors fold out again.
adjustment in the opposite direction to that
in which the steering wheel is moving. X Press the = or ; button on the
The adjustment process is stopped. steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the = or ; button on the Convenience submenu.
steering wheel to select the Settings X Press a to confirm.
menu. X Press : or 9 to select the Auto.
Mirror Folding function.
Convenience submenu. If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is
X Press a to confirm. activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is
X Press the : or 9 button to select the displayed in red in the multifunction
Easy Entry/Exit: function. display.
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is X Press the a button to save the setting.
activated, the vehicle steering wheel is
displayed in red in the multifunction
display.
Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT

feature (Y page 108).
Switching the belt adjustment on/off
: To fold the exterior mirrors in or out
Convenience submenu.
X Press a to confirm. If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors by pressing button :, the exterior
Z
mirrors will not fold out automatically Upshift indicator UP= indicates that the
(Y page 110). engine has reached the overrevving range

You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors when in the manual gearshift program.
using button :. Upshift indicator UP= fades out other
messages until you have shifted up.
Restoring the factory settings When the engine oil temperature is below
176 ‡ (80 †) the oil temperature is shown in
blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. this time.
Factory Setting submenu. SETUP
The Reset All Settings? message
appears.
X Press the : or 9 button to select
No or Yes.
X Press a to confirm the selection.
If you have selected Yes, the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message. : Drive program (C/SS+/M)
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running ; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling
Lights function in the Lights submenu is mode (SPORT)
only reset if the vehicle is stationary. = Suspension tuning (COMFORT/SPORT/
SPORT+)
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®
AMG menu in AMG vehicles (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the
AMG displays suspension tuning.
steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until
SETUP is displayed.
or
X Briefly press the AMG button on the center
console (Y page 191).
: Digital speedometer
; Gear indicator
= Upshift indicator
? Engine oil temperature
A Coolant temperature
B ECO start/stop function status indicator
(Y page 151)
RACETIMER Starting a new lap

Displaying and starting RACETIMER
: RACETIMER
; Fastest lap time (best lap)
: Lap
= Lap
; RACETIMER
X Press a to confirm New Lap.
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function i It is possible to store a maximum of
on public roads. sixteen laps. The 16th lap can only be
You can start the RACETIMER when the completed with Finish Lap.
engine is running or if the SmartKey is in
Stopping the RACETIMER
position 2 in the ignition lock.
to select the AMG menu.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACETIMER is shown.
X To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
X Press the % button on the steering
Displaying the intermediate time wheel.
X Press a to confirm Yes.
The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you

stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to
position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the
SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then press
a to confirm Start, timing is continued.
X Press the = or ; button to select Resetting the current lap
Interm. Time. X Stop the RACETIMER.
X Press the = or ; button to select
The intermediate time is displayed for five Reset Lap.
seconds.
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Z
Deleting all laps Lap statistics

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER : Lap

is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are ; Lap time
deleted. = Average lap speed
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If ? Lap length
you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap
A Top speed during lap
does not have to be reset.
X Reset the current lap. This function is only available if you have
X Press a to confirm Reset.
stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the
multifunction display. X Press the = or ; button on the
X Press the : button to select Yes and steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
press the a button to confirm. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
All laps are deleted. lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
Overall statistics The fastest lap is indicated by flashing
symbol :.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.
: RACETIMER overall evaluation

; Total time driven
= Average speed
? Distance covered
A Maximum speed
This function is shown if you have stored at
least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation is shown.
Display messages 237
Display messages

Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 186)
RParking (Y page 167)
Hiding display messages

X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the
messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can
call up the display messages:
X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Z
238 Display messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability

Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and
Currently hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering
movements, at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start
assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
Operator's Manual
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
G WARNING

can increase.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
unavailable due to a malfunction.
Inoperative See
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
Operator's Manual
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNING
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering
movements, at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
Z

T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-

SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due
÷ to a malfunction.
Inoperative See BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
can increase.
F(USA You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
only)J(Canada X Release the parking brake.
only)
Release Parking
Brake
$(USA There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning
only)J(Canada lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
only) sounds.
Check Brake Fluid G WARNING
Level
The braking effect may be impaired.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 167).
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
Check Brake Pad
Wear
G One or more main features of the mbrace system are

malfunctioning.
mbrace Inoperative X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified
PRE-SAFE Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant

Inoperative See safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
Operator's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.

Functions Possible causes are:
Currently Limited Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
See Operator's
Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.
Manual
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display

message disappears.
PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper
(Y page 315).
X Restart the engine.
X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 70).
PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS

Functions Limited or the distance warning signal may also have failed.
See Operator's X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Manual
Z

6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint

System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
SRS Malfunction cluster.
Service Required
G WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 41).
6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6

warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Front Left
Malfunction G WARNING
Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
or Front Right triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
Malfunction be triggered.
Service Required There is an increased risk of injury.
6 G WARNING
Rear Left The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
Malfunction triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
Service Required be triggered.
or Rear Right There is an increased risk of injury.
Malfunction SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
Service Required warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window

curtain air bag.
Left Side Curtain The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required G WARNING
or Right Side The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
Curtain Airbag unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
malfunction triggered.
Service Required

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
Airbag Disabled deactivated during the journey, although:
See Operator's Ran adult
Manual or
Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-
passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may
interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag
may not be triggered in the event of an accident.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the
following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-
passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 47).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in
the multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary
system checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
Z


For further information about the Occupant Classification System,
see (Y page 47).
Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
Airbag Enabled enabled during the journey, even though:
See Operator's Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the
Manual system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger
seat
or
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional

weight on the seat.
G WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag
may be triggered unintentionally.
X Switch the ignition off.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the
center console and the multifunction display and check the
following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and
remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant
Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag
and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 47).
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See

Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in
the multifunction display.
X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary
system checks have been completed.
X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System,

see (Y page 47).
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

Check Left
Cornering Light or
Check Right
Cornering Light
b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

Check Left Low
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Rear Left
Turn Signal or
Check Rear Right
Turn Signal
Z

b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Front Left
Turn Signal or
Check Front Right
Turn Signal
b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is

defective.
Check Left Mirror X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Turn Signal or
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal
b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

Check Center Brake
Lamp
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
and Brake Lamps or
Check Right Tail
and Brake Lamps
b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

Check Left High
Beam or Check
Right High Beam
b The rear fog lamp is defective.

Rear Fog Lamp
b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
Parking Lamp or
Check Front Right
Parking Lamp
b The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.
Check Left Reverse
Lamp or Check or
Right Reverse Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.
Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.

Check Rear Left
Sidemarker Lamp or
Check Rear Right
Sidemarker Lamp
b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.

Check Left Daytime
Running Light or
Check Right
Daytime Running
Light
b The active light function is defective.

Active Light
System Inoperative
b The exterior lighting is defective.

Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
b The light sensor is defective.

Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Z

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily

Assist Currently inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rvisibility
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,

the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is
displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Engine
+ The coolant level is too low.
Check Coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
Level See cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
Operator's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 308).
X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
? The fan motor is faulty.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

? The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING
Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).
Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Z

# The battery is not being charged.

Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Open the hood.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:
4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

Check Engine Oil
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
Level At Next
Refueling (Y page 307).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 308).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4 AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.
X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
Check Engine Oil
(Y page 307).
Level (Add 1 quart)
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 308).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
Gas Cap Loose X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
Driving systems
À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue

or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
Attention Assist: also sounds.
Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.

Attention Assist
Inoperative
Z

¨ Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
Vehicle Rising
¨ The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A

Vehicle Rising X Do not pull away.
Please Wait
The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
¨ You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.
AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short
Stop Vehicle period.
Vehicle Too Low
X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.

X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front
fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement
is too large.
X Listen for scraping sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the
vehicle.
¨ The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling

characteristics may be affected.
Malfunction X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.

Off
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 186).
Radar Sensors The radar sensor system is deactivated.

Deactivated See X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 232).
Operator's Manual

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
Assist Currently and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
or Active Lane
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Keeping Assist
Currently Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
Unavailable See When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
Operator's Manual message disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
X Clean the windshield.
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
Assist X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Inoperative or
Active Lane
Keeping Assist
Inoperative
Z

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily
Currently inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe sensors are dirty.
Operator's Manual Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
or Active Blind
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
Spot Assist
Currently range.
Unavailable See Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
Operator's Manual electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
message disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
X Clean the sensors (Y page 315).
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
Inoperative or The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
Active Blind Spot mirrors.
Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
Canceled fastened.
X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel

while steering intervention was active.
X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the
multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.

X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 196).

Park Assist You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
Inoperative maneuvers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after
approximately ten minutes (Y page 196).
X Switch off and restart the engine.

PARKTRONIC is defective.
Park Assist The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

Finished The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 177).
If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been
Available temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 177).
Z

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.

Currently Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Operator's Manual
Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.

message disappears.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper
(Y page 315).
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.

Inoperative The following may have also failed:
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS)
RPRE-SAFE® Brake
DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
Suspended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

- - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 177).

Cruise Control Cruise control is defective.
Inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
- - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 175).
Z
Tires

Check The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
Tire Pressure Soon loss in pressure.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a
flat tire (Y page 321).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire
pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 342).
Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display
Then Restart Run message and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 342).
Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rectify The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 342).
X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 345).

Check The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
Tires The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
increase.
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 342).
Warning The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
Tire Malfunction wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
G WARNING
If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:
Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.
Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
Z

Tire Press. Monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
Currently from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
Unavailable malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.
TirePress. There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
Sensor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified
Tire Pressure The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
Monitor The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
Inoperative No X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
Wheel Sensors The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle

Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
To Start Engine position R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer
Malfunction being charged.
Apply Brake You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
to Shift from 'P' position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
Risk of Rolling The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N
Away or D.
Vehicle Not in 'P' A warning tone also sounds.
X Shift the transmission to position P.

Service Required You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
Do Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds.
Visit Dealer If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving.

when Vehicle is X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
Stationary attention to road and traffic conditions.
N the trunk lid is open.

X Close the trunk lid.
M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all the doors.
_ The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or

right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.
Rear Left Backrest X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Not Latched or
Rear Right
Backrest Not
Latched
_ The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. A

Lock Seat Backrest X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Front Left or Lock
Seat Backrest
Front Right
Z

Ð The power steering is malfunctioning.

Power Steering
Malfunction See G WARNING
Operator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 309).
SmartKey
Â You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
Â The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.
Take Your Key from
Ignition
Â The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key
Â The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 79).
Replace Key Battery

Â The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and
is only a reminder.
Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.
Key The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.
X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.

Key Not Detected
(red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running

because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.

X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO
Key Not Detected
functions in the vehicle.
(white display
message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
Key Detected in X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
Vehicle
Z
264 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

Â The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.

KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A
Remove 'Start' warning tone also sounds.
Button and Insert
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
Key
desired position.
Â At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Close Doors to
Lock Vehicle
Indicator and warning lamps in the

instrument cluster
overview
L Low-beam headlamps
(Y page 118)
T Parking lamps (Y page 118)
K High-beam headlamps
(Y page 119)
#! Turn signal (Y page 119)
ü Seat belts (Y page 265)
$ (USA) Brakes (Y page 266)
J (Canada) Brakes (Y page 266)
! ABS (Y page 267)
÷ ESP®(Y page 269)
å ESP® OFF (Y page 269)
M SPORT handling mode in
AMG vehicles (Y page 270)
6 SRS (Y page 272)
; Check Engine (Y page 273)
8 Reserve fuel (Y page 273)
? Coolant (Y page 273)
· Distance warning signal
(Y page 275)
h Tire pressure monitor
(Y page 276)
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 265
Safety

Seat belts

ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
After starting the to fasten their seat belts.
engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).
belt warning lamp lights
up for 6 seconds.
ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.

After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).
engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases.
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds
for up to six seconds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).
warning lamp lights up The warning lamp goes out.
after the engine starts,
as soon as the driver's There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
or the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
door is closed. them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. You
The red seat belt are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven
warning lamp flashes faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
and an intermittent X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56).
audible warning The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
sounds. ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. You are driving

faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven faster than
15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
Z
Safety systems

$ (USA only) G WARNING
J (Canada only) The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking
The red brake system characteristics may be affected.
warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident.
while the engine is
running. A warning tone
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
also sounds.
display.
$ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
J (Canada only) G WARNING
The red brake system
The braking effect may be impaired.
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is There is a risk of an accident.
running. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the
malfunction.
display.

! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a
The yellow ABS warning malfunction. BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic
lamp is lit while the Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
engine is running. function and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for
example.
G WARNING
can increase.
display.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic
transmission, will not be available.
Z

! ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD

The yellow ABS warning (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®,
lamp is lit while the PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function, hill start assist are therefore
engine is running. also deactivated, for example.
Rself-diagnosisis not yet complete.
Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNING
can increase.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight
steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.

! EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,
The yellow ABS warning BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
lamp is lit while the function and hill start assist are also unavailable, for example.
engine is running. A ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
warning tone also
sounds. G WARNING
can increase.
display.
$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,
J (Canada only) BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
÷å! function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.
The red brake warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
lamp, the yellow ESP® G WARNING
and ESP® OFF warning
lamps and the yellow
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is
running. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
can increase.
display.
Z

÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of

The yellow ESP® skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
warning lamp flashes Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
while the vehicle is in X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
motion. necessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 68).

å ESP® is deactivated.
The yellow ESP® OFF G WARNING
warning lamp is lit while
® ®
the engine is running. If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
X Reactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 68).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:

X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
M SPORT handling mode is activated.

AMG vehicles only: G WARNING
The yellow SPORT
handling mode warning When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to
lamp is lit while the stabilize the vehicle.
engine is running. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the
conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT
handling mode" section (Y page 70).

÷å ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD
The yellow ESP® and function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction.
ESP® OFF warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
lamps are lit while the
G WARNING
engine is running.
increase.
display.
÷å ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
The yellow ESP® and temporarily unavailable.
ESP® OFF warning BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
engine is running. self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNING
increase.
X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight
steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.
Z

$ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake applied.
J (Canada only) X Release the parking brake.
The red brake system The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
warning lamp comes on
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning tone
also sounds.
6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint

The red SRS warning System).
lamp is lit while the G WARNING
engine is running.
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 41).
Engine

; There may be a malfunction, for example:
The yellow Check Rin the engine management
Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning
lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in
these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is
running.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
warning lamp flashes X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
while the vehicle is in X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
motion. cap.
In addition, the ; X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist
Check Engine warning workshop.
lamp may light up.
? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is

The red coolant defective.
warning lamp lights up The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
while the engine is risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
running and the coolant X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
temperature gauge is paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
at the start of the scale. driving under any circumstances.
Z

? The coolant level is too low.

The red coolant If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
warning lamp comes on may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be
while the engine is malfunctioning.
running. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
display.
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 308).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
under 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The
The red coolant airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level
warning lamp comes on may be too low.
while the engine is G WARNING
running. A warning tone
also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
display.

X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning
notes (Y page 308).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next
Driving systems

· The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed
The red distance selected.
warning lamp lights up X Increase the distance.
while the vehicle is in
motion.
· You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line

The red distance of travel at too high a speed.
warning lamp lights up X Be prepared to brake immediately.
while the vehicle is in X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
motion. A warning tone brake or take evasive action.
also sounds.
Further information on PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 72).
Z
Tires

h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires.
monitor warning lamp G WARNING
(pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit. With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
increase.
display.
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 342).
h The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

The yellow tire pressure G WARNING
monitor warning lamp
(pressure loss/ The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire
malfunction) flashes for pressure.
approximately one There is a risk of an accident.
minute and then X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
remains lit. display.
277

Stowage areas .................................. 278
Features ............................................. 284
Stowage and features

278 Stowage areas
Useful information The handling characteristics of a laden

vehicle are dependent on the distribution of
i This Operator's Manual describes all the load within the vehicle. For this reason,
models and all standard and optional you should observe the following notes when
equipment of your vehicle available at the transporting a load:
time of publication of the Operator's RNever exceed the maximum permissible
Manual. Country-specific differences are gross vehicle weight or the gross axle
possible. Please note that your vehicle may weight rating of the vehicle (including
not be equipped with all features occupants). The values are specified on the
described. This also applies to safety- vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of
related systems and functions. the driver's door.
i Read the information on qualified RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry
specialist workshops: (Y page 26). objects.

RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as
possible and as low down in the trunk as
Stowage areas possible.
RThe load must not protrude above the
Loading guidelines
upper edge of the seat backrests.
G WARNING RAlways place the load against the rear or
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or front seat backrests. Make sure that the
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip seat backrests are securely locked into
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle place.
occupants. There is a risk of injury, RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
particularly in the event of sudden braking or seats if possible.
a sudden change in direction. RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel
Always store objects so that they cannot be nets to transport loads and luggage.
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening
loads against slipping or tipping before the materials appropriate for the weight and
journey. size of the load.
RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
G WARNING wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust for protection.
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running, Stowage space
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is
a risk of poisoning. Important safety notes
G WARNING
open. If you do not correctly store objects in the
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung
around, thus striking vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, especially when
braking or abruptly changing directions.
Stowage areas 279
RAlways store objects so that they cannot be X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
flung around in these or in similar lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position
situations. 2.
RAlways make sure that objects do not X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into
protrude from stowage compartments, the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise
parcel nets or stowage nets. to position 1.
RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving. Eyeglasses compartment
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,

hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
Glove box
There is a compartment to stow eyeglasses

in the headliner on the driver's side.
X To open: pull down eyeglasses
compartment : by the handle.
Stowage compartments in the front

X To open: pull handle : and open glove box center console
flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
until it engages.
i The glove box can be ventilated
(Y page 142).
All models except AMG vehicles

X To open: slide the cover forwards by
handle : in the direction of the arrow until
it engages.
X To close: briefly press the front of
handle :.
The glove box can only be locked and
unlocked using the mechanical key.
Z
280 Stowage areas
thrown out of the stowage compartment and

hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking or
a sudden change in direction.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load
for the stowage compartment. Stow and
secure heavy objects in the trunk.
The maximum permissible load of the

stowage compartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).

AMG vehicles
X Briefly press trim :.
i The stowage tray can be removed.
Stowage compartment under the

armrest
X To open: pull handle : up and fold

cover ; forwards.
i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, the
fire extinguisher is located in the stowage
compartment under the driver's seat.
Stowage compartments in the rear

X To open: pull handle : up.
center console
The armrest folds out.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a
12 V socket, a USB socket, and an AUX IN
connection or Media Interface are installed
in the stowage compartment. A Media
Interface is a universal interface for mobile
audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3
player (see the separate COMAND
Operating Instructions).
Stowage compartment under the front

seats X To open: slide covers : and ; in the
direction of the arrow.
G WARNING
If you exceed the maximum load for the i There is a 12 V power socket in the front
stowage compartment, the cover may not be stowage compartment.
able to restrain the items. Items may be
Stowage areas 281
Stowage compartment in the rear seat Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278)
armrest and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 278).
! Do not sit or lean your bodyweight on the
armrests when they are folded out as you
could damage them. Rear bench seat through-loading
! Close the cover of the stowage feature
compartment before folding the rear seat
armrest back into the seat backrest. Important safety notes

G WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold
forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
X To open: fold down seat armrest ;. RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be
X Fold cover : of the armrest upwards. restrained by the seat backrest.
Storage pockets Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
G WARNING
are engaged.
Storage bags are intended for storing light-
weight items only. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or The left-hand and right-hand rear seat
fragile objects may not be transported in the backrests can be folded down separately to
storage bag. In an accident, during hard increase the trunk capacity.
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause Folding the seat backrest forward
injury to vehicle occupants.
Storage bags cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
The stowage pockets are on the back of the

driver's and front-passenger's seats.
Stowage nets
Stowage nets are located in the front-
passenger footwell and on the right-hand side
of the trunk. i Vehicles with memory function: when you
fold one or both parts of the rear seat
Z
282 Stowage areas
backrest forwards, the respective front X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
seat moves forward slightly, when forward if necessary.
necessary, in order to avoid contact. X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
X Vehicles without memory function: if engages.
necessary, move the driver's or front- If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
passenger seat forwards. locked, this will be shown in the
X Open the trunk. multifunction display in the instrument
X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat
cluster. A warning tone also sounds.
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
backrest release handle :.
The corresponding rear seat backrest is back if necessary.

released. i You should always engage the rear seat
backrests if you do not need the through-
loading feature. This will prevent
unauthorized access to the trunk from the
vehicle interior.
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings
General notes
Observe the following notes on securing
X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards.
loads:
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat RObserve the loading guidelines
back if necessary.
(Y page 278).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
Folding the seat backrest back rings.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
become trapped when folding the rear seat rings evenly.
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
damaged. a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
Stowage areas 283
Trunk Stowage well under the trunk floor

! Unhook the handle before again before
closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely
to prevent the handle flap from protruding.
Otherwise, you could damage the handle.

There are six cargo tie down rings : in the
trunk.
Bag hook
G WARNING The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects located in the stowage compartment.
or items of luggage. Objects or items of X To open: pull handle : up.
luggage could be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load

of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to
secure a load.
X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.
Roof carrier
G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving
X Pull bag hook ; down by tab :. characteristics change. If you exceed the
maximum roof load, the driving
characteristics, as well as steering and
braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a
Z
284 Features
Never exceed the maximum roof load and Features

adjust your driving style.
Cup holder
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. ! Only use the cup holders for containers of
This helps to prevent damage to the the right size and which have lids. The
vehicle. drinks could otherwise spill.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such
a way that the vehicle will not sustain Cup holder in the front-compartment
damage even when it is in motion. center console
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
equipment, you can raise the sliding
sunroof fully and open the trunk lid fully
when the roof carrier is installed.
! To avoid damaging or scratching the
covers, do not use metallic or hard objects
to open them.
The maximum roof load is 220 lbs(100 kg).
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof
load may become detached from the vehicle.
You must therefore ensure that you observe All vehicles (except AMG)
the roof carrier manufacturer's installation : Cup holder
instructions.
Attaching the roof carrier
AMG vehicles
: Cup holder
; Cover
X Open covers : carefully in the direction of X To open: slide cover ; to its foremost
the arrow. position.
X Only secure the roof carrier to the
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat
anchorage points under covers :.
for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm
X Observe the manufacturer's installation water only.
instructions.
AMG vehicles: you can remove the rubber
mat of the cup holder in the direction of the
Features 285
arrow to clean it. Clean with clear, lukewarm

water only.
Cup holder in the rear-compartment

center console

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.
X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
X Press release catch :.
Cup holder ; folds out forwards.
X Swing the rear seat armrest cover back
X To open: slide cover : forwards. down, if necessary.
X To remove the insert: slide catch ; X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
inwards in the direction of the arrow. Swing cup holder ; back until it engages.
X Remove cup holder insert = upwards.
X To re-install the insert: place the insert in
the stowage space. Bottle holder
X Slide catch ; outwards in the direction of Observe the "Important safety notes" in the
the arrow until it engages. "Stowage compartments" section
You can remove the insert and the rubber mat (Y page 278).
of the cup holder to clean them. Clean them G WARNING
with clean, lukewarm water only. If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
! Do not sit on or support your body weight There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded event of sudden braking or a sudden change
down, as you could otherwise damage it. in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
! Close the cup holder before folding the thrown around in such situations.
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup RAlways make sure that objects do not
holder could be damaged.
protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets
or stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the trunk/cargo compartment.
Z
286 Features
! Make sure that any bottles weighing more

than 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the
bottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. The
bottle holder could otherwise be damaged.
: Mirror light
; Bracket
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
? Vanity mirror
X Press the outer edge of button : and slide A Mirror cover
in the direction of the arrow until the bottle
fits into the opening. Vanity mirror in the sun visor
X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.
The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
capacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover
(1.5 l). A has been folded up.
The bottle holder does not secure the bottles;
it merely prevents them from tipping over. Glare from the side
Sun visors
Overview
G WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
X Fold down sun visor :.
X Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;.
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.
Features 287
Rear window roller sunblind Ashtray

Important safety notes Front ashtray
G WARNING ! The stowage space under the ashtray is
When extending or retracting, parts of the not heat resistant. Before placing lit
body could become trapped within the sweep cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that
of the roller sunblind. There is a risk of injury. the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise,
the stowage space could be damaged.
When extending or retracting, make sure that

no one has any parts of the body within the
sweep of the roller sunblind. If someone
becomes trapped, briefly press the button
again. The opening or closing procedure will
be stopped.
! Make sure that the roller sunblind can

move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind
or other objects could be damaged.
Extending/retracting the roller

sunblind All vehicles (except AMG)
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X To remove the insert: grasp insert = by
the notch at the side and lift it up ; and
out.
X To re-install the insert: press insert =
into the holder until it engages.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
front.
The cover moves back.
X To extend or retract: briefly press
button :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.
X To stop: briefly press button : again.
The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves
back into the out-of-use position.
AMG vehicles
Z
288 Features
X To open: briefly press the trim on In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
cover :. Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
The stowage compartment opens.
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
X To remove the insert: slide insert ;
objects, for example
forwards in the direction of the arrow.
There is a risk of fire and injury.
X Remove insert ;.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
X To re-install the insert: place the insert Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
into the holder and press it in the opposite out of reach of children. Never leave children
direction of the arrow until it engages.
unsupervised in the vehicle.

X To close: fold down cover :.
i You can remove the ashtray insert and

use the resulting compartment for
stowage.
Rear-compartment ashtray
All vehicles (except AMG)

Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
lighter when road and traffic conditions
permit.
X To open: slide cover ; forwards. X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
X To remove the insert: pull insert : up engages.

and out. X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
X To install the insert: install insert : from Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
above into the holder and press down into automatically when the heating element is
the holder until it engages. red-hot.
X To close: briefly press cover : at the
front.
Cigarette lighter The cover moves back.
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
Features 289
Socket under the armrest

AMG vehicles
Your attention must always be focused on the X Open the stowage compartment under the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette armrest (Y page 280).
lighter when road and traffic conditions
X Lift up the cover of socket :.
permit.
ignition lock (Y page 147). Socket in the front-compartment center
X To open: briefly press the trim on
console
cover :.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
automatically when the heating element is
red-hot.
12 V sockets
General notes
All vehicles (except AMG)
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
ignition lock (Y page 147). engages.
The sockets can be used for accessories with X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). X To close: briefly press cover : at the
Accessories include such items as lamps or
front.
chargers for mobile phones.
The cover moves back.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may
discharge.
i An emergency cut-out ensures that the
on-board voltage does not drop too low. If
the on-board voltage is too low, the power
to the sockets is automatically cut. This
ensures that there is sufficient power to
start the engine.
Z
290 Features
Socket in the trunk

AMG vehicles
X To open: briefly press the trim on X Lift up the cover of socket :.
cover :.
X Lift up the cover of socket ;.
mbrace
X To close: fold down cover :.
Socket in the rear-compartment center ! You must have a license agreement to
console activate the mbrace service. Make sure
that your system is activated and ready for
use. To register, press the ï MB Info call
button. If any of the steps mentioned are
not carried out, the system may not be
activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone
hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
X Slide cover ; forwards. RCanada: Customer Service at
X Lift up the cover of socket :. 1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registering with the
service, a user ID and password will be sent
to you by post. USA only: you can use this
password to log onto the mbrace area under
"Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
Rit has been activated and is operational
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network
is available for transmitting data to the
Customer Center
Features 291
Ra service subscription is available RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the

Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged following buttons continues to light up red
after the system self-diagnosis:
i Determining the location of the vehicle on
- SOS button
a map is only possible if:
- F Roadside Assistance call button
RGPS reception is available.
- ï MB Info call button
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to
Rafter the system self-diagnosis, the
the Customer Assistance Center.
Inoperative or Service Not
Activated message appears in the

The mbrace system
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
as follows: above, the system may not operate as
X Press the W or X button on the expected. In the event of an emergency, help
multifunction steering wheel. will have to be summoned by other means.
or Have the system checked at the nearest
X Use the volume controller of the audio authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
system/COMAND. the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
The system offers various services, e.g:
Center at
RAutomatic and manual emergency call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
RRoadside Assistance call or 1-866-990-9007
RMB Info call RCanada: Customer Service at
USA only: you can find information and a 1-888-923-8367
description of all available features under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Emergency call
System self-test Important safety notes

! You must have a license agreement to
After you have switched on the ignition, the activate the mbrace service. Make sure
system carries out a self-diagnosis. that your system is activated and ready for
A malfunction in the system has been use. To register, press the ï MB Info call
detected if one of the following occurs: button. If any of the steps mentioned are
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not carried out, the system may not be
not come on during the system self-test. activated.
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside If you have questions about the activation,
Assistance button does not light up during contact one of the following telephone
self-diagnosis of the system. hotlines:
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
button does not light up during self- Assistance Center at
diagnosis of the system. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Z
292 Features
General notes Making an emergency call

An emergency call is dialed automatically if G WARNING
an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
triggered. even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
i You cannot end an automatically emergency if:
triggered emergency call yourself. Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the
An emergency call can also be initiated vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an
manually. accident
As soon as the emergency call has been Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button road
flashes. The multifunction display shows the Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
Connecting Call message. seen by other road users, particularly when
The audio output is muted. dark or in poor visibility conditions
Once the connection has been made, the There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Call Connected message appears in the Leave the vehicle immediately in this or
multifunction display. similar situations as soon as it is safe to do
All important information on the emergency so. Move to a safe location along with other
is transmitted, for example: vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure
the vehicle in accordance with national
RCurrent location of the vehicle (as
regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
determined by the GPS system)
RVehicle identification number
RInformation on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been

initiated, a voice connection is automatically
established between the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle
occupants.
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center attempts to get more information
on the emergency.
X To initiate an emergency call
RIf there is no response from the vehicle
manually: press cover : briefly to open.
occupants, an ambulance is immediately
X Press SOS button ; briefly.
sent to the vehicle.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ;
If no voice connection can be established to
the response center, the system was unable flashes until the emergency call is
to initiate an emergency call. This can occur concluded.
for instance if the relevant mobile phone X Wait for a voice connection to the
network is not available. The indicator lamp Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

in the SOS button flashes continuously. Center.
The Call Failed message appears in the X After the emergency call, close cover :.
multifunction display and must be confirmed.

i If the mobile phone network is
In this case, summon assistance by other unavailable, mbrace will not be able to
means. make the emergency call. If you leave the
Features 293
vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of
button, you will not know whether mbrace the problem (Y page 297).
placed the emergency call. In this case, The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
always summon assistance by other Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-
means. Benz technician or arranges for your vehicle
to be transported to the nearest authorized
Roadside Assistance button Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged
for services such as repair work and/or
towing.

Further details are available in your mbrace
manual.
i The system has not been able to initiate
a roadside assistance call, if:
Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside
Assistance call button : is flashing
continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
X Press Roadside Assistance button :. Benz Customer Assistance Center was
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz established.
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator This may be because the corresponding
lamp in Roadside Assistance button : mobile phone network is not available.
flashes while the call is active. The The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display shows the multifunction display.
Connecting Call message. The audio
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
output is muted.
multifunction steering wheel.
If a connection can be made, the Call or
Connected message appears in the
X Press the corresponding button for ending
a phone call on COMAND.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, MB Info call button
for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle
RVehicle identification number
i The COMAND display indicates that a call
is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Z
294 Features
X Press MB Info call button :. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz multifunction steering wheel.
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator or
lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while X Press the corresponding button for ending
the connection is being made. The a phone call on COMAND.
Connecting Call message appears in the
multifunction display and COMAND is
Call priority
muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Connected message appears in the Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency

multifunction display. call can still be initiated. In this case, an
emergency call will take priority and override
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
all other active calls.
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, The indicator lamp of the respective button
for example: flashes until the call is ended. An emergency
call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-
RCurrent location of the vehicle Benz Customer Assistance Center.
RVehicle identification number All other calls can be ended by pressing:
i The COMAND display indicates that a call Rthe ~ button on the multifunction
is active. During the call, you can change to steering wheel
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI Ror the corresponding COMAND button for
button on COMAND, for example. ending a telephone call
Voice output is not available.
i When a call is initiated, the audio system
A voice connection is established between is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance connected to COMAND. However, if you
Center and the vehicle occupants. You can want to use your mobile phone, do so only
obtain information on how to operate your when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe
vehicle's systems, on the location of the location.
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
and on further products and services offered
Downloading destinations in COMAND
by Mercedes-Benz USA.
USA only: you can find further information on Downloading destinations
the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at Destination Download gives you access to a
http://www.mbusa.com. data bank with over 15 million Points of
i The system has not been able to initiate Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
an MB Info call, if: the navigation system in your vehicle. If you
know the destination, the address can be
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the
button : is flashing continuously. location of Points of Interest (POIs)/
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes- important destinations in the vicinity.
Benz Customer Assistance Center was Furthermore, you can download routes with
established. up to 20 way points.
This may be because the corresponding You are prompted to confirm route guidance
mobile phone network is not available. to the address entered.
The Call Failed message appears in the
Features 295
X Select Yes with the = or ; buttons mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation
on the COMAND system. system.
X Confirm with the 9 button on the
Specifying and sending the destination
COMAND system. address
The system calculates the route and X Go to the website http://
subsequently starts the route guidance with www.maps.google.com and enter a
the address entered. destination address into the entry field.
i If you select No, the address can be saved X To send the destination address to the

in the address book. e-mail address of your mbrace
account: click on the corresponding
i The Destination Download function is button.
available if the corresponding mobile
i Example:
phone network is available and data
transfer is possible. If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
i You can only use the Destination will be sent to your vehicle.
Download function if the vehicle is
equipped with a navigation system.
X When the "Send" dialog window appears:
In the relevant field, enter the e-mail
Route Assistance address which you specified when
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS activating your mbrace account.
Package and cannot be purchased X Click "Send".
separately.
i Information on specific commands such
i You can also use the Route Assistance as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found
function if your vehicle is not equipped with on the website.
a navigation system.
Within the framework of this service, you Calling up destination addresses
receive a professional and reliable form of X Switch on the ignition.
navigation support without having to leave The destination address is loaded into the
your vehicle. vehicle's navigation system.
The customer service representative finds a A display message appears, asking
suitable route depending on your vehicle's whether navigation should be started.
current position and the desired destination. X Select Yes by sliding XVY and turning
You will then be guided live through the cVd the COMAND controller and confirm
current route section. with W.
The system calculates the route and
Search & Send subsequently starts the route guidance
with the address entered.
General notes
i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle i If you select No, the address can be saved
must be equipped with mbrace and a in the address book.
navigation system. You must also have an i If you have sent more than one
mbrace service subscription. destination address, each individual
"Search & Send" is a destination entry destination must be confirmed separately.
service. A destination address which is found
on Google Maps® can be transferred via
Z
296 Features
i Destination addresses are loaded in the Vehicle remote closing

same order as the order in which they were
The remote closing feature can be used when
sent.
you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you
Please note the following if you have are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be
multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer
mbrace and active mbrace accounts: Assistance Center.
if multiple vehicles are registered under the The vehicle can be immediately remotely
same e-mail address, the destination will locked within four days of the ignition being
be sent to all the vehicles. turned off. After this time, the remote closing
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After

Vehicle remote opening 30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you remotely.
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and X Contact the following service hotlines:
a replacement SmartKey is not available. The RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Assistance Center at
Customer Assistance Center. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
The vehicle can be immediately opened (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
remotely within four days of the ignition being RCanada: Customer Service at
turned off. After this time, the remote 1-888-923-8367
unlocking may be delayed by 15 to You will be asked for your PIN.
60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no
The next time you are inside the vehicle and
longer be opened remotely.
you switch on the ignition, the Doors
X Contact the following service hotlines:
Locked Remotely message appears in the
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer multifunction display.
Assistance Center at USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
1-800-FOR-MERCedes locked via:
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section
1-888-923-8367
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
You will be asked for your password.
X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed
Blackberry)
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer To do this, you will need your identification
Assistance Center. number and password.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be i The vehicle remote closing feature is
opened via: available when the relevant mobile phone
Rthe
network is available and data connection is
Internet, under the "Owners Online"
possible.
section
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
Blackberry)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if
the corresponding mobile phone network
is accessible.
Features 297
Stolen vehicle recovery service X Confirm the message with Yes.

If your vehicle has been stolen: X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please
Start Ignition message appears, turn
X Notify the police. the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
The police will issue a numbered incident lock (Y page 147).
report.
X When the Please follow the
X This number will be forwarded to the
instructions received by phone and
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance move your vehicle to a safe
Center together with your PIN. position. message appears, follow the

The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance customer service representative's
Center then tries to locate the system. The instructions.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance The message in the display disappears.
Center contacts you and the local law
enforcement agency if the vehicle is If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote
located. However, only the law malfunction diagnosis is canceled
enforcement agency is informed of the completely.
location of the vehicle. The vehicle operating state check begins.
You will see the Vehicle diagnosis
i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated activated. message.
for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-
When the diagnosis is completed, the
Benz Customer Assistance Center is
Transfer vehicle diagnostics data
automatically informed.
(Voice connection may be
interrupted during data transfer.)
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis message appears. The vehicle data can now
With the vehicle remote malfunction be sent to the Customer Assistance center.
diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the X Press OK to confirm the message.
Customer Assistance center can provide The voice connection with the Customer
improved support for problems with your Assistance center is terminated.
vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:
is transferred to the Customer Assistance Transferring data... message.
center. The customer service representative
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
can use the received data to decide what kind
Assistance center.
of assistance is required. You are then, for
example, guided to the nearest authorized Depending on what the customer service
Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle representative agreed with you, the voice
is called. connection is re-established after the transfer
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during is complete. If necessary, you will be
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, contacted at a later time by another means,
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance e.g. by e-mail or phone.
center. You will see the Roadside Further functions of the vehicle remote
Assistance Connected message in the malfunction diagnosis include, for example:
COMAND display. If the vehicle remote Rtransfer of service data to the Customer
malfunction diagnosis can be started, the Assistance center. If a service is overdue,
Request for vehicle diagnosis the COMAND display shows a message
received. Start vehicle diagnosis?
message appears in the display.
Z
298 Features
about various special offers at your Speed alert

workshop.
You can define the upper speed limit, which
Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil
must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this
level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes, selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a
etc. If applicable, you will receive message will be sent to the Customer
information on special offers in the e-mail. Assistance center. The Customer Assistance
USA only: this information can also be center then forwards this information to you.
called up under "Owners Online" at http:// You can select the way in which you receive
www.mbusa.com. this information beforehand. Possible options
Information on the data stored in the vehicle include text message, e-mail or an automated
(Y page 27). call.
Information on Roadside Assistance The data which is sent to the Customer
(Y page 23). Assistance Center contains the following
information:
Downloading routes Rthe location where the speed limit was
Downloading routes allows you to transfer exceeded
and save predefined routes in the navigation Rthe time at which the speed limit was
system. To do this, an SD memory card must exceeded
be inserted into the COMAND system. If no Rthe selected speed limit which was
SD memory card is inserted, you must insert exceeded
the card into the card slot on the COMAND
system before saving. Geo fencing
A route can be prepared and sent either by a
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
customer service representative or via the
the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
mbrace portal on the Internet.
be informed if the vehicle crosses the
Each route can include up to 20 way points. boundaries of the selected areas. You can
Once a route has been received by the select the way in which you receive this
navigation system, you will see the <route information beforehand. Possible options
name> has been saved to memory card. include text message, e-mail or an automated
Do you want to start route call.
guidance? message in the COMAND display.
The area can be determined as either a circle
The route is saved to the SD memory card.
or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
X To start route guidance: select Yes. You can specify up to ten areas
An overview of the route is shown in the simultaneously. Different settings are
display. possible for each area.
i If you select No, the saved route can be USA only: these settings can be called up
called up later via the navigation menu. under "Owners Online" at http://
X Select Start. www.mbusa.com.
Route guidance is started. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
and inform the customer service
i Downloaded and saved data can be called representative that you wish to activate geo
up again in COMAND. fencing.
You can find further information in the Currently inactive areas can be activated by
separate COMAND Operating Instructions. text message.
Features 299
Triggering the vehicle alarm opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.
With this function, you can trigger the
vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An Alternatively, you can call the following
alarm sounds and the exterior lighting telephone assistance services:
flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, Assistance Center at
the alarm switches off. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
1-800-387-0100

Garage door opener RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515
Important safety notes (free of charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/or
G WARNING compatible products is also available
When you operate or program the garage door online at http://www.homelink.com.
with the integrated garage door opener,
persons in the range of movement of the i Notes on the declaration of conformity
garage door can become trapped or struck by (Y page 25).
the garage door. There is a risk of injury. USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
When using the integrated garage door Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage Programming
door.
Programming buttons
G WARNING Observe the "Important safety notes"
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust (Y page 299).
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
The HomeLink® garage door opener

integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you
to operate up to three different door and gate
systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only
on garage doors that: Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view
mirror
Rhave safety stop and reverse features and
Garage door remote control A is not part of
Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards
the integrated garage door opener.
When programming a garage door opener,
X The first time before programming, clear
park the vehicle outside the garage.
the integrated garage door opener memory
i Certain garage door drives are (Y page 301).
incompatible with the integrated garage X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
door opener. If you have difficulty ignition lock.
programming the integrated garage door
Z
300 Features
XPress and hold one of buttons ; to ? on Synchronizing the rolling code

the integrated garage door opener. Observe the "Important safety notes"
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights (Y page 299).
up yellow. Your vehicle must be within reach of the
i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure
as button ;, = or ? is programmed for that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
the first time. If the selected button has objects are present within the sweep of the
already been programmed, indicator door or gate.
lamp : will only light up yellow after ten X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
seconds have elapsed. ignition lock.

X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator X Press the program button of the door or
lamp : flashes yellow. gate drive (see the door or gate drive
operating instructions, e.g. under
X Point garage door remote control A
"programming of additional remote
towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view controls").
mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to i Usually, you now have 30seconds to
20 cm).
initiate the next step.
i The required distance between remote
control A and the integrated garage door
X Press previously programmed button ;,
opener depends on the garage door drive = or ? of the integrated garage door
system. Several attempts might be opener until the door closes.
necessary. You should test every position The rolling code synchronization is then
for at least 25 seconds before trying complete.
another position.
Notes on programming the remote
X Press and hold button B on remote control control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green. Canadian radio frequency laws require a
If indicator lamp : lights up green or "break" (or interruption) of the transmission
flashes, then programming has been signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
successful. Therefore, these signals may not last long
X Release button B on remote control A for enough for the integrated garage door
the garage door drive system. opener. The signal is not recognized during
X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat
programming. Comparable with Canadian
law, some U.S. garage door openers also
the programming procedure for the
feature a "break".
corresponding button on the rear-view
mirror. When doing so, vary the distance Proceed as follows:
between remote control A and the rear- Rif you live in Canada
view mirror. Rif you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where
i If the indicator lamp flashes green after
you live) when using the programming
successful programming, the garage door
steps
system is using a rolling code. After
programming, you must synchronize the
garage door opener integrated in the rear-
view mirror with the receiver of the garage
door system.
Features 301
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on same programming steps with this remote
the integrated garage door opener. control. Before performing these steps,
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights make sure that new batteries have been
up yellow. installed in garage door drive remote
X Release the button. control A.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. RNote that some remote controls only
X Press button B of garage door remote transmit for a limited amount of time (the
indicator lamp on the remote control goes
control A for two seconds, then release it
out). Press button B on remote control
for two seconds.

A again before transmission ends.
X Press button B again for two seconds.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
X Repeat this sequence on button B of
opener unit. This can improve signal
remote control A until indicator lamp : reception/transmission.
lights up green.
If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the Opening/closing the garage door
process.
X Continue with the other programming
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of
steps (see above).
the garage door system remote control.
Problems when programming Please also read the operating instructions
for the garage door system.
If you are experiencing problems
programming the integrated garage door X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of ignition lock.
the following instructions: X Press button ;, = or ? which you have
RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage programmed to operate the garage door.
door drive remote control A. This can Garage door system with a fixed code:
usually be found on the back of the remote indicator lamp : lights up green.
control. Garage door system with a rolling code:
The integrated garage door opener is indicator lamp : flashes green.
compatible with devices that have units i The transmitter will transmit a signal as
which operate in the frequency range of long as the button is pressed. The
280to 433MHz. transmission is halted after a maximum of
RReplace the batteries in garage door ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights
remote control A. This increases the up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again
likelihood that garage door remote control if necessary.
A will transmit a strong and precise signal
to the integrated garage door opener in the Clearing the memory
rear-view mirror. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
RWhen programming, hold remote control
ignition lock.
A at varying distances and angles from the X Press buttons ; and ?.
button that you are programming. Try
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
various angles at a distance between 2and
X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
but at varying distances. indicator lamp turns green.
RIf another remote control for the same
garage door drive is available, repeat the
Z
302 Features
i Make sure that you clear the memory of Setting the compass
the integrated garage door opener before
selling the vehicle.
Compass
Calling up the compass
North America zone map
To receive a correct display in rear-view

mirror :, the compass must be calibrated
and the magnetic field zone set.
X Briefly press button =.
Compass ; displays in which compass
direction the vehicle is currently traveling:
N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.
South America zone map

X Set your location using the zone maps.
X Press and hold button =(Y page 302) for
approximately three seconds.
The zone currently selected appears in
compass display ;(Y page 302).
X To select the zone: press
button =(Y page 302) repeatedly until the
desired zone is selected.
The zone has been selected when compass
display ;(Y page 302) shows the heading.
This takes a few seconds.
Features 303
Calibrating the compass

X Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding
traffic.
In order to calibrate the compass correctly,
do the following:
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not
in the vicinity of steel structures or high-

voltage transmission lines.
Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear X Slide the seat backwards.
window defroster. X To install: place the floormat in the
Rclose all doors and the trunk lid. footwell.
X Switch on the ignition. X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X Press and hold button =(Y page 302) for X To remove: pull the floormat off
approximately six seconds until the retainers ;.
C symbol appears in compass display ; X Remove the floormat.
(Y page 302).
X Drive in a full circle at approximately
3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h).
When the calibration has successfully been
completed, the current direction is shown
in compass display ;(Y page 302).
Floormats
G WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats.
Z
304
305

Engine compartment ........................ 306
Maintenance ...................................... 309
Care .................................................... 311
Maintenance and care

306 Engine compartment
Useful information G WARNING

Opening the hood when the engine is
i This Operator's Manual describes all overheated or when there is a fire in the
models and all standard and optional engine compartment could expose you to hot
equipment of your vehicle available at the gases or other service products. There is a
time of publication of the Operator's risk of injury.
Manual. Country-specific differences are Let an overheated engine cool down before
possible. Please note that your vehicle may opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
not be equipped with all features engine compartment, keep the hood closed
described. This also applies to safety- and contact the fire department.
i Read the information on qualified G WARNING

specialist workshops: (Y page 26). The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
Engine compartment again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
Hood
If you need to do any work inside the engine
Important safety notes compartment,
Rswitch off the ignition
G WARNING
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when
risk of danger from moving components,
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
such as the fan rotation area
Rkeep clothing away from moving parts
Never unlatch the hood while driving.
G WARNING G WARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection
When opening and closing the hood, it may
system work under high voltage. If you touch
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
components which are under voltage, you
a risk of injury to persons within range of
could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
movement of the hood.
injury.
Open and close the hood only when no one is
Never touch components of the ignition
within its range of movement.
system or fuel injection system when the
ignition is switched on.
G WARNING
Certain components in the engine
compartment, such as the engine, radiator Opening the hood
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
G WARNING
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
When the hood is open and the windshield
poses a risk of injury.
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
Where possible, let the engine cool down and by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
touch only the components described in the
following.
the ignition before opening the hood.
Engine compartment 307
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are Engine oil

not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield General notes
wipers or the hood. Depending on the driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil
over a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). The
oil consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.

When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are approximately five minutes if the engine is
turned off. at normal operating temperature.
X Pull release lever : on the hood. Rif the engine is not at normal operating
The hood is released. temperature, e.g. if the engine was only

started briefly, wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
Checking the oil level using the oil

dipstick
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch

handle ; up and lift the hood.
If you lift the hood by approximately
15 inches (40 cm), the hood is opened and
held open automatically by the gas-filled X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
strut. tube.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
Closing the hood X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height tube to the stop, and take it out again.
of approximately 8 inches (20 cm). If the level is between MIN mark = and
X Check that the hood has engaged properly. MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark
properly engaged. Open it again and close = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
it with a little more force. engine oil.
Z
308 Engine compartment
Adding engine oil

G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next
to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down
and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the
components before starting the engine.
H Environmental note Example: engine oil cap

X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove

When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
it.
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful
X Add engine oil.
to the environment.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)
have been approved for vehicles with a of engine oil.
service system. You can obtain a list of the X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
engine oils and oil filters tested and clockwise.
approved in accordance with the Ensure that the cap locks into place
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service securely.
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service X Check the oil level again with the oil
center. dipstick (Y page 307).
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
caused by the following: Further information on engine oil
(Y page 375).
Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
not been specifically approved for the
service system Additional service products
Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
the interval for replacement specified by Checking coolant level
the service system has been exceeded
G WARNING
Rusing engine oil additives.
The engine cooling system is pressurized,
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much particularly when the engine is warm. When
engine oil can result in damage to the opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
excess engine oil siphoned off. Let the engine cool down before opening the
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.
Maintenance 309
Adding washer fluid to the windshield

washer system/headlamp cleaning
system
G WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
engine components or the exhaust system it
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when the
vehicle is on a level surface and the engine
has cooled down.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 147).
X Check the coolant temperature display in
The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡ (70 †).
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
X Turn the SmartKey to position
X Add the premixed washer fluid.
0 (Y page 147) in the ignition lock.
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-
clockwise to allow excess pressure to until it engages.
escape. The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and windshield washer system and the headlamp
remove it. cleaning system.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar If the washer fluid level drops below the
= in the filler neck when cold, there is recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message
enough coolant in coolant expansion appears in the multifunction display
tank ;. prompting you to refill the washer fluid
(Y page 262).
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fuel Further information on windshield washer
filler neck when warm, there is enough fluid/antifreeze (Y page 378).
coolant in expansion tank ;.
X If necessary, add coolant that has been
Maintenance
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far ASSYST PLUS
as it will go. Service messages
For further information on coolant, see The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
(Y page 377). informs you of the next service due date.
Z
310 Maintenance
Information on the type of service and service Displaying service messages

intervals (see the separate Maintenance
X Switch on the ignition.
Booklet).
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). X Press the 9 or : button to select the
ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by
i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display pressing the a button.
does not show any information on the
The service due date appears in the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 307).
The multifunction display shows a service
Information about Service

message for several seconds, e.g.:
RService A in .. Days Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
RService interval display
A Due
RService A Exceeded by .. Days ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval
display has been inadvertently reset, this
Depending on the operating conditions of the
setting can be corrected at a qualified
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
Have service work carried out as described
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may
a number or another letter, shows the type of
otherwise lead to increased wear and
service. A stands for a minor service and B for damage to the major assemblies or the
a major service. vehicle.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not take into account any periods of after the service work has been carried out.
time during which the battery is You can also obtain further information on
disconnected. maintenance work, for example.
Maintaining the time-dependent service
schedule: Special service requirements
X Note down the service due date displayed The specified maintenance interval takes only
in the multifunction display before the normal operation of the vehicle into
disconnecting the battery. account. Under arduous operating conditions
or increased load on the vehicle,
or maintenance work must be carried out more
X After reconnecting the battery, subtract frequently, for example:
the battery disconnection periods from the
Rregular city driving with frequent
service date shown on the display.
intermediate stops
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel
Hiding a service message
short distances
X Press the a or % button on the Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
steering wheel. surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long
periods
Care 311
Under these or similar conditions, have, for Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter retaining the quality in the long term.
replaced or changed more frequently. Under Use care products and cleaning agents
arduous operating conditions, the tires must recommended and approved by Mercedes-
be checked more often. Further information Benz.
can be obtained at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network Automatic car wash
is also available in other countries. You can

obtain further information from any G WARNING
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
Care carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored.
General notes
H Environmental note ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
automatically in certain situations. To
cloths in an environmentally responsible
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
manner.
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any the following or other similar situations:
of the following: Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rdry, Rin the car wash
rough or hard cloths
Rabrasive cleaning agents ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Rsolvents Automatic Car Wash as these use special
Rcleaning agents containing solvents cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective ! Make sure that:
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or are fully closed.
damage the surfaces and protective film. Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended (the OFF button has been pressed).
period straight after cleaning it, particularly Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel 0.
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
! In car washes with a towing mechanism,
should drive for a few minutes after make sure that the automatic transmission
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and is in transmission position N, otherwise the
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. vehicle could be damaged.
The vehicle can then be parked. RVehicles with a SmartKey:
Z
312 Care
Do not remove the SmartKey from the Observe the legal requirements in all
ignition lock. Do not open the driver's countries concerned.
door or front-passenger door when the X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
engine is switched off. Otherwise, the vehicle in direct sunlight.
automatic transmission selects park X Use a soft sponge to clean.
position P automatically and locks the
X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
wheels. You can prevent this by shifting
the automatic transmission to N shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
beforehand. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: gentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towards
Do not open the driver's door or front-
the air inlet.
passenger door when the engine is

switched off. Otherwise, the automatic X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
transmission selects park position P sponge frequently.
automatically and locks the wheels. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
Observe the following to make sure that the thoroughly with a chamois.
automatic transmission stays in position N: X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
paintwork.
X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the
ignition is switched off. When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
ignition lock (Y page 147). soon as possible.
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/
Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. Power washers
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
G WARNING
X Shift the automatic transmission to
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
position N. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
X Release the brake pedal. to the tires or chassis components.
X Release the electric parking brake. Components damaged in this way may fail
X Switch off the ignition and leave the unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
SmartKey in the ignition lock. Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
tires or chassis components replaced
wash from the very start.
immediately.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash. ! Always maintain a distance of at least
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
wax from the windshield and the wiper power washer nozzle. Information about
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce the correct distance is available from the
wiping noises caused by residue on the equipment manufacturer.
windshield. Move the power washer nozzle around
when cleaning your vehicle.
Washing by hand Do not aim directly at any of the following:
In some countries, washing by hand is only Rtires
allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
Relectrical components
Care 313
Rbattery Do not use these care products in the sun or

Rconnectors on the hood while the hood is hot.
Rlights X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Rseals Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
Rtrim
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Rventilation slots
Matte finish care
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures. ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to
Cleaning the paintwork shine.

! Do not affix: ! The following may cause the paint to
Rstickers
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
effect:
Rfilms
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable
Rmagnetic plates or similar items
materials.
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise RFrequent use of car washes.
damage the paintwork.
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or
inadequate care cannot always be completely polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified wax. These products are only suitable for
specialist workshop. high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
with matte finish leads to considerable
surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover
Always have paintwork repairs performed
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
off the treated areas afterwards. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, treatment under any circumstances.
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently Observe these notes if your vehicle has a
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid
lighter fluid. damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. treatment.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
with a clear matte finish.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products i The vehicle should preferably be washed
recommended and approved by Mercedes- by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo
Benz. This is the case approximately every and plenty of water.
three to five months, depending on the
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo
climate conditions and the care product used.
from the range of recommended and
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz should be used.
Z
314 Care
Cleaning the vehicle parts Cleaning wiper blades
Cleaning the wheels G WARNING

You could become trapped by the windshield
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
to remove brake dust. This could damage
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
wheel bolts and brake components.
injury.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended Always switch off the windshield wipers and
period straight after cleaning it, particularly the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel wiper blades.
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you the wiper blade could be damaged.
should drive for a few minutes after
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
graphite coating could be damaged. This
The vehicle can then be parked.
could cause wiper noise.
Cleaning the windows ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
G WARNING the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
You could become trapped by the windshield X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
the windshield.
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
injury.
damp cloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades. before switching on the ignition.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, Cleaning the exterior lighting
solvents or cleaning agents containing
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
solvents to clean the inside of the windows.
Do not touch the insides of the windows cloths which are suitable for plastic light
with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
the windows. the plastic light lenses.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
windshield and the rear window at regular
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
shampoo or cleaning cloths.
and pollen may under certain
circumstances prevent water from draining
away. This can lead to corrosion damage Mirror turn signals
and damage to electronic components. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
X Clean the inside and outside of the cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
product that is recommended and cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
approved by Mercedes-Benz. lenses of the mirror turn signals.
Care 315
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn

signals in the exterior mirror housing using
a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a
distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean

Information about the correct distance is camera lens :.
available from the equipment
manufacturer.
Cleaning the exhaust pipes
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaning agents such as sanitary
cleansers or wheel cleaners.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
winter and after washing.
X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
Interior care
X Clean sensors : of the driving systems Cleaning the display
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. ! For cleaning, do not use any of the
following:
Cleaning the rear view camera Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area Rabrasive cleaning agents
around the rear view camera with a power Rcommercially-available household
washer. cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to
irreparable damage to the display.
Z
316 Care
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that Cleaning the plastic trim
it is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a
G WARNING
commercially available microfiber cloth Care products and cleaning agents containing
and TFT/LCD display cleaner. solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
X Dry the display surface using a dry
come loose in the event of air bag
microfiber cloth.
deployment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
Cleaning Night View Assist Plus agents to clean the cockpit.
! Never clean the camera lens. When
cleaning the field of vision of the driving ! Do not affix the following to plastic
systems, make sure that you do not spray surfaces:

glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the Rstickers
camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified Rfilms
specialist workshop. Rscented oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
X Fold down the camera cover by recess :. The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or

selector lever
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim

X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield in elements
front of camera ;. ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners,
polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk
of damaging the surface.
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
Care 317
mostly made of anodized aluminum and ! To retain the natural appearance of the
can lose their shine if chrome polish is leather, observe the following cleaning
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead instructions:
when cleaning the trim pieces. RClean genuine leather covers carefully
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very with a damp cloth and then wipe the
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you covers down with a dry cloth.
are unsure as to whether the trim pieces RMake sure that the leather does not
are chrome-plated or not, consult an become soaked. It may otherwise
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. become rough and cracked.
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with ROnly use leather care agents that have
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber been tested and approved by Mercedes-

cloth. Benz. You can obtain these from a
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning qualified specialist workshop.
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
Cleaning the seat covers RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing
General notes 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean RClean cloth covers with a microfiber
genuine leather, artificial leather or cloth moistened with a solution
Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish
damage the cover. washing liquid). Rub carefully and always
i Note that regular care is essential to wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving
ensure that the appearance and comfort of visible lines. Leave the seat to dry
the covers is retained over time. afterwards. Cleaning results depend on
the type of dirt and how long it has been
Genuine leather seat covers there.
Leather is a natural product. RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
example: seat sections to avoid leaving visible
RDifferences in the texture lines.
RSigns of stretching and marking
Cleaning the seat belts
RSlight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not G WARNING

material defects. Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event
of an accident. This poses an increased risk
of injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
Z
318 Care
by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡

(80 †) or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap
solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets

X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
or dry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile
cleaning agents recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
319

Where will I find...? ........................... 320
Flat tire .............................................. 321
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 322
Jump-starting .................................... 326
Towing and tow-starting .................. 328
Fuses .................................................. 331
Breakdown assistance
320 Where will I find...?
Useful information Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency

spare wheel
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
: Vehicle tool kit tray
; Stowage well
Where will I find...? = "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
First-aid kit X Open the trunk lid.

X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 283).
The vehicle tool kit contains:
RFolding wheel chock
RFuse allocation chart
RJack
RAlignment bolt
ROne pair of gloves
RLug wrench
RTowing eye
X Open the trunk lid.

Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel
X Slide the stowage net down. (AMG vehicles)
X Open the stowage compartment.
X Release tensioning strap :.
X Remove first-aid kit ;.
i Check the expiration date on the first-aid

kit at least once a year. Replace the
contents if necessary, and replace missing
items.
Vehicle tool kit

: Towing eye
General notes
; One pair of gloves
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the = Jack
stowage well under the trunk floor.
? Folding wheel chock
Flat tire 321
A Alignment bolt X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.

B Sheet for faulty wheel Make sure that they are not endangered as
they do so.
C Tire inflation compressor
X Make sure that no one is near the danger
D Lug wrench
area while a wheel is being changed.
E Fuse allocation chart Anyone who is not directly assisting in the
X Open the trunk lid. wheel change should, for example, stand
behind the barrier.
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 283).
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to
traffic conditions when doing so.
Flat tire X Close the driver's door.
Preparing the vehicle

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RMOExtended
properties)
tires (tires with run-flat
properties) (Y page 321) General notes
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
vehicles with MOExtended tires.
characteristics), you can continue to drive
Ran emergency spare wheel(Y page 367)
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
Information on changing/mounting a wheel pressure in one or more tires. The affected
(Y page 357). tire must not show any clearly visible damage.
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
level ground, as far away as possible from MOExtended marking which appears on the
traffic. sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. next to the tire size designation, the load-
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
bearing capacity and the speed index
(Y page 167). (Y page 351).
X If possible, bring the front wheels into the
MOExtended tires may only be used in
straight-ahead position. conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system or with an active tire pressure
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that
monitor.
"normal" level is selected (Y page 189).
If the pressure loss warning message
appears in the multifunction display:
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
RObserve the instructions in the display
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
messages (Y page 258).
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
RCheck the tire for damage.
driver's door.
RIf driving on, observe the following notes.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having The maximum driving distance is
been removed. approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the vehicle is partially laden and approximately
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully
(Y page 147). laden.
322 Battery (vehicle)
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving RESP® is intervening constantly.

distance possible depends upon: Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
RSpeed
After driving in emergency mode, have the
RRoad condition wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
ROutside temperature workshop with regard to their further use. The
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode defective tire must be replaced in every case.
may be reduced by extreme driving
conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
through a moderate style of driving. Battery (vehicle)
The maximum permissible distance which Important safety notes
can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
the moment the tire pressure loss warning Special tools and expert knowledge are
appears in the multifunction display. required when working on the battery, e.g.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of removal and installing. You should therefore
50 mph (80 km/h). have all work involving the battery carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
i When replacing one or all tires, make sure
that you use only tires: G WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
Rof the size specified for the vehicle and
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
Rmarked "MOExtended"
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be lead to function restrictions applying to
replaced with a MOExtended tire, a safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting
standard tire may be used as a temporary system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or
measure. Make sure that you use the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The
proper size and type (summer or winter operating safety of your vehicle may be
tire). restricted. You could lose control of the
vehicle, for example:
Important safety notes Rbraking
G WARNING Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver

When driving in emergency mode, the driving and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when adapted to the road conditions
cornering, accelerating quickly and when There is a risk of an accident.
braking. There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. incident, contact a qualified specialist
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, workshop immediately. Do not drive any
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, further. You should have all work involving the
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden battery carried out at a qualified specialist
vehicle. workshop.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
G WARNING
Ryou hear banging noises.
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
Rthe vehicle starts to shake.
of sparks, which could ignite the highly
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Battery (vehicle) 323
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle over the battery. Keep children away from
body to remove any existing electrostatic batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
build-up. water and seek medical attention.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when H Environmental note

charging the battery as well as when jump- Batteries contain dangerous
starting. substances. It is against the
Always make sure that neither you nor the law to dispose of them with
battery is electrostatically charged. A build- the household rubbish. They
up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for must be collected separately
example: and recycled to protect the
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic environment.
fibers Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
Rif you push or pull the battery across the manner. Take discharged
carpet or other synthetic materials batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or a
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth
special collection point for
G WARNING used batteries.
During the charging process, a battery
produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit ! Have the battery checked regularly at a
occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen qualified specialist workshop.
gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. Observe the service intervals in the
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified
connected battery does not come into specialist workshop for more information.
contact with vehicle parts. ! You should have all work involving the
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery carried out at a qualified specialist
battery. workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
RIt is important that you observe the necessary for you to disconnect the battery
described order of the battery terminals yourself, make sure that:
when connecting and disconnecting a Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
battery. SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the GO, ensure that the ignition is switched
battery poles with identical polarity are off. Check that all the indicator lamps in
connected. the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,
RIt is particularly important to observe the electronic components, such as the
described order when connecting and alternator, may be damaged.
disconnecting the jumper cables. Ryou first remove the negative terminal
RNever connect or disconnect the battery clamp and then the positive terminal
terminals while the engine is running. clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic
G WARNING system may be damaged.
Rthe transmission is locked in position P
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
after disconnecting the battery. The
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
vehicle is secured against rolling away.
You can then no longer move the vehicle.
Z
324 Battery (vehicle)
The battery and the cover of the positive disconnected at a qualified specialist
terminal clamp must be installed securely workshop. You can also charge the battery
during operation. with a charger recommended by Mercedes-
Comply with safety precautions and take Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
protective measures when handling for further information.
batteries. Have the battery condition of charge checked
Risk of explosion. more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly
for short trips or if you leave it standing idle
for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop if you wish to leave your
Fire, open flames and smoking are vehicle parked for a long period of time.
prohibited when handling the
i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
battery. Avoid creating sparks.
vehicle and do not require any electrical
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid consumers. The vehicle will then use very
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. little energy, thus conserving battery
Wear suitable protective clothing, power.
especially gloves, apron and i If the power supply has been interrupted,
faceguard. e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will
Rinse any acid spills immediately have to:
with clear water. Contact a Rset the clock. Information on setting the
physician if necessary.
clock can be found in the separate
Wear eye protection. operating instructions.
On vehicles with COMAND and a
navigation system, the clock is set
Keep children away. automatically.
Rreset the function for folding the exterior
mirrors in/out automatically, by folding
Observe this Operator's Manual. the mirrors out once (Y page 110).
Charging the battery

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
G WARNING
recommends that you only use batteries
which have been tested and approved for During charging and jump-starting, explosive
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These gases can escape from the battery. There is a
batteries provide increased impact risk of an explosion.
protection to prevent vehicle occupants from Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
suffering acid burns should the battery be sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
damaged in the event of an accident. ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
In order for the battery to achieve the Do not lean over a battery.
maximum possible service life, it must always
be sufficiently charged. G WARNING
The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
discharge over time if you do not use the Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
vehicle. In this case, have the battery Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
Battery (vehicle) 325
over the battery. Keep children away from information and availability. Read the battery
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with charger's operating instructions before
water and seek medical attention. charging the battery.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at
temperatures below freezing point. When
jump-starting the vehicle or charging the
battery, gases can escape from the battery.
There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
! Only use battery chargers with a
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 326).
X Open the hood (Y page 306).
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same
order as when connecting the donor
battery in the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 326).
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
warning lamps in the instrument cluster do
not light up, it is highly likely that the
discharged battery has frozen. In this case,
you may neither charge the battery nor jump-
start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-
out battery may be shorter. The starting
characteristics may be impaired, especially at
low temperatures. Have the thawed-out
battery checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Never charge a battery still installed in the
vehicle unless a battery charger unit
approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. A
battery charger unit specially adapted for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an
accessory. It permits the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
Z
326 Jump-starting
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and
seek medical attention.
G WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
Jump-starting 327
ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.

ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.
Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal
clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine
is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).
X Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.

X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X Start the engine.
X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
Z
328 Towing and tow-starting
X First, remove the jumper cables from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jumper cables.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
Towing and tow-starting ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function

Important safety notes automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate

G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
the following or other similar situations:
no longer available if:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rthe engine is not running.
Rin the car wash
Rthe brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning. ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could
or the vehicle's electrical system. be damaged.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
force may be necessary to steer or brake. this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,
There is a risk of an accident. recover the vehicle with a crane.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, ! When towing, pull away slowly and
make sure that the steering moves freely. smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
G WARNING
If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow- ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
started is greater than the permissible gross This could damage the vehicle.
weight of your vehicle: ! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
Rthe towing eye could detach itself use the key instead of the Start/Stop
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could button. Otherwise, the automatic
rollover. transmission may shift to position P when
the driver's or front-passenger door are
opened, which could lead to damage to the
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, transmission.
its weight should not be greater than the
permissible gross weight of your vehicle. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
weight rating can be found on the vehicle If the vehicle has to be towed more than
identification plate (Y page 372). 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
Towing and tow-starting 329
It is better to have the vehicle transported

than to have it towed.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission
damage, have it transported on a transporter
or trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in
position N when the vehicle is being towed.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock
Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
position N
i Deactivate the automatic locking feature
(Y page 83). You could otherwise be locked Example: towing eye covers
out when pushing or towing the vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye
G WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There
is a risk of burns when removing the rear
cover.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular
care when removing the rear cover.
Towing eye covers (AMG vehicles)

The mountings for the removable towing eyes
are located in the bumpers. They are at the
front and at the rear, behind the covers.
X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit (Y page 320).
X Pull cover : out of the bumper in the
direction of the arrow by inserting your
fingers into the recess.
X Press the mark on cover ; inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
Z
330 Towing and tow-starting
X Take cover ; off the opening. The automatic transmission automatically

X Screw in and tighten the towing eye shifts to position P when you open the driver's
clockwise to the stop. or front-passenger door or when you remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order
to ensure that the automatic transmission
Removing the towing eye
stays in position N when towing the vehicle,
X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. you must observe the following points:
X Position the top of cover : in the bumper X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
and press it in at the bottom until it the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in
engages. position 0.
X Attach cover ; to the bumper and press X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
until it engages. ignition lock.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button

(Y page 147).
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
raised X Shift the automatic transmission to
! The ignition must be switched off if you position N.

are towing the vehicle with the rear axle X Release the brake pedal.
raised. Intervention by ESP® could X Release the parking brake.
otherwise damage the brake system. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
Only possible for vehicles without (Y page 120).
4MATIC. X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps ignition lock.

(Y page 120). i When towing with the hazard warning
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the lamps switched on, use the combination
ignition lock and remove the SmartKey switch as usual to signal a change of
from the ignition lock. direction. In this case, only the indicator
X When leaving the vehicle, take the
lamps for the direction of travel flash. After
SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. resetting the combination switch, the
hazard warning lamp starts flashing again.
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle
raised, it is important that you observe the
safety instructions (Y page 328). Transporting the vehicle
! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels
Towing a vehicle with both axles on or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle
the ground such as axle or steering components.
Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
(Y page 328). onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
purposes.
Fuses 331
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the Fuses

ignition lock.
position N. G WARNING
As soon as the vehicle is loaded: If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by you replace it with a fuse with a higher
applying the parking brake. amperage, the electric cables could be
overloaded. This could result in a fire. There
is a risk of an accident and injury.
position P.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
new fuses having the correct amperage.
ignition lock and remove the SmartKey
from the ignition lock. ! Only use fuses that have been approved
X Secure the vehicle. for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
have the correct fuse rating for the system
concerned. Otherwise, components or
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles systems could be damaged.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
with either the front or the rear axle raised, faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the
as doing so will damage the transmission. components on the circuit and their functions
stop operating.
If the vehicle has transmission damage or
damage to the front or rear axle, have it Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
transported on a transporter or trailer. the same rating, which you can recognize by
the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
In the event of damage to the electrical in the fuse allocation chart.
system
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
If the battery is defective, the automatic cause traced and rectified at a qualified
transmission will be locked in position P. To specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
shift the automatic transmission to position Mercedes-Benz Center.
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
electrical system in the same way as when
jump-starting (Y page 326). Before changing a fuse
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
or trailer. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 167).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
Tow-starting (emergency engine X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
starting) ignition lock and remove it (Y page 147).
! Vehicles with automatic transmission or
must not be started by tow-starting. This X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure
could otherwise damage the transmission. the ignition is switched off (Y page 147).
You can find information on "Jump-starting" All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
at (Y page 326). must be off.
Z
332 Fuses
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: X Open clamp :.

RFuse box in the engine compartment on the X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed X To close: check whether the rubber seal is
in the direction of travel lying correctly in the cover.
Rfuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side, X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box
when viewed in the direction of travel into the retainer.
the fuse allocation chart is located in the X Fold down cover and close clamps :.
vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment X Secure lines ; in the guides.
under the trunk floor (Y page 320).
X Close the hood.
Fuse box in the engine compartment

Fuse box in the trunk
G WARNING
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the

When the hood is open and the windshield
fuse box when the cover is open.
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it
Always switch off the windshield wipers and is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
the ignition before opening the hood. seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the X Open the trunk lid.
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X Open the hood.
X To open: release cover : at the top right

and left-hand sides with a flat object.
X Open cover : downwards in the direction
of the arrow.
X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture

from the fuse box.
X To open: remove lines ; from the guides.
X Move lines ; aside. Route the lines behind
connection = to do this.
333

Operation ........................................... 334
Winter operation ............................... 336
Check ................................................. 338
Loading the vehicle .......................... 345
All about wheels and tires ............... 349
Changing a wheel ............................. 357
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 362
Emergency spare wheel ................... 367
Wheels and tires

334 Operation
Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics:

Rpay attention to the information and
i This Operator's Manual describes all warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires
models and all standard and optional with run-flat characteristics).
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's Accessories that are not approved for your
Manual. Country-specific differences are vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not
possible. Please note that your vehicle may being used correctly can impair the operating
not be equipped with all features safety.
described. This also applies to safety- Before purchasing and using non-approved
related systems and functions. accessories, visit a qualified specialist
i Read the information on qualified workshop and inquire about:
specialist workshops: (Y page 26). Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Information on the dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
G WARNING
in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
Wheels and tires
(Y page 362).
the wheel brakes or suspension components
Information on air pressure for the tires on
may be damaged. There is a risk of an
your vehicle can be found:
accident.
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original Information placard on the B-pillar
part. (Y page 345)
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct: flap (Y page 165)
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 338)
Rdesignation
Rmodel
When replacing tires, make sure to use the Operation

correct:
Rdesignation
Information on driving
Rmanufacturer If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire
Rmodel
pressures and correct them if necessary.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
G WARNING noises and unusual handling characteristics,
e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
A flat tire severely impairs the driving,
the wheels or tires are damaged. If you
steering and braking characteristics of the
suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your
vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
Tires without run-flat characteristics: as possible to check the wheels and tires for
Rdo not drive with a flat tire. damage. Hidden tire damage could also be
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your causing the unusual handling characteristics.
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Operation 335
and wheels checked at a qualified specialist Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
workshop. particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
When parking your vehicle, make sure that pressure as necessary (Y page 338).
the tires do not get deformed by the curb or Observe the notes on the emergency spare
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over wheel (Y page 367).
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try The service life of tires depends, among other
to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. things, on the following factors:
Otherwise, the tires, particularly the RDrivingstyle
sidewalls, may be damaged.
RTirepressure
RDistance covered
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G WARNING Important safety notes on the tire
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation tread
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle. There is a risk of G WARNING
accident. Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
and replace any damaged tires immediately. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
Wheels and tires

of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your speed is not adapted to suit the driving
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as conditions. There is a risk of accident.
well as after driving off-road or on rough If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of may exhibit different levels of wear at
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
damage such as: should regularly check the tread depth and
Rcuts in the tires the condition of the tread across the entire
Rpunctures
width of all tires.
Rtears
Minimum tire tread depth for:
in the tires
Rbulges RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
on tires
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the For safety reasons, replace the tires before
condition of the tread across the whole width the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
of the tire (Y page 335). If necessary, turn tire tread depth is reached.
the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect
the inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Z
336 Winter operation
Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with
into the tire tread. a flat tire (Y page 321).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
tread. They are visible once the tread depth factory. It is therefore recommended that
is approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the you additionally equip your vehicle with a
case, the tire is so worn that it must be TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
replaced. feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same Winter operation
type and make. General notes
Exception: it is permissible to install a
different type or make in the event of a flat Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
with run-flat characteristics" section Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
(Y page 321). section (Y page 357).
Wheels and tires
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto

the wheels.
Driving with summer tires
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
their full performance after this distance. tires lose elasticity significantly, and
RDo not drive with tires which have too little therefore traction and braking power as well.
tread depth, as this significantly reduces Change the tires on your vehicle to
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
RReplace the tires after six years at the
temperatures could cause cracks to form,
thereby damaging the tires permanently.
latest, regardless of wear.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility
Observe the notes on the emergency spare for this type of damage.
wheel (Y page 367).
M+S tires
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties) G WARNING
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
characteristics), you can continue to drive ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of and do not provide sufficient traction. There
pressure in one or more tires. is a risk of an accident.
MOExtended tires may only be used in M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã
conjunction with an active tire pressure loss in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
warning system or with an active tire pressure
monitor and on wheels specifically tested by At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use
Mercedes-Benz. winter tires or all-weather tires. Both types of
tire are identified by the M+S marking.
Winter operation 337
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
symbol in addition to the M+S marking tire combinations" section under "Tires and
provide the best possible grip in wintry road wheels".
conditions. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
Only these tires will allow driving safety recommends that you only use snow chains
systems such as ABS and ESP® to function that have been specially approved for your
optimally in winter. These tires have been vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a
developed specifically for driving in snow. corresponding standard of quality.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on If you intend to mount snow chains, please
all wheels to maintain safe handling bear the following points in mind:
characteristics. RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
Always observe the maximum permissible wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have wheel-tire combinations (Y page 362).
mounted. ROnly use snow chains when driving on
Once the winter tires are mounted: roads completely covered by snow.
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 341). Remove the snow chains as soon as
X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire possible when you come to a road that is
pressure loss warning system not snow-covered.
Wheels and tires

RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
(Y page 342).
X Restart the tire pressure monitor
snow chains. Observe the appropriate
(Y page 342). regulations if you wish to mount snow
chains.
For more information on driving with the RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 367). speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when
Snow chains pulling away with snow chains installed
(Y page 69). This way you can allow the
G WARNING wheels to spin in a controlled manner,
If snow chains are installed to the front achieving an increased driving force
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle (cutting action).
body or chassis components. This could
For more information on driving with the
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 367).
To avoid hazardous situations:
Rnever install snow chains to the front
wheels
Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
! On vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must

drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains
have been mounted. The vehicle may
! On some tire sizes there is not enough
space for snow chains. To avoid damage to
Z
338 Check
Check Further information on tire pressures can be

obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes Tire and Loading Information placard
G WARNING
Tires with tire pressures that are too low or
too high are associated with the following
hazards:
Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is
heavily laden or when driven at high
speeds.
Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which can severely impair tire
traction.
: Recommended tire pressures
Rthe driving, steering and braking
characteristics may be severely impaired. The Tire and Loading Information placard is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
There is a risk of accident.
(Y page 345).
Wheels and tires
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard
and check the pressure of all the tires
contains the recommended tire pressures for
including the spare wheel:
cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
Rmonthly, at least are valid for the maximum permissible load
Rif the load changes and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
Rbefore beginning a long journey speed.
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving Tire pressure table
If necessary, correct the tire pressure. The tire pressure table is on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
i The specifications on the sample Tire and
Loading Information placard and tire
pressure tables are examples. Tire
pressure specifications are vehicle-specific
and may deviate from the data shown here.
The tire pressure specifications that are
valid for your vehicle can be found on the
Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
for this vehicle by the factory
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here. The tire pressure table contains the
Operation with the emergency spare recommended pressures for cold tires for
wheel (Y page 367). various operating conditions, i.e. differing
load and speed conditions.
Check 339
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this

can lead to an excessive build up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified
Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire
pressure information following is only valid blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
table for different numbers of occupants and valve is leaking.
amounts of luggage. The actual number of
If you are unable to rectify the damage,
seats may differ.
Wheels and tires

G WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire
pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.
This can also result in tire pressure loss. There
is a risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
and can be found on the tire sidewall tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
(Y page 351). does not permit any reliable conclusion about
If the tire pressures have been set to the the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower the electronic tire pressure monitoring
road speeds, the pressures should be reset system, the tire pressure can be checked
to the higher values: using the on-board computer.
Rif you want to drive with an increased load The tire temperature and pressure increase
and/or when the vehicle is in motion. This is
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds. dependent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire
i The tire pressures for increased loads
pressures when the tires are cold.
and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
tire pressure table, may have a negative
effect on driving comfort.
Z
340 Check
The tires are cold: Underinflated tires may:

Rif the vehicle has been parked without Roverheat, leading to tire defects
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three Rhave an adverse effect on handling
hours and characteristics
Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than Rwear quickly and unevenly
1 mile (1.6 km). Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
The tire temperature changes depending on
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed Overinflation
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure G WARNING
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
1.5 psi). Take this into account when because they are damaged more easily by
checking the pressure of warm tires. Only road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the also suffer from irregular wear, which can
current operating conditions. If you check the severely impair the braking properties and the
tire pressure when the tires are warm, the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
resulting value will be higher than if the tires accident.
were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires, including the spare wheel.
Wheels and tires
tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be

too low. Overinflated tires may:
Observe the recommended tire pressures for Rincrease the braking distance
cold tires: Rhave an adverse effect on handling
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard characteristics
on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rwear quickly and unevenly
Rinthe tire pressure table on the inside of Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
the fuel filler flap Rbe more susceptible to damage
Ron the yellow label on the emergency spare
wheel (depending on the vehicle Maximum tire pressures
equipment)
Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation
G WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can
overheat and burst as a consequence. In
addition, they also suffer from excessive and/
or irregular wear, which can severely impair
the braking properties and the driving : Example: maximum permissible tire
characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. pressure
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
tires, including the spare wheel. inflation pressure. Always observe the
recommended tire pressure for your vehicle
Check 341
when adjusting the tire pressure Tire pressure loss warning system
(Y page 338). (Canada only)
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- General notes
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration. While the vehicle is in motion, the tire
pressure loss warning system monitors the
set tire pressure using the rotational speed of
Checking the tire pressures the wheels. This enables the system to detect
significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed
Important safety notes of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
Observe the notes on tire pressure a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
(Y page 338). message will appear in the multifunction
display.
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found: You can recognize the tire pressure loss
warning by the Run Flat Indicator
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Active Press 'OK' to Restart message
Information placard on the B-pillar which appears in the Serv. menu of the
(Y page 345) multifunction display. Further information on
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler the message display can be found under
Wheels and tires

flap (Y page 165) "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning
Rin the "Tire pressure" section system" section (Y page 342).
Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 338)
Checking tire pressures manually The tire pressure warning system does not
To determine and set the correct tire warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
pressure, proceed as follows: Observe the notes on the recommended tire
pressure (Y page 338).
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
be checked. The tire pressure loss warning does not
replace the need to regularly check the tire
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
pressure. An even loss of pressure on several
the valve.
tires at the same time cannot be detected by
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with
the tire pressure loss warning system.
the recommended value on the Tire and
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
Loading Information placard (Y page 338).
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
the recommended value. event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
by pressing down the metal pin in the valve. abrupt steering maneuvers.
Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, The function of the tire pressure loss warning
check the tire pressure again using the tire system is limited or delayed if:
pressure gauge.
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
tires.
X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
Z
342 Check
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style If you wish to confirm the restart:
(cornering at high speeds or driving with X Press the a button.
high rates of acceleration).
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
vehicle or on the roof). X Press the 9 or : button to select
Yes.
Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system message appears in the multifunction
if you have: display.
Rchanged the tire pressure After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
Rchanged the wheels or tires loss warning system will monitor the set
Rmounted new wheels or tires tire pressures of all four tires.
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire If you wish to cancel the restart:
pressures are set properly on all four tires X Press the % button.
for the respective operating conditions.
or
The recommended tire pressures can be X When the Tire Pressure Now OK?
found on the Tire and Loading Information
Wheels and tires
message appears, press the 9

placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
or : button to select Cancel.
or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler
flap. The tire pressure loss warning system X Press the a button.
can only give reliable warnings if you have The tire pressure values stored at the last
set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect restart will continue to be monitored.
tire pressure is set, these incorrect values
will be monitored.
X Also observe the notes in the section on tire Tire pressure monitor
pressures (Y page 338).
General notes
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 147). If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the
X Press the = or ; button on the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor
the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire
steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
pressure monitor warns you if the pressure
X Press the 9 or : button on the
drops in one or more of the tires. The tire
steering wheel to select the Tire pressure monitor only functions if the correct
Pressure menu. sensors are installed on all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in
The Run Flat Indicator Active the multifunction display. After a few minutes
Press 'OK' to Restart message of driving, the current tire pressure of each
appears in the multifunction display. tire is shown in the Service menu of the
multifunction display. For further information
on displaying this message, refer to the
"Checking the tire pressure electronically"
Check 343
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with

the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the warning
lamp will flash for approximately a minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the
vehicle is started as long as the malfunction
Example: current tire pressure display exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
Important safety notes detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
G WARNING TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
should be checked at least once every two
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler
alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size
Wheels and tires

continue to function properly.
than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, the tire
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure label, you should determine the
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
proper tire pressure for those tires.
which is suitable for the operating situation
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has (Y page 338). Note that the correct tire
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring pressure for the current operating situation
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire must first be taught-in to the tire pressure
pressure telltale when one or more of your monitor. If there is a substantial loss of
tires are significantly underinflated. pressure, the warning threshold for the
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure warning message is aligned to the reference
telltale lights up, you should stop and check values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate monitor after adjusting the pressure of the
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a cold tires (Y page 345). The current
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire pressures are saved as new reference values.
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. As a result, a warning message will appear if
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency the tire pressure drops significantly.
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
handling and stopping ability. Please note that of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire the notes on the recommended tire pressure
maintenance, and it is the driver's (Y page 338).
responsibility to maintain correct tire
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
pressure, even if underinflation has not
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when sudden steering movements
the system is not operating properly. The
Z
344 Check
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow X Press the 9 or : button to select
warning lamp in the instrument cluster for Tire Pressure.
indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. X Press the a button.
Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up The current tire pressure of each tire is
indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or shown in the multifunction display.
the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
If the vehicle was parked for longer than
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the 20 minutes, the Tire pressures will be
tire pressure on one or more tires is displayed after driving a few
significantly too low. The tire pressure minutes message is shown.
monitor is not malfunctioning.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a
monitor automatically detects new wheels or
minute and then remains lit constantly, the new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. the tire pressure value to the individual
If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure
it may take more than ten minutes for the tire Monitor Active display message is shown
pressure warning lamp to inform you of the instead of the tire pressure display. The tire
malfunction by flashing for approximately one pressures are already being monitored.
minute and then remaining lit. When the
malfunction has been rectified, the tire i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,
Wheels and tires
pressure warning lamp goes out after a few the system may continue to show the tire
minutes of driving. pressure of the wheel that has been
removed for a few minutes. If this occurs,
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
note that the value displayed for the
board computer may differ from those
position where the spare wheel is mounted
measured at a gas station with a pressure
is not the same as the current tire pressure
gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-
of the emergency spare wheel.
board computer refer to those measured at
sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure
values indicated by a pressure gauge are Tire pressure monitor warning
higher than those shown by the on-board messages
computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
pressures. loss in one or more tires, a warning message
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can is shown in the multifunction display and the
be affected by interference from radio yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp
transmitting equipment (e.g. radio comes on.
headphones, two-way radios) that may be RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message
being operated in or near the vehicle. appears in the multifunction display, the
tire pressure in at least one tire is too low
Checking the tire pressure and must be corrected at the next
electronically opportunity.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position RIf the Check Tire Pressure message
2(Y page 147) in the ignition lock . appears in the multifunction display, the
X Press the = or ; button on the tire pressure in one or more tires has
steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. dropped significantly and the tires must be
checked.
RIf the Tire Malfunction appears in the
multifunction display, the tire pressure in
Loading the vehicle 345
one or more tires has dropped suddenly Tire pressures will be displayed
and the tires must be checked. after driving a few minutes
Observe the instructions and safety notes in message.
the display messages in the "Tires" section X Press the : button.
(Y page 258). The multifunction display shows the Use
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are Current Pressures as New Reference
rotated, the tire pressures may be Values message.
displayed for the wrong positions for a If you wish to confirm the restart:
short time. This is rectified after a few X Press the a button.
minutes of driving, and the tire pressures
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
are displayed for the correct positions.
display.
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
After driving for a few minutes, the system
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, checks whether the current tire pressures
all existing warning messages are deleted and are within the specified range. The new tire
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses pressures are then accepted as reference
the currently set tire pressures as the values and monitored.
reference values for monitoring. In most
If you wish to cancel the restart:
Wheels and tires

cases, the tire pressure monitor will
automatically detect the new reference X Press the % button.
values after you have changed the tire The tire pressure values stored at the last
pressure. However, you can also define restart will continue to be monitored.
reference values manually as described here.
The tire pressure monitor then monitors the
new tire pressure values. Loading the vehicle
X Set the tire pressure to the value
Instruction labels for tires and loads
recommended for the corresponding
driving situation on the Tire and Loading G WARNING
Information placard on the B-pillar on the Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
driver's side (Y page 338). blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
Additional tire pressure values for different steering and driving characteristics and lead
loads can also be found on the tire pressure to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
(Y page 338). rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
on all four wheels. exceeding the maximum load.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show
the maximum possible load.
steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
X Press the 9 or : button to select is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire Pressure. Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum
The multifunction display shows the permissible vehicle load. It also contains
current tire pressure for each tire or the
Z
346 Loading the vehicle
details of the tire sizes and X Specification for maximum gross vehicle
corresponding pressures for tires weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
mounted at the factory. Information placard: "The combined weight
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the of occupants and cargo should never
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
identification plate informs you of the The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up load and luggage must not exceed the
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle specified value.
occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You
can also find information about the i The specifications shown on the Tire and
maximum gross axle weight rating on the Loading Information placard in the
front and rear axle. illustration are examples. The maximum
The maximum gross axle weight rating is permissible gross vehicle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried vehicle-specific and may differ from that in
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never the illustration. You can find the valid
exceed the maximum load or the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
maximum gross axle weight rating for the rating for your vehicle on the Tire and
front or rear axle. Loading Information placard.
Wheels and tires
Number of seats
: B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum permissible gross vehicle Maximum number of seats : indicates the

weight rating maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the
illustration are examples. The number of
seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from
the details shown. The number of seats in
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard.
Loading the vehicle 347
Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX lbs.
Wheels and tires

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
Z
348 Loading the vehicle
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you
are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard (Y page 345).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
Step 2
Wheels and tires

Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver
and occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
occupants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
All about wheels and tires 349
Step 3

Permissible load 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
(maximum gross Ò750 lbs (340 kg) = Ò540 lbs (245 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =
vehicle weight rating 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg)
from the Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus the
gross weight of all
occupants)
Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires

Even if you have calculated the total cargo Uniform Tire Quality Grading
carefully, you should still make sure that the Standards
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can Overview of Tire Quality Grading
be found on the vehicle identification plate on Standards
Wheels and tires

the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 345).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the
gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,
load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum
permissible weight that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
vehicle weight and maximum gross axle U.S. government specifications. Their
weight rating), have your loaded vehicle purpose is to provide drivers with uniform
(including driver, occupants, cargo, and full reliable information on tire performance data.
trailer load if applicable) weighed on a Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using
suitable vehicle weighbridge. three performance factors: : tread wear
grade, ; traction grade and = temperature
grade. These regulations do not apply to
Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North
America are provided with the corresponding
quality grading markings on the sidewall of
the tire.
Where applicable, the tire grading
information can be found on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and maximum
tire width.
Z
350 All about wheels and tires
Example: The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy

RTreadwear grade: 200 road is always lower than on dry road
surfaces.
RTraction grade: AA
You should pay special attention to road
RTemperature grade: A
conditions when temperatures are around
All passenger car tires must conform to the freezing point.
statutory safety requirements in addition to Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
these grades. tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tires. Observe the legally required minimum
specific and may deviate from the values in tire tread depth (Y page 335). Winter tires can
the illustration. reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
Treadwear The braking distance is still much further than
on surfaces that are not icy or covered with
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified Further information on winter tires (M+S
U.S. government course. For example, a tire tires) (Y page 336).
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a Temperature
Wheels and tires
tire graded 100. G WARNING

The relative performance of tires depends The temperature grade for this tire is
upon the actual conditions of their use, established for a tire that is properly inflated
however, and may depart significantly from and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
the norm, due to variations in driving habits, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
service practices and differences in road separately or in combination, can cause
characteristics and climate conditions. excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Traction
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
G WARNING B, and C. These represent the tire's
The traction grade assigned to this tire is resistance to the generation of heat and its
based on straight-ahead braking traction ability to dissipate heat when tested under
tests, and does not include acceleration, controlled conditions on a specified indoor
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
characteristics. temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage excessive temperature can lead to sudden
to the drive train. tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, of performance which all passenger car tires
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
measured under controlled conditions on represent higher levels of performance on the
specified government test surfaces of asphalt laboratory test wheel than the minimum
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor required by law.
traction performance.
Tire labeling Therefore, only use tire types and sizes

approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
Overview tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
: Tire width
; Nominal aspect ratio in %
= Tire code
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
Wheels and tires

? Rim diameter
(Y page 355) A Load bearing index
; DOT, Tire Identification Number B Speed rating
(Y page 354)
= Maximum tire load (Y page 353) General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 340)
may not contain any letters or may contain
A Manufacturer one letter that precedes the size description.
B Tire material (Y page 354) If there is no letter preceding the size
C Tire size designation, load-bearing description (as shown above): these are
capacity and speed index (Y page 351) passenger vehicle tires according to
D Load index (Y page 353) European manufacturing standards.
E Tire name If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
The markings described above are on the tire
manufacturing standards.
in addition to the tire name (sales
designation) and the manufacturer's name. If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may manufacturing standards.
deviate from the data in the example. If "T" precedes the size description: these are
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire
Tire size designation, load-bearing pressure, to be used only temporarily in an
capacity and speed rating emergency.
G WARNING Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing tire width in millimeters.
capacity and the approved maximum speed Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio
could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. between the tire height and tire width and is
There is a risk of accident. shown in percent. The aspect ratio is
Z
calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire Index Speed rating
height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
of the rim flange. The rim diameter is ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
specified in inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
is a numerical code that specifies the
maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"
specified load limit. The maximum in the size description, depending on the
Wheels and tires
permissible load can be found on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).

vehicle's Tire and Loading Information The service specification is made up of
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side load-bearing index A and speed rating
(Y page 345). B.
Example: RIf the size description of your tire includes
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum "ZR" and there are no service
load of 1356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in
bear. For further information on the maximum order to find out the maximum speed.
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see If a service specification is available, the
(Y page 353). maximum speed is limited according to the
For further information on the load bearing speed rating in the service specification.
index, see "Load index" (Y page 353). Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the example, "97 Y" is the service specification.
approved maximum speed of the tire. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating.
The maximum speed of the tire is limited to
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may 186 mph (300 km/h).
deviate from the data in the example. RThe size description for all tires with
Regardless of the speed rating, always maximum speeds of over 186 mph
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the
adapt your driving style to the traffic service specification must be given in
conditions. parentheses. Example:
Summer tires 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)"
indicates that the maximum speed of the
Index Speed rating tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the
tire manufacturer about the maximum
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
speed.
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
All-weather tires and winter tires Load index

Index Speed rating
Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide

the driving characteristics of winter tires.
In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires In addition to the load bearing index, load
also have the i snowflake symbol on index : may be imprinted after the letters
the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill that identify speed index B on the sidewall
the requirements of the Rubber of the tire (Y page 351).
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) example above), represents a standard
regarding the tire traction on snow. They load (SL) tire
Wheels and tires

have been especially developed for driving RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
on snow. tire
An electronic speed limiter prevents your RLight Load: represents a light load tire
vehicle from exceeding the following speeds: RC, D, E: represents a load range that
Rall
vehicles (except AMG vehicles): depends on the maximum load that the tire
130 mph (210 km/h) can carry at a certain pressure
RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h) i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
RAMG vehicles with Performance Package: deviate from the data in the example.
186 mph (300 km/h)
R Maximum load rating
The speed rating of tires mounted at the
factory may be higher than the maximum
speed that the electronic speed limiter
permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 362).
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
Maximum tire load : is the maximum
permissible weight for which the tire is
approved.
1 Or M+Si for winter tires.
Z
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
specified load limit. The maximum Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
permissible load can be found on the by the manufacturer as a code to describe
vehicle's Tire and Loading Information specific characteristics of the tire.
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
(Y page 345).
A provides information about the age of a
i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tire. The first and second positions represent
specific and may deviate from the values in the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
the illustration. for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) For example, a tire that is marked with
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire
2008.
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN
in or on the sidewall of every tire produced. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
Wheels and tires
The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or
retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and
other safety-relevant matters. It makes it This information describes the type of tire
possible for the purchaser to easily identify cord and the number of layers in
the affected tires. sidewall : and under tire tread ;.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer
identification code ;, tire size =, tire type i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
code ? and manufacturing date A. deviate from the data in the example.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire Definition of terms for tires and loading
symbol : indicates that the tire complies
with the requirements of the U.S. Department Tire ply composition and material used
of Transportation. Describes the number of plies or the number
Manufacturer identification code: of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
manufacturer identification code ; provides tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires nylon, polyester and other materials.
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols. Bar
For further information about retreaded tires, Metric unit for tire pressure.
see (Y page 334). 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
1 bar. the driver's side.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Speed rating
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of The speed rating is part of the tire
the United States Department of identification. It specifies the speed range for
Transportation. which the tire is approved.
Normal occupant weight GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The number of occupants for which the The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
vehicle is designed multiplied by of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
68 kilograms (150 lb). wheel, accessories installed, occupants,
luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not
A uniform standard to grade the quality of exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction as specified on the vehicle identification plate
and temperature characteristics. Ratings are on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
government testing procedures. The ratings GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
are molded into the sidewall of the tire. The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
Wheels and tires

weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
Recommended tire pressure the vehicle including all accessories,
The recommended tire pressure applies to occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar
the tires mounted at the factory. noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
The Tire and Loading Information placard weight rating is specified on the vehicle
contains the recommended tire pressures for identification plate on the B-pillar on the
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the driver's side.
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The tire pressure table contains the
recommended pressures for cold tires for The maximum weight is the sum of:
various operating conditions, i.e. differing Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
load and speed conditions. Rthe weight of the accessories
Rthe load limit
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
This is the combined weight of all standard equipment

and optional equipment available for the Kilopascal (kPa)
vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa
installed on the vehicle or not.
corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire
Rim pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire (kPa) to 1 bar.
is mounted. Load index
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight index may also be imprinted on the sidewall
rating. The actual load on an axle must never of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The capacity more precisely.
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
Z
Curb weight Tread

The weight of a vehicle with standard The part of the tire that comes into contact
equipment including the maximum capacity with the road.
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-
conditioning system and optional equipment Bead
if these are installed in the vehicle, but does The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
not include passengers or luggage. securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
Maximum load rating coming loose from the wheel rim.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for Sidewall
which a tire is approved. The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one Weight of optional extras
tire. The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
Maximum load on one tire parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated These optional extras, such as high-
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle performance brakes, level control, a roof rack
Wheels and tires
by two. or a high-performance battery, are not

included in the curb weight and the weight of
PSI (pounds per square inch) the accessories.
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Aspect ratio This is a unique identifier which can be used
Relationship between tire height and tire by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
width in percent. example for a product recall, and thus identify
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
Tire pressure
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
This is pressure inside the tire applying an type code and the manufacturing date.
outward force to each square inch of the tire's
surface. The tire pressure is specified in Load bearing index
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal The load bearing index (also load index) is a
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only code that contains the maximum load bearing
be corrected when the tires are cold. capacity of a tire.
Cold tire pressure Traction
The tires are cold: Traction is the result of friction between the
Rif the vehicle has been parked without tires and the road surface.
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
Treadwear indicators
hours and
Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are
distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread
1 mile (1.6 km).
is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
Changing a wheel 357
Occupant distribution Always observe the instructions and safety

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
their designated seating positions. (Y page 358).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
Total load limit differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rated cargo and luggage load plus Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
number of seats in the vehicle. wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
Changing a wheel can rotate the wheels according to the
Flat tire intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If this is not
You can find information on what to do in the available, the tires should then be replaced
event of a flat tire in the "Breakdown every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
assistance" section (Y page 321). 10,000 km), or earlier if the tire wear requires
Information on driving with MOExtended tires this. Do not change the direction of wheel
in the event of a flat tire can be found under rotation.
"MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
characteristics" (Y page 321).
Wheels and tires

the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in is interchanged. Check the tire pressure and,
the event of a flat tire, the emergency spare if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss
wheel is mounted as described under warning system or the tire pressure monitor.
"Mounting a wheel" (Y page 358).
Direction of rotation
Rotating the wheels
Tires with a specified direction of rotation
G WARNING have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may of hydroplaning. You will only gain these
severely impair the driving characteristics if benefits if the correct direction of rotation is
the wheels or tires have different dimensions. maintained.
The wheel brakes or suspension components An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
may also be damaged. There is a risk of its correct direction of rotation.
accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions. Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
monitor, electronic components are
tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
located in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used
near the valve. This could damage the Cleaning the wheels
electronic components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified G WARNING
specialist workshop. The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
Z
358 Changing a wheel
to the tires or chassis components. Securing the vehicle to prevent it from

Components damaged in this way may fail rolling away
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced
immediately.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
X Apply the parking brake.
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 320).
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position. The folding wheel chock is an additional
safety measure to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away, for example when changing a
Wheels and tires
X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that wheel.

"normal" level is selected (Y page 189). X Fold both plates upwards :.
X Fold out lower plate ;.
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
the openings in base plate =.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status
0. This is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 147).
X If included in the vehicle equipment,
remove the tire-change tool kit from the
vehicle (Y page 320).
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling Securing the vehicle on level ground
away.
X On level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
wheel you wish to change.
Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from

rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Never
disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
X On light downhill gradients: place jack will not be able to achieve its load-
chocks or other suitable items in front of bearing capacity due to the restricted
the wheels of the front and rear axle. height.
Rmake sure that the distance between the
Raising the vehicle underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
G WARNING
Rnever place your hands and feet under the
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
Wheels and tires

raised vehicle.
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is a risk of injury. Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is
Only position the jack at the appropriate raised.

jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lid
jack must be positioned vertically, directly when the vehicle is raised.
under the jacking point of the vehicle. Rmake sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
! The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
The following must be observed when raising
the vehicle:
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used
incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the
vehicle raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on
is being changed. It is not suited for the wheel you wish to change by about one
performing maintenance work under the full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
vehicle. completely.
Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
Z
360 Changing a wheel
Removing a wheel
! AMG vehicles: during removal and
repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim
can strike the ceramic-brake disc and
damage it. Therefore, take precautions and
get a second person to assist you.
Alternatively, you can use a second
alignment bolt.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
Wheels and tires
X Position jack = at jacking point ;.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt

completely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel
Example G WARNING
X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
beneath the jacking point. wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
completely on jacking point ; and the accident.
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
X Turn crank ? until the tire is raised a of damage to the threads, contact a qualified
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G WARNING X Unscrew the alignment bolt.

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip tight.
over. There is a risk of injury. X Vehicles with a collapsible spare
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts wheel: inflate the collapsible spare wheel
when the vehicle is on the ground. (Y page 368).
Only then lower the vehicle.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel"
Lowering the vehicle
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed G WARNING
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that and bolts are not tightened to the specified
you only use wheel bolts which have been tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the Have the tightening torque immediately
respective wheel. checked at a qualified specialist workshop
! AMG vehicle with ceramic brake after a wheel is changed.
discs: during removal and repositioning of
the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ! Vehicles with a collapsible spare
Wheels and tires

ceramic-brake disc and damage it. wheel: before lowering the vehicle, inflate
Therefore, take precautions and have a the collapsible spare wheel with the tire
second person assist you. Alternatively, inflation compressor. The wheel rim could
you can use a second alignment bolt. otherwise be damaged.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold

the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
Tightening the wheel nuts (example: vehicle with

an emergency spare wheel)
X Turn the crank of the jack counter-
clockwise until the vehicle is once again
Positioning a wheel (example: vehicle with an standing firmly on the ground.
emergency spare wheel)
X Place the jack to one side.
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a
surfaces.
crosswise pattern in the sequence
X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
indicated (: to A). The specified
alignment bolt and push it on.
tightening torque is 96 lb-ft(130 Nm).
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are
X Turn the jack back to its initial position.
finger-tight.
Z
362 Wheel and tire combinations
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle Information on tires, wheels and approved
tools in the trunk again. combinations can be obtained from any
X Check the tire pressure of the newly qualified specialist workshop.
mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Overview of abbreviations used in the
Observe the recommended tire pressure following tire tables:
(Y page 338). RBA: both axles
i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all RFA: front axle
wheels mounted must be equipped with RRA: rear axle
functioning sensors. The recommended pressures for various
operating conditions can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
Wheel and tire combinations
with the recommended tire pressures on
General notes the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use tires and the fuel filler flap
wheels which have been approved by Observe the notes on recommended tire
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your pressures under various operating conditions
vehicle. (Y page 338).
Wheels and tires
These tires have been specially adapted for Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
use with the control systems, such as ABS the tires are cold. Comply with the
or ESP®, and are marked as follows: maintenance recommendations of the tire
manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
equip the vehicle with:
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only
right)
certain AMG tires)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
may only be used on wheels that have been
tires)
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not
Only use tires, wheels or accessories
equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
vehicle noise emissions or fuel
kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-
consumption, may otherwise be adversely
flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
affected. In addition, when driving with a
may be obtained from a qualified specialist
load, tire dimension variations could cause
workshop.
the tires to come into contact with the
bodywork and axle components. This could i Not all wheel and tire combinations are
result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. available at the factory for all countries.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for i On the following pages, you can find
damage resulting from the use of tires, information on approved wheel rims and
wheels or accessories other than those tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with
tested and approved. winter tires. Winter tires are not available
Wheel and tire combinations 363
at the factory as standard equipment or

optional extras.
If you would like to equip your vehicle with
approved winter tires, you may also, in
certain circumstances, require rims of the
appropriate size. The sizes of the approved
winter tires may deviate from that of the
standard tires. This is dependent on the
model and the equipment installed at the
factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
information, can be obtained at a qualified
Wheels and tires
Z
Tires
CLS 550
Summer tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended2, 3 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)
R19
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
Wheels and tires
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
All-weather tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S3 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
BA: 255/40 R18 99 V BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
M+SiMOExtended2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
2 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tire pressure
loss warning system or tire pressure monitor.
3 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
Wheel and tire combinations 365
CLS 550 4MATIC

Summer tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL MOExtended2 FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y MOExtended2, 3 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
R19
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheels and tires

All-weather tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+S FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
RA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S3 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2
Winter tires
R18
Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
BA: 255/40 R18 99 V BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2
M+SiMOExtended2 Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)
2 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an active tire pressure
loss warning system or tire pressure monitor.
Z
CLS 63 AMG
Summer tires
R19
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL3 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2
Winter tires
R19
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheels and tires

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si3 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2
CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC

Summer tires
R19
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 285/30 ZR 19 (98 Y) XL3 Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2
Emergency spare wheel 367
Winter tires
R19
Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)
RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2
FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2
RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si3 RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2
Emergency spare wheel Snow chains must not be mounted on

emergency spare wheels.
Wheels and tires

G WARNING
General notes
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type
of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel You should regularly check the pressure of
and the wheel to be replaced may differ. the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may to long trips, and correct the pressure as
severely impair the driving characteristics. necessary (Y page 338). The applicable value
There is a risk of an accident. is found on the wheel or under "Technical
To avoid hazardous situations: data" (Y page 370).
Radapt
An emergency spare wheel may also be
your driving style accordingly and
mounted against the direction of rotation.
drive carefully.
Observe the time restriction on use as well as
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
the speed limitation specified on the
emergency spare wheel that differs in size. emergency spare wheel.
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
wheel of a different size briefly. regardless of wear. This also applies to the
Rdo not switch ESP® off. emergency spare wheel.
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare
i When you are driving with the collapsible
wheel of a different size replaced at the spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure
nearest qualified specialist workshop. loss warning system or the tire pressure
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions monitor cannot function reliably. Only
as well as the tire type must be correct. restart the tire pressure loss warning
system/the tire pressure monitor when the
When using an emergency spare wheel or
damaged wheel has been replaced with a
spare wheel of a different size, you must not
new wheel.
exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:
after mounting an emergency spare wheel,
Z
368 Emergency spare wheel
the system may still display the tire The emergency spare wheel can be found in
pressure of the removed wheel for a few the stowage well under the trunk floor.
minutes. The value displayed for the X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 283).
mounted emergency spare wheel is not the X Reach into cutout : in the tool holder and
same as the current tire pressure of the
lift it up.
emergency spare wheel.
X Remove collapsible spare wheel ;.
Always observe the instructions and safety

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel/ notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
collapsible spare wheel (Y page 358).
Removing the "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
Stowing a used collapsible spare
wheel
! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in
the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise,
moisture may get into the vehicle.
Take the following steps to stow a used
collapsible spare wheel. It will not otherwise
Wheels and tires
install into the spare wheel well. Mercedes-

Benz recommends that you have this work
performed at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The emergency spare wheel can be found in X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.
the stowage well under the trunk floor. X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew
X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 283). the valve insert from the valve and release
X Turn stowage tray ; counter-clockwise the air.
and remove together with vehicle tool kit i Fully deflating the tires can take a few
tray :. minutes.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
wheel =. X Screw the valve cap back on.
X Remove the protective sheet from the
Removing the collapsible spare wheel vehicle tool kit and pull it over the
(AMG vehicles) collapsible spare wheel.
X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the
emergency spare wheel well under the
trunk.
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel

! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using
the tire inflation compressor before
lowering the vehicle. The wheel rim could
Emergency spare wheel 369
! Do not operate the tire inflation The specified tire pressure is printed on the
compressor for longer than eight minutes yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
at a time without a break. It may otherwise X When the specified tire pressure has been
overheat. reached, press on/off switch A on the
The tire inflation compressor can be electric air pump to 0.
operated again once it has cooled down. The tire inflation compressor is switched
off.
ignition lock.
X If the tire pressure is higher than the
specified pressure, press pressure release
button ; until the correct tire pressure has
been reached.
X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from
the valve.
X Screw the valve cap onto the collapsible
X Mount the collapsible spare wheel as spare wheel valve again.

described (Y page 357). X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower
Wheels and tires

The collapsible spare wheel must be section of the blower housing.
mounted before it is inflated. X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the
X Pull connector ? and the air hose out of vehicle.
the housing.
X Remove the cap from the valve on the
collapsible spare wheel.
X Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the
valve.
X Make sure on/off switch A of the tire
inflation compressor is set to 0.
X Insert connector ? into the cigarette
lighter socket or into a 12 V socket in your
vehicle.
Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter
(Y page 288). Observe the notes on
sockets (Y page 289).
X Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation
compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is
shown on pressure gauge =.
X Inflate the tire to the specified tire
pressure.
Z
370 Emergency spare wheel
Technical data
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel
Tires Alloy wheels
T 155/70 R17 110 M4, 5 4.0 B x 17 H24, 5
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 1.34 in (34 mm)
T 155/60 R18 107 M 4.5 B x 18 H2
AMG vehicles
Collapsible spare wheel
Tires Alloy wheels
175/50 – 19 97 P 6.5 B x 19 H2
Wheels and tires
4 Not in conjunction with Sports package code 950.

5 Not for CLS 550 and CLS 550 4MATIC.
371

Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 372
Warranty ............................................ 372
Identification plates ......................... 372
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 373
Vehicle data ...................................... 379
Technical data
372 Identification plates
Useful information Accessories warranties. These are available

at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i This Operator's Manual describes all i If you lose the Service and Warranty
models and all standard and optional Information booklet, contact an authorized
equipment of your vehicle available at the Mercedes-Benz Center to arrange a
time of publication of the Operator's replacement. It will be mailed to you.
not be equipped with all features Identification plates
related systems and functions. Vehicle identification plate with
vehicle identification number (VIN)
Information regarding technical data
i The data stated here specifically refers to

a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
levels.
Technical data
X Open the driver's door.

Warranty You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the

warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
replace and repair all factory-installed parts
in accordance with the following warranty
terms and conditions:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission Systems Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, ; VIN
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, = Paint code
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control System Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon
Laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Service products and filling capacities 373
Engine number
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

; VIN
: Emission control information plate,
= Paint code including the certification of both federal
i The data shown on the vehicle and Californian emissions standards
identification plate is used only as an ; Engine number (stamped into the
example. This data is different for every crankcase)
vehicle and can deviate from the data = VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
shown here. You can find the data
applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate. Service products and filling
capacities
Technical data
VIN Important safety notes
G WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and
hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
H Environmental note
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its
Dispose of service products in an
rearmost position.
environmentally responsible manner.
X Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see VIN ;. Service products include the following:
The VIN can also be found in the following RFuels
locations: RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield RCoolant
(Y page 373) RBrake fluid
Ron the vehicle identification plate RWindshield washer fluid
(Y page 372) RClimate control system refrigerant
Z
374 Service products and filling capacities
Comply with all valid regulations with respect If you or others come into contact with fuel,
to handling, storing, and disposing of service observe the following:
fluids. RWash away fuel from skin immediately
Components and service products must be using soap and water.
matched. You should therefore only use RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
products that have been tested and approved
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
by Mercedes-Benz.
clean water. Seek medical assistance
Information on tested and approved products without delay.
can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes- RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical
Benz Center or on the Internet at
assistance without delay. Do not induce
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
vomiting.
You can recognize service products approved RImmediately change out of clothing which
by Mercedes-Benz by the following
has come into contact with fuel.
inscription on the containers:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
Tank capacity
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations Model Total
indicate a level of quality or a specification in capacity
accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.
MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been All models 21.1 US gal
approved by Mercedes-Benz. (80.0 l)
Technical data
Model Of which
Fuel reserve
Important safety notes All models (except for Approx.
AMG vehicles) 2.4 US qt
G WARNING
(9.0 l)
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and All models (AMG vehicles) Approx.
explosion. 3.7 US gal
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating (14.0 l)
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before Gasoline
refueling.
Fuel grade
G WARNING ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. gasoline engine. Do not switch on the
There is a risk of injury. ignition if you accidentally refuel with the
You must make sure that fuel does not come wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel wrong fuel could result in damage to the
vapors. Keep fuel away from children. fuel system and the engine. Notify a
qualified specialist workshop and have the
fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! To ensure the longevity and full Information on refueling (Y page 165).

performance of the engine, only premium-
grade unleaded gasoline must be used. Additives
If standard premium-grade unleaded ! Operating the engine with fuel additives
gasoline is unavailable and unleaded added later can lead to engine failure. Do
gasoline of a lower grade is used for not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does
refueling, observe the following not include additives for the removal and
precautions: prevention of residue buildup. gasoline
must only be mixed with additives
Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply
regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with the instructions for use on the product
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline label. More information about
as soon as possible. recommended additives can be obtained
Rdo not drive at the maximum speed. from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Ravoid sudden acceleration and engine Center.
speeds above 3000 rpm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
Rnever refuel using fuel with a octane branded fuels that have additives.
number lower than 87. Otherwise, Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This
engine failure could occur. causes unnecessary costs and could lead to
Only refuel using unleaded gasoline with a engine failure.
minimum octane rating of 91. If gasoline with Carbon deposits may form if the availability
a lower octane rating is used, engine damage of gasoline with relevant additives is
may occur. insufficient (in certain regions). In this case,
Technical data
If unleaded gasoline is unavailable and Mercedes-Benz recommends additives
gasoline of an octane grade lower than 91 is approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles;
used, observe the following precautions: see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
ROnly refuel using enough gasoline to reach
a gas station that offers unleaded gasoline.
Engine oil
RDo not under any circumstances refuel
using gasoline with a lower octane rating General notes
than 87. Otherwise, immediate engine
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
damage may occur.
specification other than is necessary to
RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine
fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do
speeds over 3,000 rpm. not change the engine oil or oil filter in
Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not order to achieve longer replacement
permitted. E10 fuel, a mixture of 10% ethanol intervals than those prescribed. You could
and 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used. otherwise cause engine damage or damage
You will usually find information about the fuel to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the Follow the instructions in the service
label on the pump, ask the staff for interval display regarding the oil change.
assistance. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and
i For further information, consult a the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
qualified specialist workshop or on the Comply with the important safety notes for
Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA service products when handling engine oil
only). (Y page 373).
Z
The engine oils are matched to the Engine oil viscosity

performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and
service intervals. You should therefore only
use engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with maintenance
systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
Model Engine MB
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
model Approval
this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
CLS 550 278 229.5 means that it is thin.
CLS 550 4MATIC Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
CLS 63 AMG 157 229.5 temperatures. The table shows you which
CLS 63 AMG SAE classifications are to be used. The low-
4MATIC temperature characteristics of engine oils
can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore
Technical data
for AMG vehicles. strongly recommended that you carry out

regular oil changes using an approved engine
i MB approval is indicated on the oil oil with the appropriate SAE classification.
containers.
Filling capacities Brake fluid

The following values refer to an oil change
G WARNING
including the oil filter.
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
Model Capacity from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
All models (except 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
for AMG vehicles)
brake system when the brakes are applied
All models (AMG With external oil hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
vehicles) cooler: 9.0 US qt There is a risk of an accident.
(8.5 l) You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
Additives
Comply with the important safety notes for
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. service products when handling brake fluid
This could damage the engine. (Y page 373).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- The coolant is a mixture of water and
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs
Information about approved brake fluid can the following tasks:
be obtained at any qualified specialist Rcorrosion protection
workshop or on the Internet at Rantifreeze protection
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Rraising the boiling point
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
a qualified specialist workshop and the to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance coolant during operation is approximately
Booklet. 266 ‡ (130 †).
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the engine cooling system
Coolant should:
Important safety notes Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
G WARNING approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
components in the engine compartment, it
down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
will not be dissipated as effectively.
Let the engine cool down before you add
If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal
antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not
amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion
spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly
inhibitor.
Technical data
clean the antifreeze from components before
starting the engine. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in
! Only add coolant that has been premixed accordance with MB Specifications for
with the desired antifreeze protection. You Service Products 310.1.
could otherwise damage the engine. The coolant is checked with every
Further information on coolants can be maintenance interval at a qualified specialist
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications workshop.
for Service Products, MB Specifications for i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the filled with a coolant mixture that ensures
Internet at adequate antifreeze and corrosion
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or protection.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, Filling capacities
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail. Model Capacity
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not All models (except Approx. 13.0 US qt
sufficiently protected from corrosion and for AMG vehicles) (12.3 l)
overheating.
All models (AMG Approx. 11.5 US qt
Comply with the important safety precautions vehicles) (10.9 l)
for service products when handling coolant
(Y page 373).
i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion
inhibitor/antifreeze.
Z
Windshield washer system and At temperatures below freezing:

headlamp cleaning system X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB
WinterFit.
G WARNING Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside
Windshield washer concentrate is highly temperature.
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB
engine components or the exhaust system it WinterFit to 2 parts water.
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB
Make sure that no windshield washer WinterFit to 1 part water.
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for WinterFit to 1 part water.
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
could damage the plastic lenses of the fluid all year round.
headlamps.
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the Climate control system refrigerant
level sensor may be damaged.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
washer fluid should be mixed together. The Type of refrigerant
Technical data
spray nozzles may otherwise become The climate control system of your vehicle is
blocked. filled with refrigerants R-134a.
Comply with the important safety notes for The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
service products when handling washer fluid type used can be found on the radiator cross
(Y page 373). member.
At temperatures above freezing:
Refrigerant R-134a
X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. ! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAG
MB SummerFit. oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
used. The approved PAG oil may not be
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
approved for R-134a refrigerant.
Otherwise, the climate control system may
be damaged.
Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant
or replacing components, may only be carried
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations must be adhered to,
SAE standard J639 included.
Always have work on the climate control
system carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Vehicle data 379
Refrigerant instruction label Vehicle data

General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
of:
- tires
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
Example: refrigerant instruction label Rthe vehicle length specified includes the
: Warning symbol front license plate adapter.
; Refrigerant filling capacity
= Applicable SAE standards
? PAG oil part number
A Type of refrigerant
Warning symbols : indicate:
Rpossible dangers
Rhaving service work carried out at a
Technical data
qualified specialist workshop
Filling capacities
All models Capacity

Refrigerant 590 ± 10 g
(20.8 ± 0.4 oz)
PAG oil 120 g
(4.2 oz)
Z
380 Vehicle data
Dimensions and weights All models (AMG

vehicles)
Vehicle length 196.7 in (4996 mm)
Vehicle width 81.7 in (2075 mm)
including exterior
mirrors
Vehicle height 55.4 in (1406 mm)
Wheelbase 113.1 in (2874 mm)
Turning radius 37.1 ft (11.30 m)
Model Opening height : Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)
All models (except 69.8 in Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg)
AMG vehicles) (1772 mm) load
CLS 63 AMG 70.0 in

(1777 mm)
CLS 63 AMG 71.1 in
4MATIC (1806 mm)
Technical data
All models (except

AMG vehicles)
Vehicle length 195.1 in (4956 mm)
Vehicle width 81.7 in (2075 mm)
including exterior
mirrors
Vehicle height 55.3 in (1404 mm)
Wheelbase 113.1 in (2874 mm)
Turning radius 37.0 ft (11.27 m)
Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg)
load

2014 CLS PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 CLS PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CLS

! Notes on material damage alert you to

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right

Keep printed copies of the documents in the

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 29

Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 39

Opening and closing ........................... 75

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 97

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 115

Climate control ................................. 129

Driving and parking .......................... 145

On-board computer and displays .... 217

Stowage and features ...................... 277

Maintenance and care ...................... 305

Breakdown assistance ..................... 319

Wheels and tires ............................... 333

Technical data ................................... 371

1, 2, 3 ... Air bags

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Transmission position display ........ 155

Parking brake ................................ 169 Center console

Refrigerant ..................................... 378 Cooling

Display messages Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 162

Driving tips Emergency release

ESP® (Electronic Stability Displaying the current

Headlamps Manual control ............................... 124

Light function, active Low-beam headlamps

Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant

Rear window defroster Belt force limiters ............................ 59

Setting the air distribution ............... 138 Speedometer

Stowage net ................................... 281 Speed alert .................................... 298

Characteristics .............................. 354 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 356

Opening/closing (automatically Vehicle emergency locking ................ 84

Tightening torque ........................... 361

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts More than 300,000 different genuine

Service and vehicle operation notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in

Change of address or change of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

Data stored in the vehicle

Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE

Function Page Function Page

i Adjust the instrument cluster lighting

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page Function Page

B J Brakes (Canada only) L T Parking lamps 118

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

Center console, lower section

F K COMAND controller; see

Center console, lower section (AMG vehicles)

Function Page Function Page

Overhead control panel

D Buttons for the garage door

Door control panel

Function Page Function Page

Useful information .............................. 40

Useful information Occupant safety

i This Operator's Manual describes all Important safety notes

In this section, you will learn the most

covers, badges, etc. to the: abrasions or other, potentially more serious

G WARNING As the air bag inflates with considerable

Air bags provide additional protection; they used

All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat vehicle

front air bag. In the second stage, the front